Uns 1e PDF

UNS-1Ew
Flight Management System

SCN 1001/1101
Installation Manual
The information contained herein is subject to Export Administration Regulations (“EAR”),

15 C.F.R. Parts 730-774. Diversion contrary to U.S. law is prohibited.
This publication is available at www.uasc.com.
©2014 UNIVERSAL AVIONICS SYSTEMS CORPORATION

ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
3260 East Universal Way

Tucson, AZ 85756-5097
•
(520) 295-2300 (800) 321-5253 34-60-67 1 August 2014
UNS-1Ew Flight Management System SCN 1001/1101 Installation Manual
Record of Revisions
Rev. No. Issue Date Insertion Date Initials
Original 8 July 2014 8 July 2014 UASC
1 1 August 2014 1 August 2014 UASC
Retain this record in front of the manual. Upon receipt of revision, insert and remove pages
according to the List of Effective Pages. Then enter on this page the revision number, issue date,
insertion date and your initials.
Page ROR-1
The information contained herein is subject to the Export Administration Regulation
(“EAR”), 15 C.F.R. Parts 730-774. Diversion contrary to U.S. law is prohibited.
34-60-67 1 August 2014
Record of Temporary Changes

Change No. Issue Date Insertion Date & Initials Removal Date & Initials
1 11 September 2014 11 September 2014 / UASC
2 26 January 2015 26 January 2015 / UASC
3 15 March 2016 15 March 2016 / UASC
Retain this record in the front of this manual. Upon receipt of a Temporary Change, insert pages into
manual and enter the Temporary Change number, issue date, insertion date and your initials. Also,
record the removal of each temporary change.
Page ROTC-1
34-60-67 8 July 2014
Change No. Issue Date Insertion Date & Initials Removal Date & Initials
Retain this record in the front of this manual. Upon receipt of a Temporary Change, insert pages into
manual and enter the Temporary Change number, issue date, insertion date and your initials. Also,
record the removal of each temporary change.
Page ROTC-2
34-60-67 8 July 2014
List of Effective Pages

Pages affected by the latest revisions are indicated by an asterisk (*) preceding the page number.
SUBJECT PAGE DATE SUBJECT PAGE DATE
Title Page * 1 Aug/14 26 8 Jul/14
27 8 Jul/14
Record of Revisions *ROR-1 1 Aug/14 28 8 Jul/14
29 8 Jul/14
Record of Temporary ROTC-1 8 Jul/14 30 8 Jul/14
Changes ROTC-2 8 Jul/14 31 8 Jul/14
32 8 Jul/14
List of Effective Pages *LEOP-1 1 Aug/14 33 8 Jul/14
*LEOP-2 1 Aug/14 34 8 Jul/14
*LEOP-3 1 Aug/14 35 8 Jul/14
36 8 Jul/14
Table of Contents TOC-1 8 Jul/14
TOC-2 8 Jul/14 FAA Approval 101 8 Jul/14
TOC-3 8 Jul/14 102 8 Jul/14
TOC-4 8 Jul/14 103 8 Jul/14
TOC-5 8 Jul/14 104 8 Jul/14
TOC-6 8 Jul/14 105 8 Jul/14
106 8 Jul/14
Introduction Intro-1 8 Jul/14 107 8 Jul/14
Intro-2 8 Jul/14 *108 1 Aug/14
109 8 Jul/14
Description and 1 8 Jul/14 110 8 Jul/14
Operation 2 8 Jul/14 111 8 Jul/14
3 8 Jul/14 112 8 Jul/14
4 8 Jul/14 113 8 Jul/14
5 8 Jul/14 114 8 Jul/14
6 8 Jul/14 115 8 Jul/14
7 8 Jul/14 116 8 Jul/14
8 8 Jul/14 117 8 Jul/14
9 8 Jul/14 118 8 Jul/14
10 8 Jul/14 119 8 Jul/14
11 8 Jul/14 120 8 Jul/14
12 8 Jul/14 121 8 Jul/14
13 8 Jul/14 122 8 Jul/14
14 8 Jul/14 123 8 Jul/14
15 8 Jul/14 124 8 Jul/14
16 8 Jul/14 125 8 Jul/14
17 8 Jul/14 126 8 Jul/14
18 8 Jul/14 127 8 Jul/14
19 8 Jul/14 128 8 Jul/14
20 8 Jul/14 *129 1 Aug/14
21 8 Jul/14 *130 1 Aug/14
22 8 Jul/14 *131 1 Aug/14
23 8 Jul/14 *132 1 Aug/14
24 8 Jul/14 *133 1 Aug/14
25 8 Jul/14 *134 1 Aug/14
Page LEOP-1
34-60-67 1 August 2014
*135 1 Aug/14 Installation And 301 8 Jul/14
*136 1 Aug/14 Wiring 302 8 Jul/14
*137 1 Aug/14 303 8 Jul/14
*138 1 Aug/14 304 8 Jul/14
*139 1 Aug/14 305 8 Jul/14
*140 1 Aug/14 306 8 Jul/14
*141 1 Aug/14 307 8 Jul/14
*142 1 Aug/14 308 8 Jul/14
*143 1 Aug/14 309 8 Jul/14
*144 1 Aug/14 310 8 Jul/14
311 8 Jul/14
Equipment 201 8 Jul/14 312 8 Jul/14
Specifications 202 8 Jul/14 313 8 Jul/14
203 8 Jul/14 314 8 Jul/14
204 8 Jul/14 315 8 Jul/14
205 8 Jul/14 316 8 Jul/14
206 8 Jul/14 317 8 Jul/14
207 8 Jul/14 318 8 Jul/14
208 8 Jul/14 319 8 Jul/14
209 8 Jul/14 320 8 Jul/14
210 8 Jul/14 321 8 Jul/14
211 8 Jul/14 322 8 Jul/14
212 8 Jul/14 323 8 Jul/14
213 8 Jul/14 324 8 Jul/14
214 8 Jul/14 325 8 Jul/14
215 8 Jul/14 326 8 Jul/14
216 8 Jul/14 327 8 Jul/14
217 8 Jul/14 328 8 Jul/14
218 8 Jul/14 329 8 Jul/14
219 8 Jul/14 330 8 Jul/14
220 8 Jul/14 331 8 Jul/14
221 8 Jul/14 332 8 Jul/14
222 8 Jul/14 333 8 Jul/14
223 8 Jul/14 334 8 Jul/14
224 8 Jul/14 335 8 Jul/14
225 8 Jul/14 336 8 Jul/14
226 8 Jul/14 337 8 Jul/14
227 8 Jul/14 338 8 Jul/14
228 8 Jul/14 339 8 Jul/14
229 8 Jul/14 340 8 Jul/14
230 8 Jul/14 341 8 Jul/14
231 8 Jul/14 342 8 Jul/14
232 8 Jul/14 343 8 Jul/14
233 8 Jul/14 344 8 Jul/14
234 8 Jul/14 345 8 Jul/14
235 8 Jul/14 346 8 Jul/14
236 8 Jul/14 347 8 Jul/14
237 8 Jul/14 348 8 Jul/14
238 8 Jul/14 349 8 Jul/14
239 8 Jul/14 350 8 Jul/14
Page LEOP-2
34-60-67 1 August 2014
351 8 Jul/14 533 8 Jul/14
352 8 Jul/14 534 8 Jul/14
353 8 Jul/14 535 8 Jul/14
354 8 Jul/14 536 8 Jul/14
355 8 Jul/14 537 8 Jul/14
356 8 Jul/14 538 8 Jul/14
357 8 Jul/14 539 8 Jul/14
358 8 Jul/14 540 8 Jul/14
359 8 Jul/14 541 8 Jul/14
360 8 Jul/14 542 8 Jul/14
361 8 Jul/14 543 8 Jul/14
362 8 Jul/14 544 8 Jul/14
363 8 Jul/14 545 8 Jul/14
364 8 Jul/14 546 8 Jul/14
547 8 Jul/14
System Data 401 8 Jul/14 548 8 Jul/14
Installation 549 8 Jul/14
550 8 Jul/14
Maintenance, 501 8 Jul/14 551 8 Jul/14
Checkout, and 502 8 Jul/14 552 8 Jul/14
Troubleshooting 503 8 Jul/14 553 8 Jul/14
504 8 Jul/14 554 8 Jul/14
505 8 Jul/14 555 8 Jul/14
506 8 Jul/14 556 8 Jul/14
507 8 Jul/14 557 8 Jul/14
508 8 Jul/14 558 8 Jul/14
509 8 Jul/14 559 8 Jul/14
510 8 Jul/14 560 8 Jul/14
511 8 Jul/14 561 8 Jul/14
512 8 Jul/14 562 8 Jul/14
513 8 Jul/14 563 8 Jul/14
514 8 Jul/14 564 8 Jul/14
515 8 Jul/14 565 8 Jul/14
516 8 Jul/14 566 8 Jul/14
517 8 Jul/14 567 8 Jul/14
518 8 Jul/14 568 8 Jul/14
519 8 Jul/14 569 8 Jul/14
520 8 Jul/14 570 8 Jul/14
521 8 Jul/14 571 8 Jul/14
522 8 Jul/14 572 8 Jul/14
523 8 Jul/14 573 8 Jul/14
524 8 Jul/14 574 8 Jul/14
525 8 Jul/14 575 8 Jul/14
526 8 Jul/14 576 8 Jul/14
527 8 Jul/14
528 8 Jul/14 Navigation Systems 601 8 Jul/14
529 8 Jul/14
530 8 Jul/14 Fuel Flow Inputs 701 8 Jul/14
531 8 Jul/14
532 8 Jul/14
Page LEOP-3
34-60-67 1 August 2014
Table of Contents
Record of Revisions........................................................................................................ 1
Record of Temporary Revisions ..................................................................................... 1
List of Effective Pages .................................................................................................... 1
Table of Contents............................................................................................................ 1
Introduction..................................................................................................................... 1
Makeup and Use of This Manual ..................................................................................................... 1
Application ................................................................................................................................ 1
Organization .............................................................................................................................. 2
Abbreviations and Terminology ...................................................................................................... 2
Contact Information ......................................................................................................................... 2
Description and Operation .............................................................................................. 1
Description ....................................................................................................................................... 1
General ....................................................................................................................................... 1
System Components .................................................................................................................. 7
System Interfaces ..................................................................................................................... 10
FMS Components .................................................................................................................... 18
FMS Functions......................................................................................................................... 23
Operation ....................................................................................................................................... 30
General ..................................................................................................................................... 30
Data Transfer Unit (DTU-100) ................................................................................................ 33
Solid State Data Transfer Unit (SSDTU) ................................................................................ 33
EFIS Radar Panel (ERP) .......................................................................................................... 36
FAA Approval ............................................................................................................ 101
General ......................................................................................................................................... 101
Applicable TSOs .................................................................................................................... 101
Applicable Advisory Circulars .............................................................................................. 102
Reference Documents ............................................................................................................ 103
Universal Avionics Publications and Documents.................................................................. 103
TSO Deviations ..................................................................................................................... 105
Non-TSO Functions ............................................................................................................... 108
Installation Procedures and Limitations................................................................................. 108
Page TOC-1
34-60-67 8 July 2014
Software Criticality ......................................................................................................................109
Airborne Electronic Hardware .....................................................................................................111
Instructions for Continuous Airworthiness ..................................................................................112
General Information ...............................................................................................................112
Airworthiness Limitations .....................................................................................................112
Environmental Qualification Forms ............................................................................................113
Sample Airplane Flight Manual ...................................................................................................129
Equipment Specifications ........................................................................................... 201
Equipment Identification..............................................................................................................201
UNS-1Ew FMS Equipment ...................................................................................................201
Compatible Peripheral Equipment .........................................................................................202
Technical Manuals .................................................................................................................203
UNS-1Ew Part Number Matrix .............................................................................................204
Configuration Module ............................................................................................................204
5-Inch FPCDU .......................................................................................................................204
4-Inch FPCDU (P/N 1117-XX) .............................................................................................205
4-Inch FPCDU (P/N 1117-X-XXX) ......................................................................................205
Multifunction Control Display Unit (MCDU) .......................................................................205
Data Transfer Unit (DTU-100) Part Number Matrix .............................................................206
Portable Data Transfer Unit (PDTU-100) ..............................................................................206
Solid State Data Transfer Unit ...............................................................................................206
Portable Solid State Data Transfer Unit.................................................................................206
UNS-1Ew Part Number Configuration ..................................................................................207
Power Specifications ....................................................................................................................208
Equipment Specifications ............................................................................................................209
UNS-1Ew ...............................................................................................................................209
LPV Monitor ..........................................................................................................................209
5-Inch FPCDU .......................................................................................................................209
4-Inch FPCDU .......................................................................................................................210
Data Transfer Unit (DTU-100) ..............................................................................................210
SSDTU ...................................................................................................................................210
Portable SSDTU.....................................................................................................................211
GPS/SBAS Antenna (10708) .................................................................................................212
GPS/SBAS Sirius Antenna (10709).......................................................................................213
GPS/SBAS XM Weather and Radio Antenna (10710)..........................................................214
Page TOC-2
34-60-67 8 July 2014
FMS Annunciators ................................................................................................................. 215
Installation Kits ............................................................................................................................ 218
UNS-1Ew Installation Kit ...................................................................................................... 218
LPV Monitor Installation Kit ................................................................................................. 218
4-Inch and 5-Inch FPCDU Installation Kit ............................................................................ 219
DTU-100 Installation Kit ....................................................................................................... 219
Portable DTU-100 Installation Kit ........................................................................................ 220
SSDTU Installation Kit.......................................................................................................... 220
Portable SSDTU Installation Kit ........................................................................................... 221
GPS Antenna 10708 Installation Kit ..................................................................................... 221
GPS/Sirius (10709) or GPS/XM (10710) Antenna Installation Kit ...................................... 221
Required Tools............................................................................................................................. 222
Crimping Tools Required ...................................................................................................... 222
Pin Insertion/Extraction Tools Required ............................................................................... 222
Wire and Cable Manufacturers .................................................................................................... 222
Equipment Drawings ................................................................................................................... 223
UNS-1Ew ............................................................................................................................... 223
Configuration Module Installation......................................................................................... 225
LPV Monitor .......................................................................................................................... 226
LPV Monitor 2MCU Rack .................................................................................................... 227
5-Inch FPCDU ....................................................................................................................... 228
4-Inch FPCDU ....................................................................................................................... 230
DTU-100 ................................................................................................................................ 234
SSDTU................................................................................................................................... 235
ERP ........................................................................................................................................ 236
GPS/SBAS Antenna (10708) ................................................................................................. 237
GPS/SBAS Sirius Antenna (10709) ...................................................................................... 238
GPS/SBAS XM Antenna (10710) ......................................................................................... 239
Installation and Wiring ............................................................................................... 301
General ......................................................................................................................................... 301
Form – Dimensions and Communications ............................................................................ 301
Sensor/Equipment Compatibility/Selection........................................................................... 301
Electrical Connectors ............................................................................................................. 307
Remote Annunciators ............................................................................................................ 307
FMS Mounting....................................................................................................................... 307
Page TOC-3
34-60-67 8 July 2014
Antenna Mounting .................................................................................................................307
Solid State Data Transfer Unit ...............................................................................................310
FMS Interfaces .............................................................................................................................312
Analog Inputs .........................................................................................................................312
Discrete Inputs .......................................................................................................................313
Digital Inputs..........................................................................................................................314
Analog Outputs ......................................................................................................................318
Discrete Outputs.....................................................................................................................320
Digital Outputs .......................................................................................................................321
Pin Assignments...........................................................................................................................323
UNS-1Ew – Analog (3017-XX-X11) ....................................................................................323
UNS-1Ew – All Digital (3017-XX-X21) ...............................................................................326
UNS-1Ew – ASCB Version A (3017-XX-X31) ....................................................................329
5-Inch FPCDU .......................................................................................................................332
4-Inch FPCDU .......................................................................................................................333
LPV Monitor ..........................................................................................................................335
DTU-100 ................................................................................................................................336
SSDTU ...................................................................................................................................337
UNS-1Ew Wiring.........................................................................................................................338
UNS-1Ew Configurations ............................................................................................................339
Power and Configuration Module ..........................................................................................339
Dual SBAS FMS – Analog Configuration .............................................................................340
Dual SBAS FMS – Digital Configuration .............................................................................342
Dual SBAS FMS – EFI-890R Digital Configuration ............................................................344
LPV Monitor Power Installation ............................................................................................345
Single SBAS FMS to LPV Monitor – Analog Configuration ...............................................346
Single SBAS FMS to LPV Monitor – Digital Configuration ................................................347
5-Inch FPCDU .......................................................................................................................348
4-Inch FPCDU .......................................................................................................................349
DTU-100 ................................................................................................................................350
Portable DTU .........................................................................................................................351
SSDTU Installation and DTU-100 Replacement ...................................................................352
Portable SSDTU.....................................................................................................................353
Portable SSDTU (Portable DTU-100 Retrofit)......................................................................354
Compass, Heading and Fuel Flow – Analog Configuration ..................................................355
Page TOC-4
34-60-67 8 July 2014
Compass, Heading and Fuel Flow – Digital Configuration ................................................... 356
Standard AC Pitch – Analog Configuration .......................................................................... 357
ARINC Input Ports ................................................................................................................ 358
ARINC Output Ports.............................................................................................................. 359
Discrete Inputs ....................................................................................................................... 360
Discrete Outputs .................................................................................................................... 361
CDSB Ports ............................................................................................................................ 362
ASCB Version A ................................................................................................................... 363
Video...................................................................................................................................... 364
System Data Installation ............................................................................................. 401
Maintenance, Checkout and Troubleshooting ........................................................... 501
Maintenance ................................................................................................................................. 501
Installation Checkout ................................................................................................................... 502
Ground Test Plan ................................................................................................................... 502
Flight Test Plan ...................................................................................................................... 515
Operational Checkout .................................................................................................................. 533
CDU/FMS Self-Test .............................................................................................................. 533
CDU Keyboard Dimming and Display Offset ....................................................................... 537
FMS Configuration Verification ............................................................................................ 537
Static Test .............................................................................................................................. 538
Interface Checkout ....................................................................................................................... 540
HSI Test ................................................................................................................................. 540
Winds Display (EFIS Only) ................................................................................................... 540
DME Interface Test................................................................................................................ 540
VOR Test (without RRS)....................................................................................................... 541
DTU-100 Test ........................................................................................................................ 541
SSDTU Test ........................................................................................................................... 542
Approach Mode Test ............................................................................................................. 543
Sensors Checkout......................................................................................................................... 544
IRS ......................................................................................................................................... 544
GPIRS .................................................................................................................................... 544
SBAS1 ................................................................................................................................... 545
UASC Radio Reference Sensor ............................................................................................. 545
Air Data Test.......................................................................................................................... 545
Fuel Flow Test ....................................................................................................................... 546
Page TOC-5
34-60-67 8 July 2014
GPIRS Checkout ....................................................................................................................546
GPS/SBAS Checkout ...................................................................................................................551
FMS Power On Self-Test – Initialization and LPV Annunciation Test.................................551
GPS/SBAS Sensor Evaluation ...............................................................................................551
Flight Plan with LPV Approach.............................................................................................552
CDU Display of RNP/ANP....................................................................................................553
GPS/SBAS Dynamic Test ......................................................................................................553
Antenna Offsets Test..............................................................................................................556
Troubleshooting ...........................................................................................................................558
Self-Test .................................................................................................................................559
System Failure Messages .......................................................................................................560
Database Update Error Messages...........................................................................................572
Configuration Verification .....................................................................................................573
FMS Self-Test Output Checkout ...........................................................................................574
FMS Output to HSI Checkout................................................................................................574
DIST/GS Checkout ................................................................................................................574
HSI From Checkout ...............................................................................................................574
DIST/BRG Checkout .............................................................................................................574
Roll Steering Checkout ..........................................................................................................575
Input and Selected Crosstrack Checkout ...............................................................................575
DME Checkout ......................................................................................................................575
Winds Display Checkout .......................................................................................................575
Sensor Checkout ....................................................................................................................575
Navigation Systems .................................................................................................... 601
Fuel Flow Inputs ......................................................................................................... 701
Page TOC-6
34-60-67 8 July 2014
Introduction
1. Makeup and Use of this Manual
A. Application
This Technical Manual for the UNS-1Ew is applicable to the components and software
control numbers (SCN) noted below. The SCN is printed on the component data label. The
“w” reference in the FMS name implies that these FMS systems are combined with the
Satellite Based Augmentation System (SBAS) subsystem.
This Technical Manual is used for installation and basic wiring. Refer to the SBAS FMS SCN
1001/1101 Interface Manual, Report No. 34-60-71, for wiring diagrams covering specific
installations. Refer to the SBAS FMS SCN 1001/1101 Configuration Manual, Report No. 34-
61-02 for detailed FMS/MMMS software configuration instructions.
UNS-1Ew Flight Management System, P/Ns 3017-XX-XX1 and 3017-3X-XX1M.
Configuration Module, P/N 30171
5-Inch Flat Panel CDU (FPCDU), P/N 1018-X-XXX using SCN 10.X and later SCN
4-Inch FPCDU, P/N 1117-X-XXX using SCN 20.X and later SCN
LPV Monitor, P/N 3116-52-1110, (Precision Approach Software SCN 10.3 and later
SCN)
NOTE: When an LPV Monitor is used in conjunction with a SBAS FMS to provide
precision approach functions, the Precision Approach Software (PAS) SCN
must be the same for both the SBAS FMS and LPV Monitor. The PAS SCN
is indicated on the identification plate of both components.
Data Transfer Unit, DTU-100 (Iomega ZIP Drive), P/Ns 1406-01-X, 1407-01-1
Solid State Data Transfer Unit, SSDTU, P/Ns 1408-00-X, 1409-00-2
The following table shows the allowable combinations of UNS-1Ew FMS and MMMS
part numbers and SCNs:
UNS-1Ew Software Control Numbers (SCN)
FMS/MMMS
Part No. 1001.X 1101.X 1101.XM
3017-3X-XX1
3017-4X-XX1
3017-3X-XX1M
NOTE: Refer to the UNS-1Ew part number matrix in the Equipment Specifications section of this
manual for a detailed explanation of the part numbers.
Page Intro-1
34-60-67 8 July 2014
B. Organization
This Technical Manual provides the information about:
(1) Description and operation of the components of the UNS-1Ew FMS.
(2) FAA Approval including Environmental Qualification Forms.
(3) Equipment Specifications to support selection of compatible peripherals and planning
for the installation of UNS-1Ew components.
(4) Detailed installation and wiring requirements.
(5) Maintenance, checkout, and troubleshooting procedures for the UNS-1Ew and
peripheral sensors as well as outputs to the Flight Guidance System.
(6) Navigation Sensors – where to find scheduled outages and current status of long-
range navigation systems.
(7) Fuel Flow Inputs to the UNS-1Ew for various sensors.
2. Abbreviations and Terminology
This manual contains no abbreviations or terms that have varying interpretations in the
industry. However, the use of 1001.X and 1101.X are used to indicate passages that may be
applicable to one or more, but not all SCNs. Some components have multiple names that are
used interchangeably. The terms FMS and UNS-1Ew are used to refer to the Flight
Management System and Multi-Mission Management System. The exception to this is if the
product, part number or multi-mission is specifically required.
The front panel of the FMS contains an array of push buttons or keys that are used to operate
the system. Instructions in this manual refer to specific keys by name, for example [ENTER],
[A], etc.
Throughout this manual reference is made to the "DTU-100" and "disk". The term “disk”
used herein now refers to any of the data storage devices (Zip disk, USB or SD) and the term
“DTU” will be used to refer to either the DTU-100 or SSDTU.
Procedures in this manual and displayed on the FMS will still use the term “DISK” and will
remain unchanged regardless of the data storage device being used.
3. Contact Information
Please submit comments, suggestions, errors or other concerns about this manual to our
Technical Publications Department at techpubs@uasc.com.
To order copies or request changes in address and distribution information, contact
info@uasc.com.
For technical questions, please contact customersupport@uasc.com.
Page Intro-2
34-60-67 8 July 2014
Description and Operation

1. Description
The information contained within this installation manual describes the administrative and
technical aspects, features, functions, and components of Universal Avionics Systems
Corporation’s (UASC) Flight Management System (FMS) and Multi-mission Management
System (MMMS). All comments or recommendations regarding the installation, acceptance
or operation of the FMS/MMMS or its accessories and components can be directed to the
Product Support Department at Universal Avionics Systems Corporation.
The information, drawings and wiring diagrams contained in this manual are intended as a
reference for engineering planning only. The drawings and wiring diagrams contained herein
do not represent any specific STC or Form 337 aircraft installation. It is the installer’s
responsibility to compose installation drawings specific to the aircraft. This manual and the
drawings and wiring diagrams contained herein may not be used as a substitute for an STC or
Form 337 drawing package.
A. General
Universal Avionics Systems Corporation’s FMS and MMMS are fully integrated navigation
and flight management systems designed to provide the pilot with centralized control of the
aircraft navigation sensors, lateral and vertical flight guidance and steering, fuel management,
database management and flight planning.
The UNS-1Ew FMS contains a Satellite Based Augmentation System (SBAS) subsystem.
The SBAS subsystem provides a navigation solution using GPS augmented by SBAS. The
SBAS FMS is categorized as Class Gamma 3, which covers navigation and guidance
functions for all flight phases through Localizer Performance with Vertical guidance (LPV)
approach level of service. The SBAS subsystem provides three-dimensional position and
velocity, time, and SBAS protection levels. The SBAS subsystem also provides ARINC I/O
and critical analog output and discrete I/O.
The SBAS subsystem operates in single or dual FMS installations. The following installation
options are available based on the severity of failure conditions on different classes of
aircraft.
• Single SBAS FMS– For aircraft that have LPV Approach disabled.
• Dual SBAS FMS – For classes of aircraft for which criticality of LPV approach
operation is classified as ‘Severe-Major’. This requires dual SBAS subsystems for
crosschannel monitoring.
• Single SBAS FMS with LPV Monitor - Same as dual SBAS FMS installation except
crosschannel monitoring is provided by a LPV Monitor unit.
Page 1
34-60-67 8 July 2014
The FMS accepts position information from up to five long-range navigation sensors as well
as a VOR, TACAN, or scanning DME sensor. The data from these sensors is used to
determine the best computed position. This position is used by the FMS for navigating the
aircraft along a programmed flight plan. Flight plans are created using the navigation
database. The database locates waypoints along an entered route and combines these
waypoints to form a flight plan.
Current capability includes lateral great circle and vertical navigational guidance and display,
from aircraft departure to arrival. This includes enroute as well as terminal and approach
capabilities that are integrated with real time fuel management monitoring data. An
incorporated Radar/Multi-Function Display (MFD) interface allows selection and display of
flight plan waypoints on compatible weather radar or MFD displays.
The computed and raw sensor data is output for display on the Control Display Unit (CDU).
Flight Guidance system installations, switching and pilot annunciations are streamlined, as
all output data comes from one source, the FMS, which represents all sensors.
Each type of navigation sensor has unique capabilities and functions. The type and number of
sensors can be tailored to optimize for specific operational requirements using Loran C
(LCS), GPS, GNSS and laser- or gyro-referenced inertial navigation sensors. VOR and
TACAN receivers are optional for either enroute navigation or as an approach reference. The
system also accepts data from a Radio Reference Sensor (RRS) in lieu of
DME/VOR/TACAN receivers. The FMS also has the ability to tune and receive data from
communication and navigation radios. The user may tune commands to COM (3), NAV (2),
ADF (2), ATC, or TAC radios depending on the configuration.
The FMS receives true airspeed (TAS) and altitude information from an air data computer.
The system supports only digital air data inputs. The FMS receives fuel flow data from the
aircraft fuel flow sensors, and optionally, heading data from an analog gyro.
The fuel management function of the FMS accepts input from the aircraft fuel flow sensors
as well as information supplied by the pilot. It uses this data to continuously update and
display fuel management information during flight. This also assists the pilot in planning fuel
requirements while on the ground.
The FMS may contain up to six databases: navigation, company route, checklists,
performance, pilot-defined, and FMS flight plan. All databases can be updated via a Data
Transfer Unit (DTU). This DTU is housed within a protective case that may be panel
mounted in the cockpit for convenient access. The FMS will have the ability to store two
cycles of the Navigation and Company Routes databases.
A self-contained worldwide NAV database stored in non-volatile memory provides the FMS
with information on over 100,000 waypoints, navaids, airports, and over 12,000 SIDs,
STARs and approaches. The operator may choose from a worldwide database with airport
runways of >2000 feet or >4000 feet. A special helicopter database is available for helicopter
operators.
Page 2
34-60-67 8 July 2014
The pilot-defined database is stored in nonvolatile memory. It has the capacity to store up to
200 pilot-defined enroute waypoints, 200 pilot-defined routes and 100 each pilot-defined
enroute alignment points, airport reference points, runways, and approaches. The system will
store 100 average-size, pilot-entered SIDs and STARs as well. The FMS flight plan database
is erased when the FMS is turned off.
The FMS supports the checklist function as an external FMS in the Collins ProLine 4 800
avionics system. The user generates the checklist data on a personal computer (PC) program,
loads it into the FMS, and maintains it. The checklist database and the status information on
the active checklist reside in nonvolatile memory. Aircraft configured for the advanced
performance feature require an aircraft specific database that contains the data pertinent to
their operation.
Along with all the features of the FMS, the MMMS provides the capability to automatically
steer along any of seven different search patterns. The MMMS is referred to as FMS herein.
Refer to the applicable Operator's Manual, Special Missions section for more information on
the MMMS search patterns.
The FMS is configured to a specific aircraft installation through a configuration module
which is part of each aircraft installation. At the time of installation, the configuration
module is programmed through the CDU to define the sensor input ports, fuel flow type, air
data type, EFIS interface, etc.
Page 3
34-60-67 8 July 2014
Single SBAS FMS Installation Description
The FMS computes position and provides selected information to the associated flight
instruments and sensor control to all sensors. The FMS houses an internal database that
includes charted data from suppliers such as Jeppesen and pilot input data such as routes and
approaches.
NOTE: Single FMS installations not utilizing an LPV Monitor, the UNS-1Ew will not
provide precision approach functions.
NOTE: The block diagram illustrates the various types of inputs and outputs to and from
the FMS. The actual set of inputs and outputs in any particular installation is
dependent on the suite of avionics equipment on the aircraft.
Video
Vision-1
TAWS
Cabin Display
ASU
GPS/SBAS
Antenna UniLink
Internal UniVision
GPS/SBAS
FGS Display
Configuration
Module Air Data
DATA NAV VNAV DTO LIST PREV 1 2 3
FUEL FPL PERF TUNE MENU NEXT 4 5 6
A B C D E F G 7 8 9 AFIS
H I J K L M N BACK 0 MSG
OF
/N
F
O P Q R S T DIM
Fuel Flow
U V W X Y Z ENTER
GPS/GNSS
IRS or GPIRS
Radar
Doppler
TACAN
VOR
DME
UNIVERSAL
SSDTU
Page 4
34-60-67 8 July 2014
Dual SBAS FMS Installation Description
In dual installations, each FMS communicates with the other, sharing flight plan and
navigational information. Typically, in dual FMS installations, all long-range navigation
sensors are interfaced with both units. Each FMS computes an independent position using all
available navigational sensors and provides selected information to the associated flight
instruments. Each FMS shares its best best-computed position with the other system and
continuously monitors the other system's position output.
Each FMS houses its own internal databases. These include charted data from suppliers such
as Jeppesen and pilot input data such as routes and approaches.
NOTE: The block diagram shows the various types of inputs and outputs to and from the
FMS. The actual set of inputs and outputs in any particular installation is dependent
on the suite of avionics equipment on the aircraft.
Video
Vision-1
TAWS
Cabin Display
ASU
UniLink GPS/SBAS
GPS/SBAS Antenna
Antenna UniVision
FGS Internal
Internal GPS/SBAS
GPS/SBAS
Configuration
Configuration Display Module
Module
DATA NAV VNAV DTO LIST PREV 1 2 3 DATA NAV VNAV DTO LIST PREV 1 2 3
FUEL FPL PERF TUNE MENU NEXT 4 5 6 FUEL FPL PERF TUNE MENU NEXT 4 5 6
A B C D E F G 7 8 9
Air Data A B C D E F G 7 8 9
H I J K L M N BACK 0 MSG H I J K L M N BACK 0 MSG
O P Q R S T
OF
/N
F
DIM AFIS O P Q R S T
OF
/N
F
DIM
U V W X Y Z ENTER U V W X Y Z ENTER
Fuel Flow
GPS/GNSS
IRS or GPIRS
Radar
Doppler
TACAN
VOR
DME
UNIVERSAL
SSDTU
Page 5
34-60-67 8 July 2014
Single SBAS FMS with LPV Monitor Installation Description
The use of an LPV Monitor is an optional feature that can be used in an aircraft with a single
SBAS FMS that requires LPV capability but may not have room for a second SBAS FMS.
The LPV Monitor operates without a CDU or configuration module. The LPV Monitor
functions as an independent sensor in which redundant equipment is required to meet the
integrity goals for precision approach types. The LPV Monitor has its own GPS/SBAS sensor
that can be wired and configured as a second GPS sensor with the single FMS.
NOTE: The block diagram illustrates the various types of inputs and outputs to and from
the FMS. The actual set of inputs and outputs in any particular installation is
dependent on the suite of avionics equipment on the aircraft.
Video
Configuration Vision-1
Module
TAWS
Internal
Internal GPS/SBAS
GPS/SBAS Cabin Display
ASU
UniLink
GPS/SBAS GPS/SBAS
Antenna Antenna UniVision
FGS Display
Air Data
DATA NAV VNAV DTO LIST PREV 1 2 3
AFIS
A B C D E F G 7 8 9
H I J K L M N BACK 0 MSG
O P Q R S T
OFO
F
/N
DIM
Fuel Flow
U V W X Y Z ENTER
GPS/GNSS
UNS-1Ew
UNIVERSAL
LP/LPV MONITOR
SBAS FMS IRS or GPIRS
Radar
Doppler
LPV TACAN
MONITOR
VOR
DME
UNIVERSAL
SSDTU
Page 6
34-60-67 8 July 2014
B. System Components
The basic UNS-1Ew installation consists of the FMS (containing the display, keypad,
navigation computer and GPS/SBAS sensor), configuration module, Data Transfer Unit and
GPS/SBAS antenna.
(1) UNS-1Ew Display
The FMS utilizes a 5-inch active matrix liquid crystal flat panel display. The high-
resolution display provides alphanumeric characters, icons and graphics capabilities
to facilitate on-screen data recognition. The display allows for data display on eleven
lines with 24 characters each in two different sizes. Graphic displays for special
photo, search and surveillance flight patterns are provided.
(2) UNS-1Ew Keypad
The full alphanumeric keypad also contains dedicated function keys and, when used
in conjunction with the ten line select keys (LSK), provides the operator with all the
controls necessary to communicate with the internal navigation computer and all
associated sensors. The keypad allows manual data entry, system mode selection and
control (selection and deselection) of navigation sensors.
(3) UNS-1Ew Navigation Computer
The FMS contains the system’s central processing unit (Nav computer), navigation
sensor interface circuits, flight guidance system interface and the Jeppesen database.
The unit processes data from DME, TACAN, VOR, Air Data, Fuel Flow and up to
five long-range navigation sensors. A radar joystick input can also be accommodated.
At installation the system is configured with the number and type of long-range
navigation sensors which will optimize the FMS to the aircraft’s specific
requirements. The long-range Nav sensors act in addition to the multi-channel
scanning DME and VOR sensing capability integrated into the basic circuit.
The FMS is available in different sensor compatibility configurations with five
optional fuel flow configurations. These are Analog (AC or DC), Digital (Pulse or
Frequency), and ARINC 429 Digital. It also incorporates an Ethernet connection for
transfer of data to Terrain Awareness Warning System (TAWS), Vision-1, Universal
Cockpit Display (UCD) and Application Server Unit (ASU) as well as future systems.
(4) Configuration Module, P/N 30171
The configuration module is a serially connected EEPROM designed to store
configuration data that is specific to the aircraft installation, The EEPROM is
attached to the FMS mounting rack. The user is able to view and initialize the aircraft
configuration through specially designed menus that can be accessed through the
keypad. Subsequent modifications to the configuration are possible but restricted
through software interlocks. The Configuration Module receives and transmits data to
the FMS via private serial communications busses.
Page 7
34-60-67 8 July 2014
(5) LPV Monitor, P/N 3116-52-1110
The LPV Monitor is an optional feature that can be used in an aircraft with a single
SBAS FMS that requires LPV capability but may not have room for a second SBAS
FMS. The LPV Monitor operates without a CDU or configuration module. The LPV
Monitor functions as an independent sensor in which redundant equipment is required
to meet the integrity goals for precision approach types. The LPV Monitor has its own
GPS/SBAS sensor that can be wired and configured as a second GPS sensor with the
single FMS.
(6) Data Transfer Unit (DTU-100), P/N 1406-( ), 1407-( )
The Data Transfer Unit (DTU-100) is an IOMEGA ZIP drive housed within a
protective case. Model 1406 may be panel mounted in the cockpit for convenient
access. Model 1407 consists of a DTU-100 housed in a portable carrying case. The
wire harness plugs into connectors mounted in the aircraft that are wired to the NCU.
The DTU-100 is used to update the standard and expanded navigation databases
within minutes. The update is contained on Zip disks that are distributed periodically
to subscribers. Database updates are loaded into the FMS over a 10base-T Ethernet
connection from the DTU-100. The DTU-100 receives power from the NCU and
communicates directly with it through a digital bus.
The DTU-100 is also used to load aircraft specific performance data. The DTU-100
may also load pilot-defined flight plans and checklists created with off-line flight
planning software loaded into an IBM compatible computer. FMS in-flight data
parameters can be written to a disk utilizing the DTU-100. The Maintenance Log
stored in non-volatile memory also may be written to a disk. FMS configuration data
can be written to a disk and be loaded to another FMS to update its configuration
data.
(7) Solid State Data Transfer Unit (SSDTU), P/N 1408-( ), 1409-( )
The SSDTU is designed to replace the DTU-100 as a data upload and download
device interfacing with other Universal Avionics’ line replaceable units (LRU). The
SSDTU replaces ZIP disk technology with flash memory technology. Two accessible
data storage device ports are built into the faceplate of the SSDTU. These ports
support Universal Serial Bus (USB) and Secure Digital (SD) data storage devices and
function as disk drives. The SSDTU transfers data files between the selected data
storage device and other LRUs using an Ethernet bus.
The SSDTU has three serial digital buses that are each capable of receiving and
transmitting data. The first is a single EIA-485 (RS-422) bus that can be used to
exchange data between FMSs. The second is an Ethernet bus, which consists of an
eight port Ethernet switch used to exchange data with up to eight UASC Ethernet
network compatible LRUs such as the FMS, TAWS and Vision-1 systems. The
transfer rate to the client is the same or better than a DTU-100. The third is an EIA-
232 bus that provides access to the diagnostic interface.
Page 8
34-60-67 8 July 2014
The SSDTU is available in two models, the fixed installation model that is
permanently installed in the aircraft and the portable model which is carried into the
aircraft, attached to an interface connector, used, then disconnected and removed
prior to flight. The SSDTU is the same fit as a DTU-100, although using USB and SD
data storage devices allows more flexibility for SSDTU installations.
The functions of the discrete inputs that were used to enable or disable Ethernet or
EIA-485 data bus communications in the DTU-100 have been disabled in the
SSDTU. The functions are now enabled by software.
(8) EFIS Radar Panel, P/N 1015-1-XX (Lear 60 Pro Line 4 Installations only)
The EFIS Radar Panel (ERP) provides two knobs with push buttons and six buttons
for pilot control of various EFIS and RADAR functions of the Collins Pro Line 4
Avionics System. The ERP also receives pilot inputs from the Pro Line 4 Altitude
Awareness Panel (AAP) and the Pro Line 4 Course Heading Panel (CHP). All
pilot/user inputs are forwarded to the FMS navigation computer via a CSDB
interface. The FMS/ERP combination replaces the Collins CDU. The FMS becomes
the navigation control or External Navigator.
(9) GPS/SBAS Antennas
A GPS/SBAS antenna approved under TSO C190 must be installed for each SBAS
FMS system. There are three approved antennas to choose from: P/N 10708 GPS
Antenna, P/N 10709 WAAS/Sirius Dual Element Antenna and P/N 10710 GPS/XM
Dual Element Antenna. If replacing an existing FMS system with a SBAS FMS
system, the antenna must be replaced with a TSO C190 approved antenna. None of
the previous antenna part numbers, 10705, 10706, etc., are compatible with the SBAS
FMS GPS.
The GPS antenna P/N 10708 is a single element antenna. The 10708 antenna has the
same footprint as the 10705 and 10706 antennas and can be directly replaced by the
10708 antenna without any modifications.
WAAS/Sirius antenna P/N 10709 is a dual element antenna that can provide
reception for GPS/SBAS and WSI InFlight weather. This antenna is ideal for aircraft
that have limited locations for antennas. If The 10709 is used as a replacement for a
previous antenna installation, the 10709 has the same footprint as the 10705, 10706
and 10708 antennas, although modification to the aircraft is necessary to
accommodate the dual connectors. P/N 10709 is not a replacement for antenna P/N
10705 when used for GLONASS.
GPS/XM antenna P/N 10710 is a dual element antenna that can provide reception for
GPS/SBAS and XM Weather and Radio. This antenna is ideal for aircraft that have
limited locations for antennas. If The 10710 is used as a replacement for a previous
antenna installation, the 10709 has the same footprint as the 10705, 10706 and 10708
antennas, although modification to the aircraft is necessary to accommodate the dual
connectors. P/N 10710 is not a replacement for antenna P/N 10705 when used for
GLONASS.
Page 9
34-60-67 8 July 2014
C. System Interfaces
(1) Navigation Sensor Interface
The FMS is capable of interfacing with the following short-range sensors: DME,
Radio Reference Sensor (RRS), TACAN, and VOR radio inputs.
The FMS is also capable of interfacing with the following long-range sensors:
Doppler, LORAN C, Inertial Reference sensors, GPS, GPS aided Inertial Reference
System (GPIRS), GNSS, SBAS, and GPS Landing System (GLS).
(2) Air Data Computer Interface
The UNS-1Ew accepts only digital air data inputs from a remote air data computer.
(3) Fuel Flow Interface
The system is capable of accepting five types of fuel flow signals: DC, AC RMS
voltage, pulse width, pulse frequency, and digital.
• Analog DC fuel flow inputs will not exceed 12 Volts
• AC RMS fuel flow inputs will be in the range of 0-8 VRMS
• Pulse frequency fuel flows will have a scaling of 1-400.0 pph/Hz while pulse
width fuel flows will be in the range of 1-400.0 pph/msec
• The required accuracy for pulse width and pulse frequency signals will be
sufficient to measure signals in the input range 1-800 msec or 1-2000 Hz with an
accuracy of 1%
• Digital fuel flow may be received over a digital input bus
(4) Auxiliary Power Unit Interface
Auxiliary power unit (APU) fuel flow is a configurable option on the FMS. The FMS
accepts automatic APU fuel flow signals and computes the APU fuel flow rate. The
FMS also accepts manual APU fuel information.
(5) Ethernet Interface
The FMS is capable of interfacing with an Avionics Local Area Network. The FMS
has an Ethernet controller that connects to a 10base-T twisted shielded pair cable.
(6) External Systems Management
The FMS external systems management function provides control of external systems
and manages the interface to external systems such as EFIS displays and integrated
data bus systems.
• The FMS interfaces with an Aircraft Performance Computer (APC). The FMS
provides an ARINC739 interface to manage the CDU screens for the APC,
TAWS and UniLink subsystems. The FMS provides an ARINC 429 with
Pseudo-LOC and Pseudo-G/S to facilitate steering control during SBAS
approaches.
Page 10
34-60-67 8 July 2014
• The FMS interfaces with the Terrain Awareness Warning System (TAWS). The
FMS contains a configuration option that tells the FMS the source of the TAWS
user interface pages.
• The FMS interfaces with the Universal Cockpit Display (UCD) and Application
Server Unit (ASU). The FMS sends flight plan information to the UCD or ASU
via the FMS crossfill bus.
• The FMS sends position, flight plan, and navigation information to Vision-1 via
the UNS HS429 output bus.
• The FMS provides the capability to configure the system for advanced
performance that will work with an aircraft specific database to provide take-off
reference speeds and engine limits, climb/cruise engine limits, and landing
reference speeds. This function is incorporated as a table driven series of
interpolations that use the charts from the AFM in a digitized form. The
performance database is stored in the FMS non-volatile memory.
The FMS provides the capability to compute and display Equal Time Point
information on the CDU. The Equal Time Point is computed as a point along the
entered flight plan where it will take an equal amount of time to fly direct to
either of the two pilot-specified enroute alternate airports.
The FMS provides the capability to compute and display Point-of-No-Return
information on the CDU. The Point-of-No-Return is computed as a point along
the entered flight plan where the fuel remaining is equal to the amount of fuel
needed to fly directly back to a pilot-specified Coast Out airport with fuel
reserves.
(7) Radio Tuning
The FMS tunes the following radios: VHF NAV #1 and VHF NAV #2 (navigation);
VHF COM #1, VHF COM #2, and VHF COM #3 if installed (voice communication);
ADF #1 and ADF #2 (automatic direction finder); and ATC (air traffic control).
The FMS supports 25 kHz or 8.33 kHz tuning for the VHF COM radios.
For COM tuning, the FMS interfaces with both a Radio Tuning Unit and a Radio
Control Unit. COM radio tuning and feedback is accomplished via a CSDB interface.
Page 11
34-60-67 8 July 2014
(8) FlexPerf Trip Performance (P/Ns 3017-XX-4X1 and 3017-XX-5X1)
If enabled, the FMS provide a FlexPerf trip performance function that will support the
following:
• Crew planning for aircraft performance in climb, cruise, and descent phases of
flight
• Computing the corresponding vertical trajectory and fuel consumption of the
airplane
• Updating the performance database based on actual aircraft performance
characteristics
The FMS provides the following features in planning the climb phase:
• IAS and MACH target speeds (manual entries
• Cruise altitude
• Default speed restriction of 250 IAS below 10,000 ft, modifiable by the crew
• Waypoint altitude constraints (at, at/above, at/below)
• Waypoint speed constraints as specified in SIDS procedures
• Wind forecast at each flight plan waypoint
• Average ambient air temperature in climb
The FMS provides the following features in planning the cruise phase:
• MACH or IAS target speed (manual entries)
• Multiple cruising altitudes
• Average ambient air temperature in cruise
The FMS provides the following features in planning the descent phase:
• MACH and IAS target speeds (manual entries)
• Default speed restriction of 250 IAS below 10,000 ft, modifiable by the crew
• Geometric descent path specified by waypoint altitude constraints
• Waypoint speed constraints as specified in STARS procedures
• Average ambient air temperature in descent
FlexPerf trip performance function features:
• Computes the aircraft trajectory for the complete flight plan, taking into account
the entered profiles and constraints. The minimum required entries for these
computations are Aircraft gross weight, fuel on board, cruise altitude.
• Recomputes after each modification is made by the crew and also periodically at
intervals of 1 minute or less.
Page 12
34-60-67 8 July 2014
• The accuracy target is 95% in total fuel burn at destination, excluding errors due
to discrepancies between forecast and actual atmospheric conditions.
• The FMS displays the altitude, speed, ETA, and fuel remaining computed at each
flight plan waypoint, as well as the top of climb and top of descent.
• The FMS annunciates when the computations detect that a climb altitude
constraint cannot be met.
• The FMS annunciates when the computations detect that a cruise altitude cannot
be reached due to limited climb rate, or because the flight plan distance is too
short to allow a cruise segment.
• The FMS annunciates when the fuel remaining at the destination is less than the
reserve fuel.
• Computes a climb segment and the top of climb whenever the aircraft altitude is
below the cruise altitude and VNAV PATH is not active.
• Computes a cruise segment except when VNAV PATH is already active.
• If the flight plan does not contain a destination airport, the FMS computes a
cruise segment to the last waypoint.
• If the flight plan contains a destination airport, but no other descent altitude
constraint is specified, the FMS considers the airport elevation to be the end of
descent constraint.
• The FMS completes computations within 15 seconds of a modification of the
flight plan.
• In synchronized operation, the FMS synchronizes all flight crew entries on the
CDU pertaining to the FlexPerf function between the left and right FMS.
Page 13
34-60-67 8 July 2014
(9) Airborne Flight Information System
The FMS AFIS mode supports interface with the Airborne Flight Information System
and provides support for remote messaging, terminal weather, winds aloft, and remote
flight plan services.
(10) UniLink
The FMS interfaces with an external UniLink unit that supports air-to-ground digital
data communications. The FMS provides the capability to request and load routes
through the UniLink interface.
The FMS requests winds for up to three flight levels for the enroute flight plan
waypoints from a ground service provider. When an uplinked message is received, the
FMS processes the uplinked message for errors, prior to further processing or subject
to loading. If any errors exist in the uplinked message, the FMS discards the
erroneous data and continues parsing the valid data.
After the winds data is processed for errors, the FMS stores the uplinked winds data
by altitude for each flight plan waypoint returned and allows the operator to load the
winds for a specific altitude into the flight plan.
The FMS computes average winds for the enroute portion of the flight plan and
displays as an average head or tailwind component at each of the flight levels for
which uplinked winds data is available. The FMS provides an indication to the user
when an uplinked message is received and is usable. The FMS provides an indication
to the user when an uplinked message is received and is not valid.
The FMS transmits the FANS application data through the UniLink UL-80X interface.
The FMS displays a message to the crew when UniLink system status warrants crew
awareness.
Page 14
34-60-67 8 July 2014
(11) Multi-Mission
When set configured as a Multi-Mission system, the following set of special features
is enabled. These features together result in the system being identified as a Multi-
Mission Management System (MMMS), also referred to as Special Missions.
• Performing search patterns (Race Track, Sector Search, Rising Ladder, Expanding
Square, Border Patrol, Orbit and Arc)
• Marking a target
• Tracking target drift
• Switching to and from a monochrome display
• Erasing pilot data
The MMMS enables Airdrop (3017-3X-XX1(M) with SCN 1101.X(M)) support and
Arc Search Pattern support when set in the part of the Configuration Module
inaccessible to the operator. The Airdrop and Arc Search Pattern support is only
available when the system is configured both as an MMMS and has further been
enabled in the part of the Configuration Module inaccessible to the operator. The Arc
Search Pattern has similar operation to the other search patterns, but has restricted
access due to its intended military purpose.
Airdrop (P/N 3017-3X-XX1(M) with SCN 1101.X(M))
The MMMS with SCN 1101.XM installed, allows the operator to input and edit
airdrop procedures via the CDU pages. Airdrop operations include Computed Airdrop
Release Point (CARP), High Altitude Release Point (HARP), and Very Low Altitude
(VLA) airdrop operations.
The MMMS computes and outputs a Computed Air Release Point (CARP). The
CARP is the airborne point from which an aircraft releases an item in order to land on
a desired point of impact (PI).
The MMMS outputs lateral and vertical guidance to the following airdrop waypoints
in an airdrop procedure:
• IP (Initial Point)
• CARP (Computed Airdrop Release Point)
• EOR (end of Release)
Page 15
34-60-67 8 July 2014
(12) Display Systems
The FMS interfaces with many display systems. The FMS provides the capability to
display, remove, and limit the flight plan and map background data (e.g.,
display/remove missed approach legs, limit background waypoints, airports, and
navaids).
• ARINC 429 Display Systems.
The FMS interface with the Universal Avionics' EFI-890( ). This includes
Progress Data Block on 429 HS bus.
The FMS interfaces with the Sextant Integrated Modular System 100 V700
(IMS-01).
The FMS interfaces with the Honeywell Primus 1000 system in the following
configurations:
Receivers:
− IC600-01 (Lear 45)
− IC600-02 (Cessna Ultra, Cessna Bravo)
− IC600-03 (Cessna Excel)
− IC600-04 (Embraer 145)
− IC600-05 (Cessna Ultra II)
− IC600-06 (Cessna Bravo II)
Transmitters:
− IC600
− IC615
The FMS interface with the Collins Pro Line 21 system.
The FMS supports flight plan display on both Advanced and GAMA EFIS. The
primary difference is the usage of a GAP bit in the Advanced EFIS
configuration.
• ARINC 702 Display Systems
The FMS interfaces with Universal Avionics' MFD 640 and EFI-890R, which
complies with ARINC Characteristic 702-6, Flight Management Computer
System.
The FMS interface with the Collins Pro Line 4-800 system in the following
configurations:
− P4-01, P4-02 (Learjet 60 Collins Pro Line 4 EFD-871)
− P4-03, P4-04 (FIAS Collins Pro Line 4 EFD-871)
Page 16
34-60-67 8 July 2014
The FMS interfaces with the Pro Line 4-4000 system in the following
configurations:
− P4-05, P4-06 (Falcon 2000 and Astra SPX Collins Pro Line 4 EFD-4077)
− P4-07, P4-08 (Falcon 2000 Collins Enhanced Pro Line 4-4000 EFIS
developed for Version 6)
− P4-09, P4-10 (CRJ 700 Collins CRJ Pro Line 4-4000 EFIS)
The FMS interface with the Sextant Integrated Modular System 100 V800 (IMS-02).
• ARINC 561 Display Systems – The FMS interfaces with ARINC 561 display
systems.
• ARINC 571 Display Systems - The FMS interfaces with ARINC 571 display
systems.
(13) Speed Limit Function
The FMS provide a Speed Limit Function that computes an advisory Speed
Constraint and meets the following criteria:
NOTE: The Speed Limit function provides advisory data only and does not ensure
compliance with all operational requirements. Because speed rules vary by
the various aviation authorities, the maximum holding speeds and
speed/altitude restriction are to be configured by the customer to meet the
operational requirements.
The Speed Limit Function will honor the following speeds:
• The Speed Limit from the Navigation Database
• The maximum holding speed
• The altitude speed limit
• The maximum speed during an arc leg
• The Speed Constraint is to be transmitted on an ARINC output bus.
• The Speed Constraint output is configurable.
• The Speed Constraint output can be enabled/disabled by the user.
• When deceleration is required, the impending Speed Constraint is to be
annunciated prior to the target waypoint or altitude to allow for deceleration.
• The altitude speed limit can be changed by the user.
• The maximum holding speed is configurable.
In synchronized operation, the FMS synchronizes flight crew speed entries on the
CDU pertaining to the Speed Limit function between two FMSs. Enabling/disabling
of the Speed Limit output is not synchronized.
Page 17
34-60-67 8 July 2014
D. FMS Components
(1) CPU Board
The CPU board is the master processor within the FMC. The processor is a Motorola
PowerPC 8270 microprocessor operating at 400 MHz.
The CMOS system RAM serves as a non-volatile scratchpad used to preserve specific
data in the event of an in-flight power interrupt. Flash memory is used for database
storage because it does not require battery backup, proving a more efficient and
economical storage medium than battery backed CMOS static RAM.
The following functions are incorporated into the CPU board:
• 16 Megabyte Flash EEPROM memory for program storage (P/N 3017-XX-2X1)
• 32 Megabyte Flash EEPROM memory for program storage (P/Ns 3017-XX-3X1,
3017-XX-4X1 and 3017-XX-5X1)
• 32 Megabyte Flash EEPROM memory for database storage (P/N 3017-XX-2X1)
• 64 Megabyte Flash EEPROM memory for database storage (P/Ns 3017-XX-3X1,
3017-XX-4X1 and 3017-XX-5X1)
• 2 Megabyte EEPROM for bootstrap program
• 4 Megabyte battery backed static RAM (P/N 3017-XX-2X1)
• 8 Megabyte battery backed static RAM (P/Ns 3017-XX-3X1, 3017-XX-4X1 and
3017-XX-5X1)
• 2 Kbytes Serial EPROM for internal Configuration Module
• Battery backed real time clock device for system time keeping and timer interrupt
generation
• One I2C port for communication with external Configuration Module
• One TTL level serial port for communication with the front panel display
• Two RS–232 communications ports (One of these ports does not leave the CPU
board and is used for download of software via a remote computer while the
other port is used for connection to a remote terminal.)
• One 10base-T Ethernet port for communications with the System-1 local area
network
• 28 V input bus power failure detection signal connected to the processor’s non-
maskable interrupt
• One JTAG (Joint Test Action Group) port that contains 128 bytes of serial
EEPROM with the Ethernet MAC address for the LAN
• One analog to digital converter which is 8 bits and has a full-scale value
of 5V
• One set of system configuration jumpers (comprised of 16 individual jumpers)
• Temperature sensor for over temperature alerting
• 8 Megabyte NVRAM (optional) (P/Ns 3017-XX-3X1, 3017-XX-4X1 and 3017-
XX-5X1)
Page 18
34-60-67 8 July 2014
(2) SBAS/ARINC and SBAS/Analog Subsystem Boards
The SBAS/ARINC board includes a MPC8270 central processor, dual-port RAM
(DPRAM), and two field programmable gate arrays (FPGA) with dissimilar design.
The MPC8270 communicates with the GG12W receiver on the SBAS/Analog board
through two RS-232 connections. It controls the analog I/O and discrete I/O on the
SBAS/Analog board through a serial peripheral interface (SPI). ARINC I/O
functionality is accomplished on the SBAS/ARINC board through FPGA #1. FPGA
#2 is used to monitor critical ARINC output buses for faulty transmission. An RS-232
serial port is provided, although it can only be used for diagnostic display and flight
data recording (FDR).
The SBAS/Analog board contains a GG12W receiver. The receiver is the source of
three-dimensional position and velocity, time, and SBAS protection levels. The
SBAS/Analog board also provides critical analog output and discrete I/O. Critical
analog/discrete output including deviations, alert flags and level of service (LOS) are
monitored internally for faulty transmission.
The SBAS subsystem interfaces with a configuration module through the FMS via
DPRAM. The SBAS subsystem obtains the following information from the FMS
configuration module:
• Aircraft information (both onside and offside antenna offset). The Antenna offset
translates the GPS/SBAS antenna position to the aircraft navigation center
(typically the glideslope antenna).
• Approved Satellite Based Augmentation System (SBAS) service provider(s)
• ARINC I/O ports configuration
• Display bus type configuration
• High/low level analog deviation output configuration
• Crosschannel monitoring enabled or disabled
I/O Capabilities of the SBAS Subsystem Boards
• Discrete Inputs – XChan Fail In, XChan LOS1, XChan Nav Valid, XChan Vert
Valid
• Discrete Outputs – Nav Flag, Nav Valid, Vert Flag, Vert Valid, LOS1, LOS2,
LOS3, XChan Fail Out, WAAS Fault, Time Marks
NOTE: Alert (Nav Flag or Vert Flag) and Valid (Nav Valid or Vert Valid) Flags can
be either high or low level outputs depending on the FMS part number.
NOTE: The levels of service (LOS) in use by the SBAS subsystem are LPV,
LNAV/VNAV, LNAV, and Not Available.
• Analog Outputs – Lateral Dev and Vertical Dev
NOTE: Lateral and Vertical Deviations can be scaled high or low depending on
the FMS configuration.
Page 19
34-60-67 8 July 2014
• Analog Inputs – XChan Lateral Dev and XChan Vertical Dev (Analog
configuration only)
NOTE: Lateral and Vertical Deviations can be scaled high or low depending on
the FMS configuration.
• ARINC 429 Inputs/Outputs – Configurable Transmit and Receive:ports:
2 Transmit (743A Output, XChan Out),
4 Receive (Offside FMS, XChan In, XChan Guidance Bus1, XChan Guidance
Bus2)
NOTE: The number of ARINC429 transmitters and receivers available is
dependent on the FMS configuration.
(3) Auxiliary Board
The Auxiliary Board uses a Motorola 68332 processor with 256 KB of RAM and 256
KB of flash EEPROM.
• Two CSDB transmitters and four receivers
• 128 Kilobyte by 16 Flash EEPROM for program storage
• 4 Kilobyte by 16 of dual port RAM for communication with the main processor
• Four pulse/analog fuel flow inputs
• Input signals for analog heading
• Input signals for board type detection
The four differential fuel flow inputs incorporated in the Auxiliary board, in an all-
digital aircraft, allows the elimination of the analog board and possible replacement
by a second ARINC board. The fuel flow multiplexer switches these inputs to a RMS
converter, a counter, or an A/D converted depending on the type of input. Analog
Heading is located on the Auxiliary board to allow an all-digital aircraft access to this
variable without an Analog board. The Roll Steering command is under control of the
CPU even though it is located on the Auxiliary board.
I/O Capabilities of the Auxiliary Board
• Discrete Inputs – HDG Mag/True Switch, HDG Valid
• Analog Inputs – Autopilot Reference
• Analog Outputs – Roll Steering
• Synchro In – Heading Synchro
• Pulse/Analog FF – 4 Fuel Flow Sensors
NOTE: Accepts either pulsed or analog differential fuel flow sensors.
• CSDB In – 4 Input Ports (VOR, ADF/MFD, DME)
• CSDB Out – 2 Output Ports
Page 20
34-60-67 8 July 2014
(4) Analog Board (Optional)
The Analog board communicates with the CPU through dual port memory. All
processing is accomplished using an on-board Motorola 68332 processor. The Analog
board converts four types of analog inputs to digital for processing through DPRAM
by the FMC: Discrete, Synchro/Resolver AC, DC, and analog air data and provides
analog, discrete, and synchro outputs.
I/O Capabilities of the Analog Board
• Discrete Inputs – Altitude Valid, Attitude Valid, TAS Valid, SAT Valid
• Discrete Outputs – Digital Valid, Pitch Valid
• Analog Outputs – Pitch Command, To/From
• Synchro Outputs – Bearing, Desired Track
• ARINC 561 – Refer to the label descriptions for this output in the SBAS FMS
Interface Manual Report Number 34-60-71
Digital to analog converters are used to generate PITCMD, TO/FR, and Synchro
Resolver outputs. In addition, the discrete outputs PITCHVAL and DIGVAL are
implemented using a discrete latch.
NOTE: If the FMS is configured with an Analog board, the SBAS/ARINC I/O
capabilities are reduced. Refer to the Equipment Specification section of this
manual for details.
(5) ASCB Version A Board (Optional)
The ASCB board provides the FMS with an interface to the ASCB Version A data
bus that was developed by Honeywell and supplements ARINC, CSDB and analog
interfaces of the FMS. The ASCB board hardware supports data bus Version A only.
ASCB is a multi-user serial synchronous digital communications bus. The ASCB
board provides an interface between the FMC and ASCB bus.
When configured with the ASCB board, the FMS provides the following capabilities:
• Transmit navigation display on the ASCB bus.
• Transmit guidance and mode data on the ASCB bus.
• Transmit flight plan and map background data on the ASCB bus.
• Transmit Vspeeds on the ASCB bus.
• Create and store radar waypoints using the MFD input data on the ASCB bus.
• Receive FGS, EFIS, and MFD data on the ASCB bus.
Page 21
34-60-67 8 July 2014
(6) Power Supply
The Power Supply converts 28 VDC aircraft power to +5 VDC, +15 VDC and –15
VDC for FMS circuitry and the Configuration Module and provides output voltage
monitoring and current limiting.
If power is lost or low voltage is detected, an interrupt will be generated. The CPU
will then store the necessary registers in non-volatile memory for an orderly
shutdown. Enough capacity is designed into the power supply to provide system
power for a minimum of 10 milliseconds following a power fail warning.
Page 22
34-60-67 8 July 2014
E. FMS Functions
(1) Power Control, Initialization, and Configuration
At power up, the FMS determines the installed configuration of the computer. The
FMS uses data from the configuration module to configure the FMS if the
configuration data is valid.
At power up, the FMS performs self-tests to ensure system integrity and proper
operation.
The FMS provides power-up initialization after a normal power down, after a standby
power down, and after a power failure.
The FMS provides power-down control for manual power down, standby power
down, and power failure.
(2) Navigation
The FMS best computed aircraft position is determined by using position inputs from
all available navigation sensors and DME distance information from the scanning
DME. If either an RRS or one of the supported TACAN receivers is installed,
TACAN information is also be used. The system searches the navigation database to
determine which DME or TACAN stations are within range (approximately 250 nm)
and sequentially tunes each station. The aircraft position is computed by interrogating
multiple DME or TACAN stations and correlating the tuned stations with their
known geographic coordinates. Correction for slant range is accomplished by using
known station elevation and aircraft altitude.
The DME derived position is then integrated with the position information derived
from available long-range sensors. If the aircraft is out of DME range, the FMS relies
on long-range sensors for position information.
The FMS provides the pilot with course to waypoint, ETA, distance to waypoint,
maximum airspeed (VMAX) for curved legs, wind, and ground speed information.
In addition the FMS provides desired track, bearing, crosstrack, lateral deviation,
vertical deviation, related data to the flight guidance system (FGS) for the HSI
displays, and roll and pitch steering commands for the autopilot/flight director
system.
(3) Position Uncertainty
The FMS calculates position uncertainty and displays the resulting value as ANP. The
FMS uses as the alerting limit either the operator manually entered RNP (required
navigation performance), the procedural RNP as defined in the navigation database,
or the system defaults based upon the phase of flight.
Page 23
34-60-67 8 July 2014
(4) Vertical Navigation
The FMS provides vertical guidance and steering data for a Path Descent mode. This
includes the Enroute, STAR, and Approach segments of the flight plan up to the
Missed Approach Point. All ARINC 424 leg types are supported, including procedure
turns, holding patterns, and floating terminator type legs. The FMS allows up to six
Vertical Navigation (VNAV) fixed terminator type waypoints to be displayed and
edited on the VNAV Path pages. All waypoints that are pre-filled are automatically
pre-filled in reference to the flight plan waypoints. On the VNAV Path pages the
operator may also define an Offset, which is a vertical waypoint referenced off a
particular flight plan waypoint. The offset may be in either a positive or negative
direction along the defined flight plan, and will have an altitude defined by the
operator.
The Flight Plan pages have been designed to allow the operator to enter and edit
altitudes for any leg in the flight plan that has a fixed waypoint terminator. In
addition, a prompt will be provided on the Flight Plan pages to allow access to the
VNAV pages in order to define a VNAV Offset waypoint.
The FMS automatically converts all STAR and Approach procedural crossing altitude
constraints from the database that are variable (At/Below, At/Above, and Window) to
fixed altitudes. These altitudes will be displayed on the Flight Plan pages and
automatically pre-filled into the VNAV pages.
The FMS provides tactical VNAV modes. These modes allow the operator to use the
FMS to maneuver the aircraft vertically without regard to the lateral path of the
aircraft. Flight Level Change (VFLC) mode uses a set of preprogrammed
airspeed/Mach profiles selected by the operator to climb and descend the aircraft. In
VFLC mode, the FMS outputs an airspeed target so the aircraft FGS can pitch the
aircraft to achieve the target airspeed.
VNAV modes are mutually exclusive; the FMS can be in only one vertical mode at a
time. The FMS is capable of synchronized VNAV operation. In synchronized
operation, all flight crew entries on the CDU pertaining to the VNAV function are
synchronized between the left and right FMS.
The FMS provides a selectable altitude correction function to compensate for extreme
cold temperatures. Temperature compensation applies only to approach altitudes,
including approach transition and missed approach.
(5) Lateral Guidance and Steering
The lateral guidance and steering function provides guidance displays showing the
relative position of the aircraft to the desired flight path. This function also provides a
steering command to make the aircraft follow the desired flight path. These
capabilities are provided for the entire ARINC 424, path terminator leg set.
The FMS is capable of synchronized LNAV operation. In synchronized operation, all
flight crew entries on the CDU pertaining to the LNAV function are synchronized
between the left and right FMS.
Page 24
34-60-67 8 July 2014
(6) Waypoint Sequencing
The FMS incorporates automatic turn anticipation for leg changes along the flight
plan. Turns are initiated at a distance based on ground speed, leg change magnitude,
and roll steering bank limits for the present altitude. Turns at "fly-over" waypoints are
initiated over the waypoint.
(7) Direct-To
The FMS is capable of initiating Direct-To maneuvers to waypoints and airports on or
off the flight plan. If the Direct-To waypoint is off the flight plan, the system prompts
the pilot to redefine the next (NX) waypoint so that it may be linked to the flight plan.
The FMS will provide the capability to divert to the nearest airports.
(8) Heading Mode
The pilot is allowed to select and fly a desired heading using the CDU keyboard. If
the IMS-02, ProLine 2, ProLine 4, or Primus 1000 EFIS is installed, the system will
accept heading inputs from the heading bug knob. The Heading Mode provides the
ability to be armed so that it may automatically intercept the current navigation leg.
(9) Selected Crosstrack
The FMS provides the ability to select and fly a course parallel to a leg defined by
two FROM-TO waypoints. When this feature is selected, the system indicates the
selection via the crosstrack annunciator. This feature is not available for Pseudo VOR
outbound legs or in approach mode. The mode will be maintained when sequencing
onto a fixed track leg, provided the course change is such that it is possible to do so.
(10) Holding Patterns
The FMS provides Holding Pattern selection and definition using graphical depiction
of the available holding pattern on the display. The pilot defines the pattern or selects
one from a database via the CDU keyboard. The FMS provides the ability to arm a
holding pattern at a waypoint in the flight plan that is ahead of the current position of
the aircraft. The FMS provides the capability to define holding patterns at present
position. The hold may be manually or automatically activated. Once the holding
pattern is activated, the aircraft proceeds to the holding fix and automatically
performs the appropriate entry to the pattern. The pilot must manually terminate the
hold if it is an HM (Hold Manual) leg type. If it is an HA (Hold at an Altitude) or HF
(Hold at a Fix) leg type, then the FMS will automatically sequence the leg after the
appropriate procedure is flown.
(11) Flight Planning
The FMS facilitates flight planning and includes features such as SIDs, STARs, and
Approaches for use in terminal areas and Victor/Jet airways for the enroute portion.
Flight plans can be dynamically defined, crossfilled from another FMS, selected from
a previously defined pilot route or company route database, or loaded from a disk or
AFIS unit.
Page 25
34-60-67 8 July 2014
The FMS is able to synchronize the flight plan with the offside FMS. The flight
planning includes custom lists from which the pilot can easily select desired options,
eliminating time consuming keyboard entries and associated errors.
The FMS provides a Fix Page function, which allows the operator to enter up to nine
waypoints and obtain dynamic range and bearing from each of these waypoints. In
addition, this function determines the location at which each of these waypoints is
abeam the flight plan. The FMS provides the ETA and distance to the Abeam Point,
as well as messaging to alert the pilot when the aircraft is approaching the Abeam
Point.
The FMS provides a Lat/Long Crossing function, which allows the operator to enter
up to four latitudes or longitudes. The FMS then computes the corresponding latitude
or longitude of the intersection point along the flight plan. The FMS provides the
ETA and distance to the Lat/Long Crossing Point, as well as messaging to alert the
pilot when the aircraft is approaching the Lat/Long Crossing Point.
(12) Terminal Area Procedures
The FMS is capable of flying published SIDs and STARs with procedural legs such
as heading-to-radial, heading-to-altitude, course-from-fix-to-DME-distance, and
DME-arcs. Up to nineteen additional leg types (combinations) are available.
(13) Approach Mode
The FMS approach mode provides the pilot with ILS-like guidance while flying FMS
approaches. During an FMS approach, the system provides signals like those of an
ILS for flight director or autopilot coupled approaches. The approach is accessed
from the navigation database or the pilot may define it by entering the approach
waypoint and the reference NAVAID (if required). The system is capable of defining
and flying VOR, RNV (VOR DME), RNV (GPS), NDB, TACAN, ILS, LOC, BC,
VFR, GLS, and GWS (FAA FIAS configuration only) type approaches. During an
ILS, LOC, or BC approach, the FMS uses the localizer signal for roll steering.
(14) Precision Approaches (RNAV (GPS))
The SBAS subsystem adds the capability to fly precision RNAV (GPS) approaches to
the LPV Approach Category (Level of Service). During the final phase of the
precision approach (between the FAF and EOA), the SBAS subsystem independently
provides the guidance both laterally and vertically.
(15) Integrity Monitoring
The SBAS subsystem monitors the integrity of the position output using a step
detector, SBAS-provided integrity monitoring, and RAIM-based fault detection and
exclusion (FDE) algorithms.
(16) RAIM Prediction
The SBAS subsystem supports predicting the availability of fault detection (FD) -
receiver autonomous integrity monitoring (RAIM). It supports the prediction of
RAIM availability for a period of +/-15 minutes around the estimated time of arrival
(ETA) at a fix. Automatic RAIM predictions are no longer supported.
Page 26
34-60-67 8 July 2014
(17) Crosschannel (XChan) Monitoring
The SBAS subsystem provides XChan monitoring for LPV approaches flown in the
offside FMS. This improves the overall system integrity so as to meet the required
integrity for LPV approaches. Based on its own position, the SBAS subsystem
monitors the guidance data from the offside FMS for discrepancies. If an intolerable
discrepancy is detected, the SBAS subsystem sends a LON alert to the offside FMS.
As a result, the offside FMS sets its guidance flags in view. If the offside FMS fails to
set the guidance flags in view, the SBAS subsystem further disconnects the digital
guidance bus of the offside FMS from display systems and sets the analog guidance
flags of the offside FMS in view. XChan monitoring can be disabled through the
FMS configuration that is confirmed by the installer.
(18) RNP RNAV Functionality
The SBAS FMS provides an ANP/RNP display on the Nav pages that depicts FMS
calculated Actual Navigation Performance (ANP) and Required Navigation
Performance (RNP). RNP represents the maximum allowable value for the current
procedure or flight phase. The computed ANP algorithm represents the 95% Total
System Error (TSE) as required in DO-236B, Minimum Aviation System Performance
Standards: Required Navigation Performance for Area Navigation, par. 2.1.1 and as
described in par. 1.7.2.1.
RNP boundary settings may be manually entered (priority 1), coded in the navigation
database (priority 2), or determined by phase of flight. The following table describes
RNP boundary settings as a function of the above criteria.
Priority Source RNP Boundary Settings
1** Manually Entered (Refer to “FMS RNP 5.0 nm Maximum
Annunciation” section below)
2 Navigation database Procedure dependent
3 Default Phase of Flight
Oceanic 4.0 nm
Enroute 2.0 nm
Terminal 1.0 nm
Approach 0.3 nm
**The manually entered RNP value will remain and the SBAS FMS will use that value
until it is manually removed or overwritten, within a given power up cycle.
Dual multi-sensor FMS installations which integrate GPS/SBAS sensors in the SBAS
FMSs meet the equipment and accuracy requirements of FAA Order 8400.12A para.
12b(4) for operations in RNP-10 airspace and FAA Order 8400.33 para. 8a(2)(a) or
8a(2)(b)i for operations in RNP 4 airspace. Operational approval must be obtained
from the appropriate authority.
The SBAS FMSs also complies with equipment and accuracy requirements of AC 90-
96A paragraph Appendix 1 for BRNAV (RNP-5) when operating in Class I airspace,
without time limits.
Page 27
34-60-67 8 July 2014
Inclusion of this function in the FMS does not constitute an Operational Approval for
RNAV RNP SAAAR procedures.
FMS RNP Annunciations
The following annunciations are associated with ANP/RNP criteria:
POSITION UNCERTAIN
Any time the ANP value exceeds the RNP value, a Position Uncertain message is
provided. Under this condition, a POS annunciation is displayed on the CDU. If the
Position Uncertain condition occurs during an approach, the lateral and vertical
deviation flags are placed in view and will remain in view until the FMS position is
no longer uncertain.
VERIFY MANUAL RNP
This message displayed on the FMS CDU will be removed after it is displayed once.
1. A manual RNP has been entered on the NAV pages, a flight phase transition
occurs and the new flight phase RNP Limit is less than the manual RNP.
2. A manual RNP has been entered on the NAV pages and a leg with a lower
database RNP value is sequenced to in a linked flight plan.
(19) SBAS Subsystem Functions
• Navigation solution: The SBAS subsystem provides a navigation solution for all
phases of flight using GPS augmented by SBAS. The navigation solution includes
antenna position, time, velocity, and other pertinent data.
• Integrity monitoring: The SBAS subsystem monitors the integrity of the position
output using a step detector, SBAS-provided integrity monitoring, and RAIM-
based fault detection and exclusion (FDE). The SBAS subsystem notifies the
FMS if a satellite failure is detected and provides horizontal protection level
(HPL) and vertical protection level (VPL) to the FMS. The FMS performs the loss
of integrity (LOI) alerting.
• RAIM prediction: The SBAS subsystem supports predicting the availability of
fault detection (FD)–receiver autonomous integrity monitoring (RAIM), at a
single space-time point. It also supports the prediction of RAIM availability for a
period of +/–15 minutes around the estimated time of arrival (ETA) at a fix.
Automatic RAIM predictions are no longer supported
Page 28
34-60-67 8 July 2014
• Guidance for approaches with final approach segment data block (FAS DB): The
FAS DB stored in the FMC navigation database contains the designated SBAS
service provider ID, the waypoints defining the FAS path and alert limits for the
approach. Based on the information, the SBAS subsystem determines the
available approach service level LNAV, LNAV/VNAV, or LPV). The SBAS
subsystem further provides lateral/vertical guidance for the selected approach
relative to the aircraft navigation center position. The navigation center position is
translated from the antenna position using the antenna offset stored and confirmed
in the FMS configuration module. The SBAS subsystem then continuously
monitors whether the applicable alert limit requirements are met. The SBAS
subsystem notifies the pilot via guidance flags if loss of navigation (LON) occurs.
• ARINC I/O and critical analog/discrete output: In order to meet the criticality
level for precision approaches, the SBAS subsystem processes all FMS ARINC
I/O and critical analog/discrete outputs. The SBAS subsystem configures its
ARINC I/O and analog/discrete output based on the information in the FMS
configuration module. For oceanic, en route, terminal, and approach (without FAS
DB) phases of flight, the FMS transmits the guidance data and other ARINC data
to external systems. For approaches with FAS DB, the SBAS subsystem
substitutes the FMC guidance data with its own computed deviations and
guidance flags.
• Crosschannel (Xchan) monitoring: The SBAS subsystem provides Xchan
monitoring for an LP or LPV approach flown in the offside FMS. This improves
the overall system integrity to meet the required integrity for an LP or LPV
approach. Based on its own position, the SBAS subsystem monitors the guidance
data from the offside FMS for discrepancies. If an intolerable discrepancy is
detected, the SBAS subsystem sends a LON alert to the offside FMS. As a result,
the offside FMS sets its guidance flags in view. If the offside FMS fails to set the
guidance flags in view, the SBAS subsystem further disconnects the digital
guidance bus of the offside FMS from display systems and sets the analog
guidance flags of the offside FMS in view. Xchan monitoring can be disabled
through the FMS configuration that is confirmed by the installer.
• ARINC I/O and critical analog/discrete output: To meet the criticality level for
precision approaches, the SBAS subsystem processes all FMS ARINC I/O and
critical analog/discrete outputs. The SBAS subsystem configures its ARINC I/O
and analog/discrete output based on the information in the FMS Configuration
Module. For oceanic, enroute, terminal, and approach (without FAS DB) phases
of flight, the FMS transmits the guidance data and other ARINC data to external
systems. For approaches with FAS DB, the SBAS subsystem substitutes the FMC
guidance data with its own computed deviations and guidance flags.
• SBAS CPU monitor: The SBAS subsystem monitors the FMS CPU Integrity by
comparing its computed position output to the FMS System Position. If there is a
discrepancy, the SBAS subsystem will independently flag the FMC guidance
busses.
Page 29
34-60-67 8 July 2014
2. Operation
A. General
Detailed operating procedures for the FMS are provided in the Operator’s Manual for the
specific software loaded in the FMS, for example, SCN 1001.X or 1101.X. The operating
procedures presented here are intended to provide information necessary to perform tasks
later in this manual.
The FMS Operator’s Manuals introduce the CDU, explains the CDU operating philosophy,
and provides a detailed explanation of the keyboard keys and their associated functions.
The FMS provides all the controls necessary to communicate with the navigation computer
and associated navigation sensors. Line select keys (LSK) are located on either side of the
display. In this manual, individual line select keys are referred to as [1L] through [5L] and
[1R] through [5R]. Function keys are immediately below the display and an alphanumeric
keypad is below and to the right of the function keys. The display provides for manual data
entry, system mode selection, computed and raw data displays control (selection and
deselection) of navigational sensors and system message displays.
The following text provides general information about operator – CDU interface that is
applicable to installation and checkout of the FMS.
(1) Cursor
Data is always entered into the system at a cursor location. The cursor marks variable
parameters by means of reverse field. When appropriate, the cursor location aligns
with one of the ten line select keys used to control the cursor. The home position of
the cursor is usually off the display when a page is initially accessed, although some
pages have a cursor default position that is on the screen. Pushing the ENTER key
completes the entry of data. If there is a logical next field for data entry, the cursor
automatically advances to this next field when [ENTER] is pushed.
(2) Item Selection
OPT LIST 1/ 1
select
#-
1 no sensor
2 dc linear
3 ac linear
4 pulse freq
5 pulse width
6 digital
RETURN®
Sample Display
Selections are made using the line select keys whenever possible. In some cases a
combination of line select keys and reference numbers are used on the same display
page. This allows two levels of selection to exist simultaneously on the same display
page. For example, while the content or nature of a list is controlled by the line select
keys, an item from that list can be selected by using a reference number. In this
illustration (OPT LIST 1/ 1) the reference numbers appear to the left of the items
available for selection.
Page 30
34-60-67 8 July 2014
The cursor is on the dash in the data entry field next to the pound (#) sign. To make a
selection, input the number using the keypad corresponding to your choice and push
[ENTER]. The arrow next to RETURN points to the adjacent line select key [5R].
Pushing LSK [5R] will return the display to the previous page.
Any selection that will change the active flight plan, guidance of the aircraft or the
stored database requires confirmation. Confirmation is accomplished by pushing the
line select key a second time or by pushing [ENTER]. Selection of fields that do not
require confirmation will cause the page or mode change to occur immediately when
the corresponding line select key is pushed.
(3) Information Display
Color and graphics are used to draw attention to the most important items on a
display. Background colors and/or boxes are used to group data into important areas
such as control or selection boxes.
(4) Display Control
Pushing [ON/OFF DIM] function key for initial power-up energizes the system and
initiates self test of the navigation computer. When self-test is initiated, the Self-test
page is displayed. The Self-test page will be followed automatically by the
Initialization page if all tests are successfully completed. If a failure occurs that would
cause the system to be unusable, the Initialization page will not be displayed. Once
the Initialization page is displayed, no other page can be displayed until the
initialization data is accepted.
(5) Power/Display Control Page
BRIGHT®
DIM®
CANCEL®
DISPLAY®
OFF/STBY®
Power/Display Control Page

After the system is turned on, pushing [ON/OFF DIM] displays the options BRIGHT,
DIM, CANCEL, DISPLAY and OFF/STBY. Pushing the associated line select key to
one of these options selects the option.
BRIGHT – Pushing LSK [1R] BRIGHT slowly increases the brightness of the
display as the key is held down until reaching maximum brightness.
DIM – Pushing LSK [2R] DIM slowly dims the display as the key is held down until
reaching minimum brightness.
CANCEL – Pushing LSK [3R] CANCEL causes the control page to be removed
from the active display page.
Page 31
34-60-67 8 July 2014
DISPLAY – Pushing LSK [2R] DISPLAY will cause the parallax adjustment page to
be displayed.
UP®
DOWN®
CANCEL®
Parallax Adjustment Page

To adjust the parallax for the line select keys the adjustment page presents three
options (UP, DOWN, and CANCEL) using the line select keys.
UP – Pushing LSK [1R] UP adjusts the entire display upward by as much as one-half
character.
DOWN – Pushing LSK [2R] DOWN adjusts the entire display downward by as much
as one-half character.
CANCEL – Pushing LSK [3R] CANCEL returns the display to the Power/Display
Control page.
OFF/STBY – Pushing LSK [5R] OFF/STBY displays the CONFIRM OFF/STBY
page.
CONFIRM®
OFF
CANCEL®
CONFIRM
STANDBY®
Confirm Off Page

This page has three options (CONFIRM OFF, CANCEL and CONFIRM STANDBY)
selectable using the line select keys.
CONFIRM OFF – Pushing LSK [1R] CONFIRM OFF turns the system off.
CANCEL – Pushing LSK [3R] CANCEL returns the display to the Power/Display
Control page.
CONFIRM STANDBY – Pushing LSK [5R] CONFIRM STANDBY allows the
FMS to be powered up with position information intact. This is a configurable
feature.
Page 32
34-60-67 8 July 2014
B. Data Transfer Unit (DTU–100)
The following paragraphs provide general information about operating the DTU (Models
1406 and 1407). Refer to your Operator’s Manual applicable to your Flight Management
System and software program version for detailed operating procedures.
When using the Portable DTU, connect the DTU cable to the appropriate panel-mounted
connectors before turning the unit on.
(1) Power
With external power applied to the DTU-100, the red LED illuminates.
(2) Disk Insertion and Removal
• Open the Dust Cover by pulling out and upward on the tabs. The pivot arms and
latch mechanisms will hold the Dust Cover in the fully open position.
• Insert the disk into the drive. Push on the exposed edge of disk until it is fully
inserted.
• Push the eject button on the disc drive to remove the disk.
• Grasp the disk and pull it out of the drive.
• Push the dust cover toward the unit until it snaps closed.
C. Solid State Data Transfer Unit (SSDTU)
The following paragraphs provide general information about operating the SSDTU, models
1408-( ) and 1409-( ). Refer to the Operator’s Manual applicable to the Flight Management
System and software version for detailed operating procedures.
(1) Power
NOTE: When using the Portable SSDTU, connect the SSDTU cable to the
appropriate panel-mounted connectors before applying power to the aircraft.
When power is applied, the SSDTU undergoes a Lamp Test and Power-on Built-In-
Test (PBIT). The SSDTU operates the front panel LED indicators in the following
order.
(a) All LEDs Off: Power supply not present.
(b) All LEDs Amber: Power supply good, processor initializing.
(c) All LEDs Green: Loading and verifying the operating system image and
verifying the file system image.
(d) All LEDs Blue: Initializing operating system.
Page 33
34-60-67 8 July 2014
During PBIT, all three indicators will display the same status at any given time. The
purpose of the operation is to test the LEDs and to give a clear indication of which
PBIT step failed, should the SSDTU fail to begin normal operation.
Following PBIT (normal operation), the SSDTU operates the front panel LED
indicators as shown in the following table.
Indicator Color and Action
Indicator
Type Blank Green Green Amber Blue Blue
Solid Blinking Solid Solid Blinking
STATUS SSDTU Off Operational N/A CBIT has Self-Test N/A
(Front) detected an
error
(SSDTU will
reboot)
USB No device Device OK, Device is Bad or Device OK, Device is
(Front) present not in use being unsupported in use being
accessed device (Indicates accessed
Primary
Storage
Device)
SD No device Device OK, Device is Bad or Device OK, Device is
(Front) present not in use being unsupported in use being
accessed device (Indicates accessed
Primary
Storage
Device)
NET Not yet N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
(Front) operational
Ethernet No device A network Network N/A N/A N/A
(Rear) present link is activity
established
on this port
(2) Flash Memory

(a) Insertion
• Open the Dust Cover by pulling upward on the tabs. The pivot arms and
• Insert the flash memory card. Push on the exposed edge until it is fully
inserted, the memory card will remain seated all the way in the slot when
pressure is released.
NOTE: If the card does not slide into the slot easily, do not try to force
it; the card will not fit in backwards. Turn the card around 180º
and reinsert card.
• Close the dust cover.
Page 34
34-60-67 8 July 2014
(b) Removal of Data Storage Device
NOTE: If the data storage device is removed during a read operation, the
read operation will fail. If the data storage device is removed during
a write operation, the device may become corrupt and will require
the data storage device to be formatted on a personal computer (not
an FMS format command that only deletes files from the media).
• Push on the exposed edge of the memory card, release pressure and the
memory card will eject slightly out of the slot.
• Grasp the edge of the flash memory and pull it out of the SSDTU.
• Close the dust cover.
(3) USB Memory Insertion
(a) Insertion
• Insert USB memory all the way into the USB slot until seated.
NOTE: If the USB Memory does not slide into the slot easily, do not
try to force it; the card will not fit in backwards. Turn the
memory card around 180º and reinsert.
NOTE: Do not close dust cover.
(b) Removal
NOTE: If the data storage device is removed during a read operation, the
read operation will fail. If the data storage device is removed during
a write operation, the device may become corrupt and will require
the data storage device to be formatted on a personal computer (not
an FMS format command that only deletes files from the media).
• Pull USB Memory card straight out of memory slot.
• Close dust cover.
Page 35
34-60-67 8 July 2014
D. EFIS Radar Panel (ERP), P/N 1015–1–X (Lear 60 Pro Line 4 Installations Only)
The supplement to the FMS Operator’s Manual introduces the ERP and provides a detailed
explanation of the radar controls and MFD keys and their associated functions.
(1) ERP Radar Controls

The ERP faceplate contains several Weather Radar System controls. Control
functions are identical from one weather radar system to another. When any of these
controls are activated the ERP sends the input to the FMS.
PUSH RDR ON – Located in the center of the RANGE knob, this switch is used to
activate the weather display on the MFD. When the MAP mode is displayed on the
MFD, pressing this switch will superimpose weather radar on the map display.
Pressing this switch a second time will remove the weather radar from the map
display. When this switch is pressed while the MFD is in HSI format, weather only
format will be displayed on the MFD.
RANGE – Turning this knob selects radar/map display range from 5 nm to 300 nm
and up to 600 nm in plan map. Range annunciation will be displayed on the MFD.
RDR – This key provides display of the Radar Functions page. (RADAR CNTRL) on
the onside FMS. Pressing this key a second time displays the second Radar Function
page. Radar functions are selected from these two pages.
PUSH ZERO – Located in the center of the TILT knob, this switch is pressed to set
the vertical tilt of the weather radar antenna to zero degrees.
TILT – Turning this knob selects the tilt angle of the weather radar antenna from -14
degrees to +14 degrees. Tilt annunciation is displayed on the ND/MFD.
(2) ERP/MFD Keys and Switches
HSI – This key provides display of a conventional compass rose on the MFD. A
traditional Horizontal Situation Indicator will be displayed. Radar targets will not
display in HSI format.
MAP – This key is sued to display a present position map on the MFD.
TFC – This is only active if TCAS is installed. If so, it will display a traffic map on
the MFD.
NAV – This key is sued to display a navigation source menu (NAV SOURCE 1/1) on
the onside FMS from which navigation sensors may be selected for onside display on
the PFD/MFD.
BRG – This key is used to display a Bearing Pointers (BRG PTRS) menu. The menu
lists sensors that may be selected for driving bearing pointers on the PFD/MFD.
Page 36
34-60-67 8 July 2014
FAA Approval
1. General
Approval of the FMS System is not authorized by this Installation Manual. Acceptance for
the installation and use of the FMS and its associated components must be sought through the
appropriate offices of the Federal Aviation Administration or other certifying agency. It is
recommended that all proposed installations be coordinated with the local jurisdiction of the
Federal Aviation Administration or other certifying agency prior to performing the
installation.
NOTE: The TSO identifies the minimum performance standards, tests and other conditions
applicable for issuance of design and production approval of the article. The TSO
does not specifically identify acceptable conditions for installation of the article.
The STC applicant is responsible for documenting all limitations and conditions
suitable for installation of the article. An applicant requesting approval for
installation of the article within a specific type or class of product is responsible for
determining environmental and functional compatibility.
It is recommended that when certifying (SCN 1001/1101) use the variable X
(1001.X) in the original certification package to ensure point changes will not
affect future certification requirements and to assure that the AFMS will not need
to be changed with point changes.
NOTE: All first time approvals using performance Vspeeds and engine thrust rating
computations for a specific aircraft model must be approved by TC or STC
process.
A. Applicable TSOs
TSO/ETSO
UNS-1( )w
4” FPCDU
5” FPCDU
Antennas
DTU-100
SSDTU
TSO-C109 X X
TSO-C115b X X
TSO-C115c X
TSO-C129a X X
TSO-C146c X
TSO-C190 X
ETSO-C109 X X
ETSO-C115b X X
ETSO-C129a X X
(1) TSO-C109 (09-Dec-1985): Airborne Navigation Data Storage System

(2) TSO-C115b (30-Sep-1994): Airborne Area Navigation Equipment using Multi-sensor
Inputs
Page 101
34-60-67 8 July 2014
(3) TSO-C115c (19-Jan-2012): Flight Management Systems (FMS) using Multi-sensor
Inputs
(4) TSO-C129a (20-Feb-1996): Airborne Supplemental Navigation Equipment Using The
Global Positioning System (GPS)
(5) TSO-C146c (09-May-2008): Stand-Alone Airborne Navigation Equipment Using the
Global Positioning System Augmented by the Satellite Based Augmentation System
(6) TSO-C190 (20-Mar-2007): Active Airborne Global Navigation Satellite System
(GNSS) Antenna
(7) ETSO-C109 (24-Oct-2003): Airborne Navigation Data Storage System
(8) ETSO-C115b (24-Oct-2003): Airborne Area Navigation Equipment using Multi-
sensor Inputs
(9) ETSO-C129a (24-Oct-2003): Airborne Supplemental Navigation Equipment Using
Global Positioning System (GPS)
B. Applicable Advisory Circulars and Other References

(1) AC 20-138D (28-Mar-2014): Airworthiness Approval of Position & Navigation
Systems
(2) AC 25-15 (20-Oct-1989): Approval of Flight Management Systems in Transport
Category Airplanes
(3) AC 90-45A (21-Feb-1975): Approval of Area Navigation Systems for use in the U.S.
National Airspace System
(4) AC 90-100A (01-Mar-2007): U.S Terminal and En Route Area Navigation (RNAV)
Operations
(5) AC 91-49 (23-Aug-1977): General Aviation Procedures for Flight in North Atlantic
Minimum Navigation Performance Specifications Airspace
(6) AC 120-33 (24-Jun-1977): Operational Approval of Airborne Long Range
Navigation Systems for Flight within the North Atlantic Minimum Navigation
Performance Specifications Airspace
(7) EASA AMC 20-4: Airworthiness Approval and Operational Criteria For the Use of
Navigation Systems in European Airspace Designated For Basic RNAV Operations
(8) EASA AMC 20-5: Airworthiness Approval and Operational Criteria for the use of
the Navstar Global Positioning System (GPS)
(9) EASA AMC 20-27A (12-Sep-2013): Airworthiness Approval and Operational
Criteria For RNP APPROACH (RNP APCH) Operations including APV BARO-
VNAV Operations
Page 102
34-60-67 8 July 2014
(10) EASA AMC 20-28 (24-Sep-2012): Airworthiness Approval and Operational Criteria
related to Area Navigation for Global Navigation Satellite System approach
operation to Localizer Performance with Vertical guidance minima using Satellite
Based Augmentation System
(11) EASA AMC 20-12: Recognition of FAA Order 8400.12a For RNP-10 Operations
(12) JAA TGL-10 (11-Jan-2000): Airworthiness and Operational Approval for Precision
RNAV Operations in Designated European Airspace
C. Reference Documents
(1) RTCA/DO-160E (09-Dec-2004): Environmental Conditions and Test Procedures for
Airborne Equipment
(2) RTCA/DO-178B (01-Dec-1992): Software considerations in Airborne Systems and
Equipment Certification
(3) RTCA/DO-187 (13-Nov-1984): Minimum Operational Performance Standards for
Airborne Area Navigation Equipment Using Multi-Sensor Inputs
(4) RTCA/DO-301 (13-Dec-2006): Minimum Operational Performance Standards for
Global Navigation Satellite System (GNSS) Airborne Active Antenna Equipment for
the L1 Frequency Band
(5) RTCA/DO-229D (13-Dec-2006): Minimum Operational Performance Standards for
Global Positioning System/Wide Area Augmentation System Airborne Equipment
(6) RTCA/DO-236B (28-Oct-2003): Minimum Aviation System Performance Standards:
Required Navigation Performance for Area Navigation
(7) RTCA/DO-254 (19-Apr-2000): Design Assurance Guidance for Airborne Electronic
Hardware
(8) RTCA/DO-283A (28-Oct-2003): Minimum Operational Performance Standards for
Required Navigation Performance for Area Navigation
(9) EUROCAE ED-58 (June 1988): Minimum Operational Performance Specification
for Area Navigation Equipment Using Multi-Sensor Inputs
D. Universal Avionics Publications and Documents
(1) 34-60-71: SBAS FMS SCN 1001/1101 Interface Manual
(2) 34-61-02: SBAS FMS Configuration Manual for SCN 1001/1101
(3) Service Letter No. 2753: Basic RNAV (BRNAV)/RNP-5 Operation in European
Airspace
(4) Service Letter No. 2758: RNP-10 Operations in the North and Central Pacific
(5) Service Letter No. 2792: EASA PRNAV Approval of Universal Avionics FMS per JAA
TGL-10 Compliance Evaluation Summary
(6) Service Letter No. 2804: UASC FMS Compliance with FAA Advisory Circular
90-100A
Page 103
34-60-67 8 July 2014
(7) Service Letter No. 2814: Compliance Summary for RNP-4 Operations (FAA Order
8400.33)
(8) Service Letter No. 2818: UASC FMS Compliance with RNP and RNAV Requirements
(9) Service Letter No. 2838: AC 20-138D Compliance Evaluation Summary for
WAAS/SBAS FMS
(10) Service Letter No: 2847: WAAS/SBAS Flight Management Systems Compliance with
AC 20-165A
(11) Service Letter No. 2852: SBAS Flight Management Systems Compliance with EASA
AMC 20-28
(12) Service Letter No. 2854: SBAS Flight Management Systems (FMSs) Compliance
with EASA AMC 20-27A
(13) Universal Avionics Report No. RPRT-2009-1004, Engineering Assisted Field
Approval Process for the Installation Upgrade of Universal Avionics FMS Approved
fort 3D Coupled Approaches to Universal Avionics SBAS FMS with LPV Approach
Capability.
Use this document for upgrades that fall under these categories:
The existing FMS installation must be laterally and vertically integrated to the flight
instruments capable of meeting the scaling requirements of TSO-C146c and
RTCA/DO 229D. Note that the flight instruments do not require approval to
TSOC146c, only that they must meet the scaling requirements. Analog / mechanical
flight instruments inherently meet these scaling requirements as deviation scaling is
under the control of the FMS.
The existing FMS installation must be approved for lateral and vertical coupled
operation to the Fight Guidance System (FGS). Interfaces to the FGS using the analog
ILS channel inherently meet these scaling requirements as deviation scaling is under
the control of the FMS.
The existing FMS installation in the candidate aircraft must be approved by FAA TC,
FAA STC, or Field Approval.
Page 104
34-60-67 8 July 2014
E. TSO Deviations
In accordance with the provisions outlined in 14 CFR 21.618, Amdt 21-92, Universal
Avionics Systems Corporation has been granted the following deviations from TSO-C146c,
RTCA/DO-229D, TSO-C115c, and RTCA/DO-283A:
TSO-C146c DEVIATIONS AND CLARIFICATIONS
No deviations to TSO-C146c are claimed.
RTCA/DO-229D DEVIATIONS AND CLARIFICATIONS
Paragraph 2.1 - General Requirements (LP approaches)
The UNS-1( )w FMS does not implement LP approach capability. LP Approach types are
removed from the navigation databases at every cycle, and therefore, cannot be added to a
flight plan directly in the FMS or using the off-line flight planning (UFP) software.
Paragraph 2.1.3.2.2.3 - FDE Prediction
The UNS-1( )w FMS will remove satellites from the position solution when deselected by the
pilot. This feature is a valuable aid in demonstrating compliance to the MPS accuracy and
integrity requirements, both in the lab and flight testing.
Paragraph 2.2.1.1.4.5 - Alphanumerics
The UNS-1( )w FMS identifies each waypoint as per the charted procedure. The waypoints
are not specifically labeled as IAW, FAWP, MAWP or Missed Approach Holding Fix.
Paragraph 2.2.1.1.6 – Set of Standard Function Labels
The UNS-1( )w FMS employs the same set of labels and messages across the entire FMS
product line. Universal chooses to retain the human interface currently in use throughout our
product line and operated by thousands of flight crews today.
Paragraph 2.2.3.3.1 - Approach Path Definition
When the procedure dictates a course change at the FAF, the Universal FMS exceeds the
MPS requirements by providing deviations relative to the charted course from the FACF to
the FAWP.
When a Direct To is activated that results in a course change at the FAF of 45 degrees or
more, the UNS-1( )w FMS will anticipate the turn in a way to minimize any path overshoot.
Universal is able to demonstrate acceptable performance up to 80 degrees course change at
the FAF when it is not designated as “Overfly”.
Paragraph 2.2.3.7.2 - Departure Requirements
TSO-C146c/DO-229D specifies the use of LNAV accuracy and integrity monitoring
(2.2.3.7.2.1) and 0.3 NM scaling value (2.2.3.7.2.3) for the first leg of a departure procedure.
For non-RNP departure procedures (RNP value not set), the FMS will use the LNAV scaling
value of 0.3 NM for the first leg of the departure procedure in compliance with DO-229D
2.2.3.7.1.2 (the first leg is coded as a TF leg and is aligned with the departure runway within
3 degrees).
TSO-C115b/DO-283A Section 2.2.2.12.2 specifies system priorities for selecting RNP
values. If an RNP value is coded in the database for the first leg of a departure procedure,
Page 105
34-60-67 8 July 2014
then the FMS will use the coded RNP value instead of the LNAV value of 0.3 NM as
specified by DO-229D.
When flying non-RNP departure procedures (RNP value not set on leg), the FMS will use the
LNAV scaling value of 0.3 NM for the initial leg as specified in DO-229D. When flying
RNP departure procedures (RNP value set on leg), the FMS will use the RNP value coded
into the procedure for the initial leg as specified in DO-283A.
TSO-C115c DEVIATIONS AND CLARIFICATIONS
Paragraph 3.d. - Environmental Qualification
The UNS-1( )w FMSs will be qualified to RTCA/DO-160E, which is a standard appropriate
for the Flight Management System (FMS) Using Multi-Sensor Inputs.
RTCA/DO-283A DEVIATIONS AND CLARIFICATIONS
Paragraph 2.2.2.7 - Parallel Offsets
The Universal FMS complies with all requirements relative to parallel offsets except that it
cancels the offset mode after proceeding from a manually defined (present position) hold.
Offset mode is cancelled immediately when PPOS HOLD is activated, the offset
annunciation is removed, and guidance is provided to the hold. The pilot may re-activate
offset mode after proceeding on course.
Fixed radius transitions are not implemented at this time. Procedures containing fixed-radius
transitions will be removed from the navigation database. The following statement will be
included as an AFMS Limitation and also inserted in the Operator’s Manual in multiple
locations: The FMS does not support fixed-radius transitions
Paragraph 2.2.2.9 - Transitions Between Legs
Fixed radius transitions are not implemented at this time. Universal plans to implement fixed
radius transitions using the radius of turn from the navigation database. The requirements are
not yet clear and is not implemented in any airspace in the world.
Procedures containing fixed-radius transitions will be removed from the navigation database.
The following statement will be included as an AFMS Limitation and also inserted in the
Operator’s Manual in multiple locations: The FMS does not support fixed-radius transitions
Paragraph 2.2.2.12.2 - RNP-(x) RNAV Type Associated with a Flight Plan Leg
The Universal Avionics wFMS is compliant with paragraph 2.2.12.2 a. and b. For 2.2.12.2 c,
the RNP RNAV type for an area is provisioned in the ARINC 424 specification, but is not
currently provided by the data content suppliers, and therefore cannot be evaluated. If a. and
b. do not apply, the FMS uses phase-of-flight RNP.
Page 106
34-60-67 8 July 2014
Pragraph 2.2.4.1.2 - Non-Numeric Display/Output Requirements \
Analog approach deviation:
Analog approach deviation is output as angular because it is typically used as a steering
signal into the FGS ILS channel. Note that this issue affects only the analog output and only
in approach mode; the digital output is always linear
Non-Numeric Display/Output Sensitivity Requirements:
Algorithm: The display electrical output scaling (digital and non-approach analog) for
RNP types 0.3 to 3.99 is simply 1 dot = ½ RNP. For RNP 4.0 and greater, the scaling is
4.0 NM IAW the MPS.
Affects: The display electrical output scaling (digital and non-approach analog)
sensitivity is compliant with the MPS for standard RNP values (0.3, 1.0, 2.0, and 4.0 and
greater), and less sensitive for the non-standard values between 0.3 and 4.0.
Paragraph 2.2.4.11 - Failure/Status Indications and Alerting
The FMS enables RNP alerting when sequencing to the RNP leg regardless of crosstrack
deviation. The effect is that on rare occasions, the flight crew may receive an alert that is
appropriate for the planned procedure but slightly earlier than per the requirement.
Paragraph 2.4.3.4 - Waypoint Transitions
Fixed radius transitions are not implemented at this time. Procedures containing fixed-radius
transitions will be removed from the navigation database. The following statement will be
included as an AFMS Limitation and also inserted in the Operator’s Manual in multiple
locations: The FMS does not support fixed-radius transitions
Paragraph C.2.1 - VHF Omni-directional Range (VOR)
The Universal FMS VOR error is modeled with a variance of 1/64 degrees quantity squared
(0.9 degrees); one standard deviation = square root (0.9) = 0.946 deg. This is more
conservative than the infrastructure assumption.
Paragraph C.2.2 - Distance Measuring Equipment (DME)
The standard deviation of DME error is modeled as 0.5% of the predicted range with a
minimum of 181 meters (0.1 nm). This is more conservative than the infrastructure
assumption.
Paragraph H.2.4.4.3 - Flight Path Angle Paths
The Universal FMS computes the crossing altitude for the Flight path angle path at the
constraint location for the AT or ABOVE constraint case. For the AT constraint case, the
Universal FMS provides VNAV guidance to the path defined by the altitudes and waypoints.
Paragraph H.2.7 - Alerting
The Universal FMS provides a vertical waypoint alert 15 seconds prior to commencing any
vertical maneuver. In addition, at the top of descent, a message is given 2 minutes before the
top of descent indicating a top of descent alert. For aircraft with altitude preselect input to the
FMS, a reset altitude preselect message is given two minutes before the top of descent if the
preselect is not set below the current altitude
Page 107
34-60-67 8 July 2014
F. Non-TSO Functions
Airdrop: The FMS optionally contains the capability to enable the airdrop feature. The
airdrop feature provides the capability to compute and guide to a Computed Air Release
Point (CARP). The airdrop feature is available only when configured at the factory for
hardware and software part numbers with an “M” (Military) suffix. The airdrop function is
considered a non-TSO function and fall under ITAR restrictions and is only available to
qualified operators.
G. Installation Procedures and Limitations
In accordance with FAA TSO-C115c, Section 5.a.(3):
This article meets the minimum performance and quality control standards required
by a technical standard order (TSO). Installation of this article requires separate
approval.
In accordance with FAA TSO-C146c, Section 5.b:
The conditions and tests required for TSO approval of this article are minimum
performance standards. Those installing this article, on or in a specific type or class of
aircraft, must determine that the aircraft installation conditions are within the TSO
standards. TSO articles must have separate approval for installation in an aircraft. The
article may be installed only according to 14 CFR part 43 or the applicable airworthiness
requirements.
In accordance with FAA TSO-C146c, Section 5.o:
The USN-1Ew can satisfy the requirements of RTCA/DO-229D only when used with a
Universal Avionics P/N 10708 GPS/SBAS antenna, P/N 10709 GPS/SBAS with Sirius
Dual Element Antenna, or P/N 10710 GPS/SBAS with XM Dual Element Antenna.
In accordance with FAA TSO-C146c, Section 5.r:
Aircraft weighing 6000 lbs or more require the installation of dual UNS-1( )w systems or
a single UNS-1( )w FMS with an UNS-1Lw LPV monitor in order to meet the 10-7
integrity requirement of TSO-C146b paragraph 3b(1).
In accordance with FAA TSO-C146c, Section 5.s:
When the UNS-1( )w FMS is installed in an aircraft with SATCOM equipment, the
airworthiness applicant is responsible for ensuring compatibility between the FMS and
the SATCOM equipment.
ASCB Compatibility:
Software SCN 1001.0/1101.0/1101.0M is not compatible with the UNS-1Ew
FMS/MMMS with the ASCB option. Software SCN 1001.0/1101.0/1101.0M must
not be installed in an aircraft that requires the ASCB interface.
Page 108
34-60-67 1 August 2014
2. Software Criticality
TSO-C115c Failure Condition Classifications:
For RNP ≥ 0.3, Malfunction is a major failure condition for misleading lateral or vertical
guidance. Loss of the function defined in paragraph 3.a of TSO-C115c is a major failure
condition for lateral guidance and a minor failure condition for vertical guidance.
The FMC application software embedded in the FMS responsible for RNP operations is
categorized as DO-178B Level C (Major). Level C software is defined as “software whose
anomalous behavior, as shown by the system safety assessment process, would cause or
contribute to a failure of system function resulting in a major failure condition for the
aircraft.”
For RNP <0.3, Malfunction is a hazardous (severe-major) failure condition for misleading
lateral or vertical guidance. Loss of the function defined in paragraph 3.a of TSO-C115c is a
hazardous (severe-major) failure condition for lateral guidance and a minor failure
condition for vertical guidance.
Hazardous (severe-major) failure conditions must be mitigated at the installation level by
additional equipment requirements (i.e. IRS), flight crew monitoring of dual systems, or
other acceptable means.
TSO-C146c Failure Condition Classifications:
Failure of the function defined in paragraph 3.a of TSO-C146c is a:
• Major failure condition for loss of function and malfunction of en route, terminal,
approach lateral navigation (LNAV), and approach LNAV/vertical navigation (VNAV)
navigation data,
• Major failure condition for loss of function of approach localizer performance without
vertical guidance (LP), and approach localizer performance with vertical guidance
(LPV) navigation data, and
The FMC application software embedded in the FMS responsible for en-route, terminal,
and non-precision approach operations (LOS < LP) is categorized as DO-178B Level C
(Major). Level C software is defined as “software whose anomalous behavior, as shown
by the system safety assessment process, would cause or contribute to a failure of system
function resulting in a major failure condition for the aircraft.”
• Hazardous (severe-major) failure condition for malfunction of approach (LP and LPV)
navigation data.
All software involved in LPV, guidance, and I/O processing is categorized as DO-178B
Level B (Hazardous/Severe-Major). Level B software is defined as “software whose
anomalous behavior, as shown by the system safety assessment process, would cause or
contribute to a failure of system function resulting in a hazardous/sever-major failure
condition on the aircraft.” Redundant hardware is employed to support required integrity.
UASC chose to meet this level with dual FMS or single FMS plus an LPV Monitor in
which all precision approach guidance, I/O, and cross-channel monitoring is performed
by the DO-178B Level B SBAS subsystem.
Page 109
34-60-67 8 July 2014
Software Version Marking:
FMC, PAS, and sub-assembly SCNs are marked on the nameplate. GG12W software
(i.e. FC05) are identified by Mod strike on the nameplate as indicated in the table below.
Software Module Name Software Control Number DO-178B Level
FMC FMS Application SCN 1001.X C
FMC MMMS Application SCN 1101.X
FMC MMMS Application SCN 1101.XM
PAS Application SCN 10.X (X=.3 or later) B
FMS Boot SCN 12.X C
Aux Board SCN 1.6 or later C
Analog Board SCN 2.0 or later C
ASCB Board SCN 1.1 or later C
Display/Processor SCN 10.5 or later C
GG12w GPS Module FC05 or later B
UNS-1Ew FC05 = Mod 13
UNS-1Espw FC05 = Mod 13
UNS-1Lw FC05 = Mod 6
UNS-1Fw FC05 = Mod 6
Page 110
34-60-67 8 July 2014
Temporary Change No. 34.60.67-1

Manual Affected
Universal Avionics Systems Corporation’s FMS UNS-1Ew FMS SCN 1001/1101
Installation Manual, Report No. 34-60-67 dated 1 August 2014.
Filing Instructions
Insert this Temporary Change in the FAA Approval section adjacent to Page 111.
Purpose
To add information applicable to the Airborne Electronic Hardware table.
Instructions
Replace the Airborne Electronic Hardware table on Page 111 with the following.
Page 1 of 2
34-60-67-1 11 September 2014
3. Airborne Electronic Hardware
Programmable Located on Circuit Means of DAL Classification
Device (PD) Card Assembly Compliance per RTCA/DO-
Description (CCA) 254, Section 1.3
I/O FPGA Daughter, PAS FMS RTCA/DO-254 C Complex
30173110_HCN10.0 03017031( ) CCA
Monitor FPGA Daughter, PAS FMS RTCA/DO-254 C Complex
30173110_HCN10.0 03017031( ) CCA
Display FPGA Display Processor RTCA/DO-254 C Complex
20176210_HCN10.0 02017062( ) CCA
Thales ASIC GPS module GG12W, COTS, previously N/A Complex
SBAS Enabled (Thales certified in DAL B
/ Trimble Navigation) GLS. Predates
P/N 01070915 DO-254
requirement
Glue Logic Auxiliary Predates DO-254 N/A Complex
03017020 CCA
Glue Logic 565 Air Data Analog Predates DO-254 N/A Complex
03192040A CCA
09119561 ASCB Zbus ASCB Ver A BD Predates DO-254 N/A Complex
Interface 03192050B CCA
09119580 ASCB Local
Address decoder
09119550 ASCB
Driver Enable Timer
09119570 ASCB Line
Interface
Glue Logic PLD Display Processor Predates DO-254 N/A Complex
02017061HCN10.1 02017061( ) CCA
20176220_HCN10.1 02017062( ) CCA
Glue Logic PLD CPU 8270 DO-254 N/A Simple
30171010_HCN10.0 03017010 CCA Compliance Not
Glue Logic WAAS ARINC Required per AC N/A Simple
03017030 CCA 20-152 for Simple
AEH
For Airborne Electronic Hardware designated as "Predates DO-254" RTCA/DO-254 section 11.1, "Use
of Previously Developed Hardware" and the applicable sub sections were used in lieu of the objectives
in RTCA/DO254 sections 4 through 8.
Page 2 of 2
34-60-67-1 11 September 2014
3. Airborne Electronic Hardware
Programmable Located on Circuit Means of DAL Classification
Device (PD) Card Assembly Compliance per RTCA/DO-
Description (CCA) 254, Section 1.3
I/O FPGA Daughter, PAS FMS RTCA/DO-254 C Complex
30173110_HCN10.0 03017031( ) CCA
Monitor FPGA Daughter, PAS FMS RTCA/DO-254 C Complex
30173110_HCN10.0 03017031( ) CCA
Display FPGA Display Processor RTCA/DO-254 C Complex
20176210_HCN10.0 02017062( ) CCA
Thales ASIC GPS module GG12W, COTS, previously N/A Complex
SBAS Enabled (Thales certified in DAL B
/ Trimble Navigation) GLS. Predates
P/N 01070915 DO-254
requirement
Glue Logic Auxiliary Predates DO-254 N/A Complex
03017020 CCA
Glue Logic 565 Air Data Analog Predates DO-254 N/A Complex
03192040A CCA
09119561 ASCB Zbus ASCB Ver A BD Predates DO-254 N/A Complex
Interface 03192050B CCA
09119580 ASCB Local
Address decoder
09119550 ASCB
Driver Enable Timer
09119570 ASCB Line
Interface
Glue Logic PLD Display Processor Predates DO-254 N/A Complex
02017061HCN10.1 02017061( ) CCA
20176220_HCN10.1 02017062( ) CCA
Glue Logic PLD CPU 8270 DO-254 N/A Simple
30171010_HCN10.0 03017010 CCA Compliance Not
Glue Logic WAAS ARINC Required per AC N/A Simple
03017030 CCA 20-152 for Simple
AEH
Page 111
34-60-67 8 July 2014
4. Instructions for Continuous Airworthiness, 14 CFR 23.1529,
25.1529, 27.1529 and 29.1529
Permission is hereby granted to use all or part of our statement for STC or FAA Form 337
certification purposes.
Our statement in compliance with 14 CFR 23.1529, 25.1529, 27.1529 and 29.1529 follows:
A. General Information
SYSTEM: UNS-1Ew Flight Management System
Modification of an aircraft by this Supplemental Type Certificate or FAA Form 337 obligates
the aircraft operator to include the maintenance information provided by this document in the
operator’s Aircraft Maintenance Manual and the operator’s Aircraft Scheduled Maintenance
Program.
(1) Maintenance Manual information for the UNS-1Ew (system description, removal,
installation, testing, etc.) is contained in Universal Avionics Systems Corporation’s
(UASC) Installation Manual 34-60-67. System operation is described fully in the
UASC Operator’s Manual Report No. 2423sv1001.
(2) Line Replaceable Unit (LRU) part numbers and other necessary part numbers
contained in the installation data package should be placed in the aircraft operator’s
appropriate aircraft Illustrated Parts Catalog (IPC).
(3) Wiring diagram information contained in this STC / 337 data package should be
placed into the aircraft operator’s appropriate aircraft Wiring Diagram Manuals.
(4) Revision to this document will be accomplished via Service Bulletin and /or
Installation Manual Revision.
B. Airworthiness Limitations
Scheduled Maintenance
Program tasks to be added to the aircraft operator’s appropriate aircraft maintenance program
are as follows:
(1) Recommended Periodic Scheduled Servicing Tasks: None Required.
(2) Recommended Periodic Scheduled Preventative Maintenance Tests/Checks to
Determine System Condition and/or Latent Failures: None Required.
(3) Recommended Periodic Inspections: None Required.
(4) Recommended Periodic Structural Inspections: None Required.
(5) Recommended Replacement Interval: None Required
Unscheduled Maintenance
Unscheduled maintenance may include upgrade of the program software contained in the
FMS. If the FMS is removed and the software changed, the configuration settings should be
checked and amended as necessary in accordance with the instructions contained in
applicable manuals.
Page 112
34-60-67 8 July 2014
5. Environmental Qualification Forms
The environmental categories under which the FMS is approved (reference RTCA DO-160E)
are listed on the accompanying Environmental Qualification Forms in this section.
Page 113
34-60-67 8 July 2014
ENVIRONMENTAL QUALIFICATION FORM
NOMENCLATURE: UNS-1Ew Flight Management System and Configuration Module
PART NO.: 3017-XX-XX1, 3017-XX-XX1M & 30171
TSO NUMBER: TSO-C115c & TSO-C146c
DO178B: Level B/Level C
MANUFACTURER'S SPECIFICATION AND/OR OTHER APPLICABLE SPECIFICATION:
Contained in the appropriate Technical Manual
MANUFACTURER: Universal Avionics Systems Corporation
3260 E. Universal Way
Tucson, AZ 85756-5097
DO-160E
Conditions Category Description of Conducted Tests
Section
Ground Survival Low Temperature 4.5.1 D1 -55°C/-40°C
Short Time Operating Low Temperature
Operating Low Temperature 4.5.2 A1 -20°C
Ground Survival High Temperature 4.5.3 A1 +85°C/+70°C
Short Time High Operating Temperature
Operating High Temperature 4.5.4 A1 +70°C
In-flight Loss of Cooling 4.5.5 X Not Required
Altitude 4.6.1 D1 +50,000 feet
Decompression 4.6.2 D1 +50,000 feet
Overpressure 4.6.3 A1D1 -15,000 feet
Temperature Variation 5.0 B 5°C per minute
Humidity 6.0 A
Operational Shocks and Crash Safety 7.0 B
Vibration 8.0 SB, SM
Explosion Proofness 9.0 H
Waterproofness 10.0 X Not Required
Fluid Susceptibility 11.0 X Not Required
Sand and Dust 12.0 X Not Required
Fungus Resistance 13.0 X Not Required
Salt Spray 14.0 X Not Required
Magnetic Effect 15.0 Z Less than 0.3m to cause deflection of 1
degree
Power Input 16.0 Z
Voltage Spike 17.0 A
Audio Frequency Conducted 18.0 Z
Susceptibility
Induced Signal Susceptibility 19.0 ZC
Radio Frequency Susceptibility 20.0 R
Emission of Radio Frequency 21.0 M
Lightning Induced Transient 22.0 A3, J33
Susceptibility
Lightning Direct Effects 23.0 X Not Required
Icing 24.0 X Not Required
Electric Discharge 25.0 A
Fire, Flammabilty 26.0 X
Page 114
34-60-67 8 July 2014
NOMENCLATURE: 4-Inch Flat Panel Control Display Unit
PART NO.: 1117-XX
TSO NUMBER: TSO-C115b,TSO-C129a, ETSO-C115b and ETSO-C129a
DO-178B: Level C
Contained in the appropriate Installation Manual
Tucson, AZ 85756-5097
DO-160C
Conditions Section Category Description of Conducted Tests
Low Temperature 4.5.1 A1D1 -20°C Operating, -55°C Survival
High Temperature 4.5.2 A1D1 +85°C Survival, +70°C Short Term
High Temperature 4 4.5.3 A1D1 +55°C Operating,
In-flight Loss of Cooling 4.5.4 X Not Applicable
Altitude 4.6.1 A1D1 50,000 FT
Decompression 4.6.2 A1 50,000 FT
Overpressure 4.6.3 A1 -15,000 FT
Temperature Variation 5.0 B
Humidity 6.0 A 55°C, 95%, 48 HOURS
Operational Shock and Crash 7.0 Equipment Tested per DO-160C, Para. 7
Safety
Operational Shocks 7.2 6.0 g
Crash Safety 7.3 15.0g, 12.0 g
Vibration 8.0 B, M & N
Explosion 9.0 X N/A, not spark producing and no hot surfaces
Waterproofness 10.0 X N/A, no exposed to falling water in normal operation
Fluid Susceptibility 11.0 X N/A, fluid containment no commonly encountered
Sand and dust 12.0 X N/A, not exposed to blowing sand and dust
Fungus Resistance 13.0 X N/A, not exposed to severe fungus contamination
Salt Spray 14.0 X N/A, not subjected to salt atmosphere
Magnetic Effect 15.0 Z
Power Input 16.0 Z
Susceptibility
Induced Signal Susceptibility 19.0 Z
(radiated and conducted)
Emission of Radio Frequency 21.0 Z
Lightning Induced Transient 22.0 A3E3 Equipment Tested to Category XXE3 with Method of
Susceptibility AC 20-136
Lightning Direct Effects 23.0 X Equipment not externally mounted.
Icing 24.0 X Equipment not externally mounted.
Page 115
34-60-67 8 July 2014
PART NO.: 1117-X-XX3 and 1117-X-XX4
TSO NUMBER: TSO-C115b,TSO-C129a, ETSO-C115b and ETSO-C129a
DO-178B: Level C
Tucson, AZ 85756-5097
DO-160D
Section
Low Temperature 4.5.1 A1 -15°C Operating, -55°C Survival
High Temperature 4.5.2 A1D1 +85°C Survival, +70°C Short Term
High Temperature 4.5.3 A1D1 +55°C Operating,
In-flight Loss of Cooling 4.5.4 V 30 Minute Minimum
Altitude 4.6.1 D1 50,000 FT
Shock 7.0 B Equipment Tested per DO-160D, Para. 7
Vibration 8.0 SM & SB Fixed Wing Turbo Jet , Turbo Fan (SB)
Fixed Wing Reciprocating, Turboprop (SM)
Explosion 9.0 X N/A, not spark producing and no hot surfaces
Waterproofness 10.0 X N/A, no exposed to falling water in normal operation
Magnetic Effect 15.0 Z Less than 0.3m to cause deflection of one degree
Power Input 16.0 Z 28 VDC operating with a low capacity or no battery
Voltage Spike 17.0 A High degree of protection against voltage spikes
req’d
Audio Frequency Conducted 18.0 Z 28 VDC operating with a low capacity or no battery
Susceptibility – Power Inputs
Induced Signal Susceptibility 19.0 Z Interference free operation is required
Radio Frequency Susceptibility 20.0 R&V Ref. DO-160D
Emission of Radio Frequency 21.0 M Equipment not in direct view of receiver antenna.
Equipment located in cabin or cockpit
Lightning Induced Transient 22.0 XXE3 Equipment Tested to Category XXE3 with Method of
Susceptibility AC 20-136
Lightning Direct Effects 23.0 X N/A, equipment not mounted externally
Icing 24.0 X N/A, equipment mounted in temperature controlled
area
ESD 25.0 A 15,000 Volts
Page 116
34-60-67 8 July 2014
PART NO.: 1117-X-XX5 and 1117-X-XX6 (without Mod 14)
TSO NUMBER: TSO-C115b, TSO-C129a, ETSO-C115b and ETSO-C129a
DO-178B: Level C
Tucson, AZ 85756-5097
DO-160D
Section
Low Temperature 4.5.1 A1D1 -55°C Survival , -15°C ( A1), -20°C (D1) Operating
4.5.2 A1D1 +85°C Survival, +70°C Short Term
High Temperature 4.5.3 A1D1 +55°C
In-flight Loss of Cooling 4.5.4 X
Altitude 4.6.1 A1D1 15,000 ft (A1), 50,000 ft (D1)
Shock 7.0 B Equipment tested per DO-160D, Para. 7
Vibration 8.0 SB & SM Fixed Wing Turbo Jet , Turbo Fan (SB)
Fixed Wing Reciprocating, Turboprop (SM)
Explosion 9.0 X Not spark producing and no hot surfaces
Waterproofness 10.0 X N/A, no exposed to falling water in normal
operation
required
28 VDC operating with a low capacity or no battery
Susceptibility
HIRF conditions are part of normal environment
Ref. DO-160D
Susceptibility
area
ESD 25.0 A 15,000 Volts
Page 117
34-60-67 8 July 2014
PART NO.: 1117-X-XX5 and 1117-X-XX6 (with Mod 14)
DO-178B: Level C
Tucson, AZ 85756-5097
DO-160E
Section
Low Temperature Survival 4.5.1 A1D1 -55°C Survival , -15°C (A1), -20°C (D1) Operating
Low Temperature Short Term 4.5.1 A1D1
+85°C Survival, +70°C Short Term
Operating
Low Temperature Operating 4.5.2 A1D1 -15°C (A1), 20 °C (D1)
High Temperature Survival 4.5.3 A1D1 +85°C
High Temperature Short Term 4.5.3 A1D1 +70°C
Operating
High Temperature Operating 4.5.4 A1D1 +55°C
Altitude 4.6.1 A1D1 15,000 ft (A1), 50,000 ft (D1)
Shock 7.0 B
Vibration 8.0 SB Fixed Wing Turbo Jet , Turbo Fan
SM Fixed Wing Reciprocating, Turboprop
U Helicopters with unknown rotor related
frequencies
Explosion 9.0 X Not spark producing and no hot surfaces
Waterproofness 10.0 X N/A, no exposed to falling water in normal
operation
required
28 VDC operating with a low capacity or no battery
Susceptibility
HIRF conditions are part of normal environment
Page 118
34-60-67 8 July 2014
DO-160E
Section
Susceptibility
area
ESD 25.0 A 15,000 Volts
Fire, Flammability 26.0 X N/A
Page 119
34-60-67 8 July 2014
PART NO.: 1018-X-XXX (Without Mod 9 or Mod 11)
DO-178B: Level C
Tucson, AZ. 85756-5097
DO-160C
Conditions Rev 3 Category Description of Conducted Tests
Section
Low Temperature 4.5.1 A1D1 -20°C Operating, -55°C Survival
Low Operating Temperature 4.5.2 A1D1 +55°C Operating, +85°C Survival
High Temperature 4.5.3 A1D1 +55°C Operating, +85°C Survival
In-flight Loss of Cooling 4.5.4 X N/A
Altitude 4.6.1 A1D1 50,000 FT
Decompression 4.6.2 A1D1 50,000 FT
Overpressure 4.6.3 A1D1 -15,000 FT
Shock 7.0 B Equipment Tested per DO-160C
Vibration 8.0 B, M & N
Explosion 9.0 X
Waterproofness 10.0 X
Fluid Susceptibility 11.0 X
Sand and dust 12.0 X
Fungus Resistance 13.0 X
Salt Spray 14.0 X
Power Input 16.0 Z
Susceptibility
Emission of Radio Frequency 21.0 Z
Lightning Induced Transient 22.0 A3E3
Susceptibility
Lightning Direct Effects 23.0 X
Icing 24.0 X
Page 120
34-60-67 8 July 2014
PART NO.: 1018-XX-XX3 (with Mod 9)
DO-178B: Level C
Tucson, AZ. 85756-5097
DO-160D
Section
Ground Survival and Operating 4.5.1 D1 -20°C
Low Temperature
Ground Survival and Short-time 4.5.2 D1 +85°C /+70°C
High Operating Temperature
Operating High Temperature 4.5.3 D1 +55°C
In-flight Loss of Cooling 4.5.4 X No external cooling required
Altitude 4.6.1 D1 +50,000 FT
Decompression 4.6.2 A1D1 +50,000 FT
Overpressure 4.6.3 A1D1 -15,000 FT
Temperature Variation 5.0 B >5°C per minute
Shock 7.0 B
Vibration 8.0 S Standard Vibration for fixed wing, profiles B and M
Explosion 9.0 X
Salt Spray 14.0 X
Power Input 16.0 Z
Susceptibility
Radio Frequency Susceptibility 20.0 R, RR
Susceptibility
Icing 24.0 X
ESD 25.0 A
Page 121
34-60-67 8 July 2014
PART NO.: 1018-X-XX3 (with Mod 11)
DO-178B: Level C
Tucson, AZ 85756-5097
DO-160E
Section
Ground Survival Low 4.5.1 A1D1 -55°C Survival, -40°C Short Time
Temperature/Short-Time
Operating Low Temperature
Operating Low Temperature 4.5.2 D1 -20°C
Ground Survival High 4.5.3 A1D1 +85°C Survival, +70°C Short Time
Temperature/Short-Time
Operating High Temperature
Operating High Temperature 4.5.4 A1D1 +70°C
Altitude 4.6.1 D1 70,000 FT
Humidity 6.0 A Standard Humidity
Shock 7.0 B Equipment in Fixed Wing and Helicopters tested
for operational Shock
Vibration 8.0 S (M) Standard vibration category S with profile M for
fixed wing aircraft.
U2 Robust vibration for helicopters per DO-160F
Explosion 9.0 X
Salt Spray 14.0 X
Magnetic Effect 15.0 X
Power Input 16.0 Z
Voltage Spike 17.0 X
Audio Frequency Conducted 18.0 X
Susceptibility
Induced Signal Susceptibility 19.0 X
Lightning Induced Transient 22.0 X
Susceptibility
Icing 24.0 X
ESD 25.0 X
Fire, Flammability 26.0 X
Page 122
34-60-67 8 July 2014
NOMENCLATURE: LPV Monitor
PART NO.: 3116-52-1110
TSO NUMBER: TSO-C115c & TSO-C146c
DO178B: Level B
Tucson, AZ 85756-5097
DO-160E
Conditions Section Category Description of Conducted Tests
Ground Survival Low Temperature 4.5.1 E1 -55°C
Short Time Operating Low Temperature
Operating Low Temperature 4.5.2 E1 -20°C
Ground Survival High Temperature 4.5.3 A2 +85°C /+70°C
Short Time Operating High Temperature
Operating High Temperature 4.5.4 A2 +70°C
In-Flight Loss of Cooling 4.5.5 A2 +40°C with cooling removed for 90
minutes
Altitude 4.6.1 E1 +70,000 feet
Decompression 4.6.2 E1 +70,000 feet
Overpressure 4.6.3 A2E1 -15,000 feet
Humidity 6.0 A
Vibration 8.0 SM
SB
Explosion Proofness 9.0 H
Waterproofness 10.0 W
Magnetic Effect 15.0 Z Less than 0.3m to cause deflection of 1
degree
Power Input 16.0 Z
Susceptibility
Induced Signal Susceptibility 19.0 ZC
Lightning Induced Transient 22.0 A3
Susceptibility J33
Fire, Flammabilty 26.0 X Not Required
Page 123
34-60-67 8 July 2014
NOMENCLATURE: Data Transfer Unit DTU-100
PART NO.: 1406-( )
TSO NUMBER: TSO-C109 and ETSO-C109
DO-178B: Level D
Tucson, AZ 85756-5097
DO-160D
Section
Low Temperature 4.5.1 C4 0°C
High Temperature 4.5.3 C4 +70°C
Altitude 4.6.1 C4 +35,000 ft.
Decompression 4.6.2 C4 +35,000 ft.
Overpressure 4.6.3
Humidity 6.0 A
Shock 7.0 E
Vibration 8.0 SM
SB
Explosion 9.0 E2
Salt Spray 14.0 X
Power Input 16.0 Z
Susceptibility
Radio Frequency Susceptibility 20.0 V
Lightning Induced Transient 22.0 XXE3
Susceptibility
Icing 24.0 X
ESD 25.0 A
Page 124
34-60-67 8 July 2014
NOMENCLATURE: Solid State Data Transfer Unit
PART NO.: 1408-( )
TSO NUMBER: TSO-C109 and ETSO-C109
DO178B: Level D
Tucson, AZ. 85756-5097
DO-160E
Section
Ground Survival Low Temperature 4.5.1 C4 -55° C Survival Low Temperature
Operating Low Temperature -20° C Operating Low Temperature
Ground Survival High Temperature 4.5.3 C4 +85° C Survival High Temperature
Short Term High Operating Temperature +70° C Operating High Temperature
In-Flight Loss of Cooling 4.5.4 X Not Required
Altitude 4.6.1 C4 +35,000 feet
Decompression 4.6.2 C4 +35,000 feet
Overpressure 4.6.3 - -15,000 feet
Humidity 6.0 A Standard humidity environment
Vibration 8.0 SM, SB Standard vibration test
Explosion Proofness 9.0 H Hot spot non-spark producing surfaces
Waterproofness 10.0 X Not Required
Magnetic Effect 15.0 Z Deflection distance is less than 0.3 m
Power Input 16.0 Z DO-160E allows Z in place of B
Voltage Spike 17.0 A High degree of protection required.
Audio Frequency Conducted 18.0 Z DO-160E allows Z in place of B
Susceptibility
Induced Signal Susceptibility 19.0 ZC Interference-free operation is required
primary power is a constant freq. or DC
Radio Frequency Susceptibility 20.0 R Installed in normal HIRF environment
Lightning Induced Transient 22.0 E3
Susceptibility
Electric Discharge 25.0 A Air discharge applied to normally
accessible surfaces
Fire, Flammability 26.0 X Not required
Page 125
34-60-67 8 July 2014
NOMENCLATURE: GPS Antenna
PART NO.: 10708
TSO NUMBER: TSO-C190
Tucson, AZ. 85756-5097
DO-160E
Section
Temperature & Altitude 4.0 F2
Temperature Variation 5.0 A
Humidity 6.0 B
Shock 7.0 BD
Vibration 8.0 S(C,L,M,Y
)U (FF1)
Explosion 9.0 X
Waterproofness 10.0 SY
Fluid Susceptibility 11.0 F
Sand and dust 12.0 S
Salt Spray 14.0 S
Power Input 16.0 X
Susceptibility
Induced Signal Susceptibility 19.0 ZCZW
Radio Frequency Susceptibility 20.0 Y
Emission of Radio Frequency 21.0 H
Susceptibility J44
Lightning Direct Effects 23.0 2A
Icing 24.0 C
ESD 25.0 A
Fire, Flammability 26.0 C
Page 126
34-60-67 8 July 2014
NOMENCLATURE: WAAS/Sirius Dual Element Antenna
PART NO.: 10709
Tucson, AZ. 85756-5097
DO-160E
Section
Temperature and Altitude 4.0 F2
Humidity 6.0 B
Shock 7.0 BD
Vibration 8.0 S(C,L,M,Y
) U (FF1)
Explosion Proofness 9.0 X
Sand and Dust 12.0 S
Salt Spray 14.0 S
Power Input 16.0 X
Susceptibility
Susceptibility J44
Icing 24.0 C
Fire, Flammabilty 26.0 C
Page 127
34-60-67 8 July 2014
NOMENCLATURE: GPS/XM Dual Element Antenna
PART NO.: 10710
Tucson, AZ. 85756-5097
DO-160E
Section
Temperature and Altitude 4.0 F2
Humidity 6.0 B
Shock 7.0 BD
Vibration 8.0 S(C,L,M,Y)
U (FF1)
Explosion Proofness 9.0 X
Sand and Dust 12.0 S
Salt Spray 14.0 S
Power Input 16.0 X
Susceptibility
Susceptibility J44
Icing 24.0 C
Fire, flammability 26.0 C
Page 128
34-60-67 8 July 2014
6. Sample Airplane Flight Manual Supplement [1001.X/1101.X]
Prepare an Airplane Flight Manual Supplement using the following sample as a guide.
NOTE: Comments in angle brackets, < >, and italics are explanatory only and should not
appear in the final supplement.
<Name of Applicant>>
<Address of Applicant>
Supplement No.
FAA Approved
Airplane Flight Manual Supplement
To the
Beechcraft King Air F90
Pilot’s Operating Handbook and
Airplane Flight Manual
for Installation of Dual Universal Avionics
UNS-1( )w Flight Management Systems
with Software SCN 1001/1101/1101M
This Supplement must be attached to the FAA Approved Pilot’s Operating Handbook and Airplane Flight
Manual when the aircraft is modified by the installation of Dual Universal Flight Management Systems with
GPS/SBAS Augmentation in accordance with
STC
The information contained herein supplements or supersedes the information of the Pilot’s Operating
Handbook and FAA Approved Airplane Flight Manual only in those areas listed herein. For limitations,
procedures and performance information not contained in this supplement, consult the basic Pilot’s Operating
Handbook and FAA Approved Airplane Flight Manual
Approved By: ___________________

<Name>, <Title>
FEDERAL AVIATION ADMINISTRATION
<Name of Aircraft Certification Office>
<Address>
FAA Approved Date:
Page 129
34-60-67 1 August 2014
LOG OF REVISIONS
REV PAGES DATE DESCRIPTION FAA APPROVED
00 Title Initial revision
ii
_____________________
ii
Date: xx-xxx-2014
1
Page 130
34-60-67 1 August 2014
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Section Page
LOG OF REVISIONS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION I – GENERAL
SECTION II – LIMITATIONS
SECTION III - EMERGENCY PROCEDURES
SECTION IIIA - ABNORMAL PROCEDURES
SECTION IV - NORMAL PROCEDURES
SECTION V - PERFORMANCE DATA
SECTION VI – WEIGHT & BALANCE
SECTION VII - SYSTEMS
APPENDIX – NAVIGATION OPERATIONAL CAPABILITIES
Page 131
34-60-67 1 August 2014
SECTION I – GENERAL
1. INSTALLATION DESCRIPTION.
The Universal Avionics Systems Corporation dual FMS uses inputs from their integral
GPS/SBAS Receivers, VHF Navigation Receivers and DME Transceivers to provide a
blended position for primary navigation. Each FMS contains an internal TSO-C146c
GPS/SBAS sensor, which cross-communicates to the other FMS such that both systems have
SBAS1 and SBAS2 data as inputs. A Solid State Data Transfer Unit (SSDTU) is used to load
periodic navigation database updates via USB memory devices.
The FMS contain software SCN 1001/1101 which provides capability for point-to-point
navigation, as well as SIDs, STARs, holding patterns and instrument approaches. These
SCNs comply with requirements of TSO-C146c Class Gamma 3 and TSO-C115c. Lateral
and Vertical guidance is provided for en route, terminal area and approach operations,
including “GPS”, “or GPS”, and “RNAV” approaches. Approaches may be autopilot-coupled
both laterally and vertically. Multi-Mission search patterns are available with SCN 1101.
2. LATERAL NAVIGATION APPROVALS.
The Universal Avionics Systems Corporation FMSs have been installed in accordance with
AC 20-138D. Provided the FMS multi-sensor navigation system is receiving usable signals,
it has been demonstrated capable of and has been shown to meet the accuracy requirements
of:
a. This installation complies with AC 20-138D for navigation using GPS and SBAS
(within the coverage of a Space-Based Augmentation System complying with ICAO
Annex 10) for en route, terminal area, non-precision approach operations (including
“GPS”, “or GPS”, and “RNAV” approaches), approach procedures with vertical
guidance (including RNP APCH to LNAV minima, “LNAV/VNAV” and “LPV”).
Navigation information is referenced to the WGS-84 reference system, and should
only be used for approach where the Aeronautical Information Publication (including
electronic data and aeronautical charts) conform to WGS-84 or equivalent.
b. This installation meets the with equipage and accuracy requirements ofA20-138D and
Paragraph 10-2 and FAA Order 8400.12C paragraph 13.b.(3),Required Navigation
Performance 10 (RNP10).
The UNS-1( )w GPS equipment as installed has been found to comply with the
requirements for GPS Class II oceanic and remote navigation without reliance on
other long-range navigation systems when used in conjunction with the Universal
Avionics UFP prediction program. This does not constitute an operational approval.
c. This installation complies with equipage and accuracy requirements of AC 90-96A
Appendix 1 paragraph 1,d,(3),(a) for B-RNAV in designated B-RNAV airspace, and
Appendix 2 paragraph 2,a,(3),(a) for P-RNAV in designated P-RNAV airspace. This
does not constitute an operational approval.
Page 132
34-60-67 1 August 2014
The table details time limitations placed on RNP-10 and B-RNAV operations with minimum
sensors in NAV mode.
Sensors available RNP-10 Limitations RNP-5 (B-RNAV) Limitations
(Minimum dual FMSs required) (Minimum single FMS required)
GPS/SBAS only NA No time limitation when used in
conjunction with FDE program.
VOR/DME only NA No time limitation
DME/DME only NA No time limitation
d. This installation complies with equipage and accuracy requirements of AC 90-100A

Paragraph 7,c,(4) for operations on U.S. Area Navigation (RNAV) routes (Q-routes
and T-routes), Departure Procedures (Obstacle Departure Procedures and Standard
Instrument Departures), and Standard Terminal Arrivals (STARs). This does not
constitute an operational approval.
e. This installation complies with equipage and accuracy requirements of FAA Order
8900.1 Volume 4, Chapter 1, Section 2, paragraph 4-32D, Required Navigation
Performance RNP-2, RNP-1 and RNP-0.3 when in en route mode, terminal mode, or
non-precision approach modes respectively and the installed equipment provides
annunciation to the pilot of the mode that is in use. This does not constitute an
operational approval.
f. This installation complies with the requirements of AC 20-138D and AC 90-105
Appendix 1, Qualification criteria for RNP Approach Operations, with the exception
of paragraph 3.f Path definitions. This installation does not support fixed radius turns.
g. In accordance with FAA AC 20-138D, Appendix A3, this installation supports the
following Advanced RNP functions: RF legs, Parallel offsets, Scalable RNP, and
RNAV holding. Fixed Radius Transitions (FRT) and Time Of Arrival Control
(TOAC) are not supported. Procedures with RF legs must be flown with the autoflight
guidance coupled.
h This installation meets the requirements of AC 20-138D paragraph 10-3 and FAA
Order 8400.33 paragraph 8 for equipage requirement for RNP-4. This does not
constitute operational approval.
3. VERTICAL NAVIGATION APPROVAL
a. This installation meets the requirements for VFR/IFR en route, terminal area and
approach barometric VNAV operations in accordance with the criteria of AC 20-129
for use of DA in lieu of MDA in accordance with 14 CFR §91.175 and 91.205
b. This installation meets the requirements of AC 90-105 Appendix 5, Advanced
Features, with the exception of 2.a.(1) Path Definition. The system does not support
fixed radius turns (FRT legs).
Page 133
34-60-67 1 August 2014
SECTION II – LIMITATIONS
1. The FMS Operator’s Manual, Report Nos. 2423sv1001/1101 and FMS Quick Reference
Guide, P/N 2411sv1001/1101 must be available to the flight crew whenever navigation is
predicated upon the use of the Universal Avionics Flight Management System.
2. Both FMSs must be powered on and operational to fly RNAV (GPS) approaches with LPV
minima. Additionally the FMS must be configured for synchronized operations in accordance
with AC-20-138D 14-4.a
3. The pilot shall, while flying an RNAV (GPS) approach with LPV minima, verify that “LPV”
is properly annunciated and that navigation data is valid. This check shall take place inside
the final approach fix and in no case later than 1000 feet above the runway threshold.
4. The system must utilize software version SCN 1001.X/1101.X, where X represents FAA
approved minor changes.
5. IFR, enroute and terminal navigation are prohibited unless the pilot verifies the currency of
the database or verifies each selected Waypoint for accuracy by reference to current approved
data.
6. Instrument approaches must be accomplished in accordance with approved instrument
approach procedures that are retrieved from the FMS database.
a. Instrument approaches must be conducted in the Approach mode, and GPS Integrity
monitoring (when using GPS/SBAS including “GPS”, “or GPS”, and “RNAV”
approaches) must be available at the Final Approach Fix, as indicated to the pilot by
the ‘INTEG’ amber Annunciator being off.
b. GPS/SBAS can only be used for approach guidance when navigation information is
referenced to the WGS-84 reference system, and should only be used where the
Aeronautical Information Publication (including electronic data and aeronautical
charts) conform to WGS-84 or equivalent.
c. GPS/SBAS sensors must be retained for all GPS approaches and any approach with a
“G” suffix to the approach identifier on the approach arrival page. GPS will be
deselected for any pilot-defined “VOR” or “VOR/DME” RNAV approaches.
d. Pilot-defined IFR approaches must be defined using waypoints from the FMS
navigation database.
e. SCN 1001/1101 does not support LP approach types, and are not present in the
navigation database.
f. The FMS is approved for pilot-defined VFR approaches as a VFR pilot aid only.
g. The TSO-C146c FMS has an alternate airport flight planning limitation. Refer to
sections 1-1-19, 1-1-20, 1-2-3 and 5-4-5 in the Aeronautical Information Manual for
specific operational guidance.
7. Displayed FMS navigation parameters are referenced to Magnetic North, and operation of the
aircraft is limited to latitudes between N73o and S60o, unless magnetic variation is manually
entered by the flight crew.
Page 134
34-60-67 1 August 2014
8. Advisory vertical guidance deviation information is only an aid to help pilots comply with
altitude restrictions. When using advisory vertical guidance, the pilot must use the primary
barometric altimeter to ensure compliance with all altitude restrictions, particularly during
instrument approach operations including step-down fixes. (See paragraph 4 under
NORMAL PROCEDURES)
9. This installation includes Universal Avionics FlexPerf performance software. Aircraft
FlexPerf ™ supplement, FlexPerf-F90-1 must be available to the flight crew whenever the
function is used. FlexPerf™ performance data is limited to advisory use only and does not
replace preflight fuel planning or substitute for the aircraft’s certified fuel gaging systems.
10. This installation includes Universal Avionics Airdrop software (SCN 1101.XM)
functionality, which is restricted (ITAR) to authorized military operators only. Report No.
2423AirdropM, “FMS Operator’s Manual Airdrop Supplement SCN 1101M or Later” must
be available to the flight crew whenever the function is used.
11. This installation requires the use of a current DO-200A Navigation Database available from
Universal Avionics, which approved by a Type 2 Letter of Authorization (LOA) from the
FAA.
12. The FMS does not support fixed-radius transitions. Procedures containing fixed-radius
transitions will be removed from the navigation database.
Page 135
34-60-67 1 August 2014
SECTION III - EMERGENCY PROCEDURES
NO CHANGE TO AFM
SECTION IIIA - ABNORMAL PROCEDURES
1. If GPS integrity is lost, as indicated by a Message and ‘INTEG’ annunciation, continue
navigating using the GPS equipment or revert to an alternate means of navigation appropriate
to the route and phase of flight, as required by regulation. When continuing to use GPS
navigation, position should be verified every fifteen minutes using another approved
navigation system as may be required by regulation. Note, that the INTEG annunciation can
be illuminated by loss of RAIM as well as other Fault Detection logic within the GPS/SBAS
subsystem.
2. Should an FMS system component fail, in most cases the CDU will go blank or the ‘FMS
MSG’ light will flash. Depressing the MSG key will display the Message Page, which will
indicate the component which has failed.
3. If sensor information is intermittent or lost, utilize remaining operational navigation
equipment as may be required by regulation.
4. Internal failure modes are annunciated to the pilot based on position within an approach.
a. On an LPV approach while still outside the FAF, if either FMS detects a failure that
will not support the required integrity for LPV, the FMS will fail down to the next
highest level of service (i.e. LPV to LNAV/VNAV or LPV to LNAV). This will be
annunciated to the pilot on the PFD as a change to Level of Service (LOS) and on the
CDU. The pilot may choose to continue the approach using the new LOS and should
adjust the DA/DH to the published MDA of the new LOS.
b. On an LPV approach once inside the FAF, if either FMS detects a failure that will not
support the required integrity for LPV, the FMS will;
(1) Flag both lateral and vertical navigation on the PFD. The pilot should select
missed approach, which will return lateral navigation and the ability to fly the
published missed approach procedure, or …
(2) … Flag only the Vertical navigation scale and maintain lateral deviation. The
pilot may select to continue the approach using the new LOS and should
adjust the DA/DH to the published MDA of the new LOS. Note that the flight
director will also be flagged and APPR may be re-selected on the flight
guidance panel to display the flight director command bars. There will be no
vertical guidance provided.
5. The FMS and associated components are protected by the following circuit breakers:
C/B Name Amps Location Bus
FMS No. 1 5 Copilot 28VDC Avionics BAT BUS
FMS No. 2 5 Copilot 28VDC Avionics GEN 1
SSDTU 1 Copilot 28VDC Avionics GEN 1
Page 136
34-60-67 1 August 2014
SECTION IV - NORMAL PROCEDURES
1. OPERATION
Normal operating procedures are outlined in the FMS Operator’s Manual, Report No.
2423sv1001/1101 and FlexPerf-F90-1 Operator’s Manual Supplement.
2. NAVIGATION DATABASE VERIFICATION.
After power-on self-tests have been completed, the INITIALIZATION page will appear. The
field “NAV DATABASE EXPIRES” followed by a date will be displayed. If the actual date
is later than that displayed, the FMS will notify the pilot with a “DATABASE EXPIRED”
message. Refer to the Operator’s Manual for navigation database update instructions.
3. FMS SYNC OPERATION:
This installation is configured for SYNC operation. Reference FMS Operator’s Manual,
Report No. 2423sv1001/1101 for instructions on SYNC operation.
4. ALTITUDE SOURCE FOR GPS/SBAS APPROACH VNAV
If the annunciated Level of Service (LOS) is LPV or LNAV/VNAV, then the FMS will use
GPS altitude for approach vertical guidance. If the annunciated Level of Service (LOS) is
LNAV or there is NO LOS annunciated, the FMS will use barometric altitude for approach
vertical guidance.
5. SYSTEM ANNUNCIATORS
Each FMS outputs the following annunciations to an Electronic Flight Instrument System
(EFIS) displays in the cockpit.
FUNCTION Color Annunciation
Message Amber MSG1 or 2 ***
GPS/SBAS Integrity Amber INTEG ***
Position Uncertain Amber POS ***
FMS Guidance Coupled Magenta * FMS **
FMS Heading Mode Magenta FMS HDG **/***
Selected Cross Track Magenta FMS SXTK **
SXTK ***
Waypoint Sequencing Flashing Wpt Name **,***
FMS Approach Mode Magenta * FMS APPR APPR **
***
VNAV Approach Magenta * PGS **
Go Around (Missed approach) Magenta GA **
Level of Service Green LPV LNV/VNV LNAV **
* White when Armed ** Displayed on PFD *** Displayed on ND
GPS/SBAS INTEG will illuminate when integrity cannot be 2.0 nm en route
maintained for the following phases of flight: 1.0 nm terminal area
0.3 nm approach
Page 137
34-60-67 1 August 2014
6. Universal Avionics EFI-890R display of FMS information
a. FMS information is displayed on the Universal Electronic Flight Instrument (EFI)
displays. The associated EFI Control Panel provides control of each display. See the
appropriate Operator’s Manual, as applicable, for each EFI display system.
b. Lateral full-scale display deviation meets the requirements of TSO-C146c (2.0 nm
full scale for en route, 1.0 nm for terminal and 0.3 nm for Approach).
7. En Route and Terminal Area Flight Control System Operation
a. With ‘FMS’ mode selected by using the EFI Control Panel, the respective FMS
information can be presented as Flight Director steering commands by pressing the
[NAV] button of the SPZ-200A flight director mode selector panel
b. With reasonable navigation data being displayed, the steering information can be
Autopilot-coupled, to the pilot’s or copilot’s Flight Director system, by pressing the
‘AP ENGAGE’ button on the SPZ-200A Autopilot Controller.
8. Approach Operations
NOTE: ILS approaches can be retrieved from the database and linked to the flight plan, but
cannot be armed or activated as FMS approaches. The FMS can be used to provide
navigation up to the final approach fix (FAF), at which point the EFI navigation
source must be changed to display ILS data, which can be coupled to the Flight
Control System (FCS). FMS can again be selected as the NAV source for the
missed approach guidance after missed approach / Go Around has been selected.
NOTE: GPS/SBAS sensors will be retained for all GPS approaches and any approach with
a “G” suffix to the approach identifier on the approach arrival page. GPS will be
deselected for any pilot-defined “VOR” or “VOR/DME” RNAV approaches. Refer
to the FMS Operator’s Manual Approach Procedures.
a. All FMS supported approach types may be linked into the flight plan and then
laterally and vertically coupled to the FCS as follows:
b. Approach Transition: When an entire approach transition (e.g., procedure turn, DME
arc, etc.) is to be flown follow these recommended procedures. With the desired
DIRECT TO, FROM/TO leg or desired FMS Heading selected, press FCS [NAV]
button of the flight director mode selector panel. When the FMS has automatically
activated the approach, denoted by the approach Annunciator displayed on the
associated EFI display, press the [APPR] button of the Flight Control Panel, once
established inbound on the final approach course. When the FCS has captured the
lateral approach mode, the vertical deviation scale will activate on the EFI display,
with the appropriate vertical annunciation for the armed condition. Once vertical
mode is captured, the display will change annunciation as appropriate. Continue
monitoring both lateral and vertical deviations throughout the duration of the
approach. If required, initiate ‘Missed Approach Procedures’ as described in the FMS
Operator’s Manual.
Page 138
34-60-67 1 August 2014
NOTE: If dissimilar LOSs are annunciated, the approach may be continued to the
published minimum using the best LOS available if the LOS flight
guidance used is displayed on the flying pilot’s PFD. If the approach is
coupled, the same FMS providing flight guidance to the PFD for the pilot
flying must be used for the autopilot.
NOTE: Step-down fixes on an LPV approach have no effect on the approach
vertical path, but are presented on the map display, and should be ignored
by the flight crew. Bearing and Distance to Waypoint displayed on PFD are
always to the next waypoint, including step-down fixes on LPV
approaches. Distance to the approach LTP/FTP are displayed on the FMS
CDU, NAV page 4/4.
CAUTION: UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES SHOULD THE APPROACH
BE CONTINUED TO LPV MINIMA WITHOUT LPV BEING
ANNUNCIATED ON THE CONTROLLING SIDE.
9. Vectors to Final:
If given vectors by ATC to join the final approach course, manually activate the approach on
FMS NAV page 1/3. The FMS will enter the commanded heading mode, the EFI displays
will now display final approach course data. The INTERCEPT prompt will be presented on
the CDU when the aircraft heading is within 80 degrees of the final approach course, on
NAV page 1/3. When cleared to join the final approach course, press the “INTERCEPT” line
select key to intercept the final approach course. Ensure that commanded heading mode on
the CDU is canceled. Select [APPR] on the FCS Flight Control Panel, once established
inbound, to track the final approach course. See approach operation above for vertical
coupling.
10. Missed Approach
Pressing the FCS Go Around (GA) switch (on the LH power lever) will sequence the FMS to
the ‘Missed Approach’ legs after sequencing the MAWP. Reselect [NAV] mode using the
appropriate FCS Flight Control Panel by 500 feet AGL.
NOTE: Guidance is provided to the runway threshold or missed approach point. It is the
pilot’s responsibility to level out at MDA or to commence the missed approach
procedure at the DA/DH, if the runway environment is not in sight.
11. Advanced Approach Operations
Advanced approaches may be identified by the prefix “A” to the approach identifier on the
approach arrival page, or in the navigation database. These approach types are characterized
by course changes within the final approach segment of greater than 6 degrees and/or having
multiple flight path angles. To avoid excessive deviations from course, these approaches may
need to be flown in FCS [NAV] mode until on the final leg of the approach. Select FCS
[APPR] after sequencing the final waypoint to engage vertical flight guidance.
12. Vertical Navigation
Vertical Navigation (VNAV) information is displayed on the EFI display and is available for
enroute, terminal or approach descents. Pitch steering commands for enroute and terminal
VNAV operations are not provided to the Flight Control System.
Page 139
34-60-67 1 August 2014
13. Autopilot Operations
Caution should be exercised when using the autopilot “SOFT RIDE” mode during RNP
procedures. The flight crew should monitor ANP vs. RNP to ensure that flight path
containment is maintained.
14. Aircraft Systems Using FMS / GPS Position, Velocity, and/or Time
The flight crew should be aware that downstream aircraft systems that use GPS Position,
Velocity, and/or Time from the FMS will be affected by a GPS outage due to external GPS
interference. These system may include, but are not limited to, TAWS (Forward Looking
Terrain Avoidance), Synthetic Vision (Vision-1™), ADS-B, FANS (CPDLC and ADS-C),
Application Server Unit (ASU), and AHRS. During periods of GPS outage, any functions of
these systems that rely on GPS Position, Velocity, and/or Time will be unavailable.
Page 140
34-60-67 1 August 2014
SECTION V - PERFORMANCE DATA
NO CHANGE TO AFM.
SECTION VI – WEIGHT & BALANCE
NO CHANGE TO AFM.
SECTION VII - SYSTEMS
NO CHANGE TO AFM
Page 141
34-60-67 1 August 2014
APPENDIX - NAVIGATION OPERATIONAL CAPABILITIES
The navigation equipment as installed has been found to comply with the requirements established
for the following navigation specifications:
Navigation Operational Required Equipment Reference Guidance
Specification Requirements /
Authorizations
Oceanic and Remote GNSS FDE availability GNSS FDE availability Meets the applicable
Areas of Operation must be verified prior to must be verified prior to requirements of
(Class II Navigation) flight. Maximum flight. Maximum AC20-138D,
predicted FDE predicted FDE AC90-100A,
unavailability is 25 unavailability is 25 AC91-70,
minutes. No time limit minutes. No time limit FAA Order 8400.33.
using GNSS as the using GNSS as the
This does not constitute
primary navigation primary navigation
an operational approval.
sensor. sensor.
North Atlantic (NAT) GNSS FDE availability Two UNS-1( )w FMS Meets the applicable
must be verified prior to installed systems, requirements of
Minimum Navigation
flight. Maximum operating and receiving AC20-138D,
Performance
predicted FDE usable navigation AC91-70,
Specifications (MNPS)
unavailability is 25 information from each of AC91-49
minutes. the dual GNSS sensors
This does not constitute
(or one FMS and one
No time limit using GNSS an operational approval.
GNSS sensor for those
as the primary navigation
routes requiring only one
sensor.
long range
RNAV-10 RNP-10 GNSS FDE availability Two UNS-1( )w FMS Meets the applicable
must be verified prior to installed systems, requirements of
flight. Maximum operating and receiving AC20-138D 
predicted FDE usable navigation FAA Order 8400.12C.
unavailability is 25 information from each of
minutes. the dual GNSS sensors. This does not constitute
an operational approval.
EPU/ANP does not
exceed  RNP.
No time limit using GNSS
as the primary
B-RNAV/RNAV-5 RNP-5 EPU/ANP does not At least UNS-1( )w FMS Meets the applicable
exceed RNP. installed system is requirements of
receiving usable AC20-138D,
navigation information AC90-96A,
from one or more of the AC90-100A,
sensor.
following sensors: EASA AMC 20-4.
1. Multiple DMEs, or
2. GNSS sensor.
Page 142
34-60-67 1 August 2014
Authorizations
RNP-4 Oceanic and GNSS FDE availability Two UNS-1( )w FMS Meets the applicable
Remote Area must be verified prior to installed RNP navigation requirements of
Operations. flight. Maximum systems, operating and AC20-138D, 
predicted FDE receiving usable FAA Order 8400.33.
unavailability is 25 navigation information
minutes. from each of the dual This does not constitute
GNSS sensors. an operational approval.
EPU/ANP does not
exceed RNP.
as the primary
RNAV-2  GNSS is required for At least one UNS-1( )w Meets the applicable
RNAV-1  takeoff in P-RNAV FMS installed system is requirements of
P-RNAV  airspace. receiving usable AC20-138D,
navigation information AC90-105,
RNAV Routes (DPs, GNSS FDE availability
from one or more of the AC90-96A,
STARS, Q and T Routes) must be verified prior to
following sensors: AC90-100A,
RNP-2 flight for DPs that require
JAA TGL 10.
RNP-1 GNSS. 1. Multiple DMEs, or
2. GNSS sensor This does not constitute
EPU/ANP does not
(required for takeoff in P- an operational approval.
exceed RNP .
RNAV airspace and
No time limit using GNSS some DPs).
sensor.
Page 143
34-60-67 1 August 2014
Authorizations
RNP-APCH [titled RNAV All instrument approach At least one UNS-1( )w Meets the applicable
(GPS) or RNAV procedures that are FMS installed system is requirements of,
(GNSS)]  -including retrieved from the receiving usable AC20-138D,
RNP procedures to a navigation system navigation information AC90-105,
minimum value of RNP- database are authorized. from a GNSS sensor EASA AMC 20-27.
0.3 (LNAV minimums). (required for RNAV
GNSS is required to This does not constitute
(GPS) approach
RNP AR-APCH initiate RNAV (GPS) an operational approval.
procedures)
procedures, and approach procedures.
approach procedures For RNAV(GPS)
with RF legs are NOT approach procedures, a
authorized. missed approach is
required if both GNSS
sensors become
unavailable
EPU/ANP does not
exceed RNP (except
during a missed
approach procedure
following loss of GNSS
navigation).
Maximum predicted
RAIM outage is 5
minutes.
For ILS, LOC, LOC-BC,
LOA, and SDF approach
procedures, the active
navigation source must
be LOC or BC (green
needles) prior to crossing
the final approach fix.
Advanced RNP capability The following Advanced At least one UNS-1( )w Meets the applicable
RNP functions are FMS installed system is requirements of,
supported: receiving usable AC 20-138D A3-1.b.(1)
RF legs navigation information for the U.S. definition of
Parallel offsets from a GNSS sensor advanced RNP: RF legs,
RNAV holding (required for RNAV Parallel offsets, and
Scalable RNP (for (GPS) approach Scalable RNP.
terminal procedures only) procedures)
Enroute, Terminal and Use of Vertical Glidepath The selected navigation Meets the applicable
Approach Vertical (GP) guidance to a system is receiving requirements of
Navigation (VNAV) published DA is usable information for a AC20-138D,
approved. baro-VNAV (or SBAS, if AC90-100A,
applicable) solution. AC90-105,
EASA AMC 20-27.
RNP AR-APCH Not Supported
Page 144
34-60-67 1 August 2014
Equipment Specifications
1. Equipment Identification
A. UNS-1Ew FMS Equipment
UNS-1Ew FMS Equipment
Component Name Part Number
NCU – Navigation Computer Unit 3017–XX–XX1 and 3017–XX–XX1M
Configuration Module 30171
5-Inch FPCDU (optional) 1018-X-XXX
4-Inch FPCDU (optional) 1117-XX, 1117-X-XXX
Multifunction Control Display Unit (MCDU) (optional) 1025-01-X11
LPV Monitor 3116-52-1110
DTU-100 – Data Transfer Unit 1406–01–X
1407–01–1 (Portable unit)
SSDTU – Solid State Data Transfer Unit 1408–00–X
1409–00–2 (Portable unit)
GPS/SBAS Antenna 10708
GPS/SBAS with Sirius Dual Element Antenna 10709
GPS/SBAS with XM Dual Element Antenna 10710
Page 201
34-60-67 8 July 2014
B. Compatible Peripheral Equipment
Compatible Peripheral Equipment
Component Name Part Number
Application Server Unit (ASU) 3040-06-0X
LCS Loran-C Sensor 1040
LCS-850 Loran-C Sensor 1045–01
GPS-1000 GPS Sensor 1075–01 (NOTE 1)
GPS-1000A GPS Sensor 1078-01 (NOTE 1)
GPS-1200 GPS Sensor 1080–01 (NOTE 1)
GNSS-2400 GPS/GLONASS Sensor 1078-02 (NOTE 1)
RRS – Radio Reference Sensor 1058–01–1X
RTU – Radio Tuning Unit
Collins CSDB 1055
ARINC RTU 1056–01–1X
Terrain Awareness Warning System (TAWS) 3010-0X-0X
UL-600 UniLink 1065-XX-0X0
UL-601 UniLink 1066-XX-0X0
UL-700 UniLink 1067-XX-XXX
UL-701 UniLink 1068-XX-XXX
UL-800 UniLink 10800-00
UL-801 UniLink 10801-XX
UniVision 3070-0X-0X
Vision-1 3015-00-00
NOTE: 1. The SBAS FMS will only use these TSO C129A approved sensors for supplemental
enroute position only. They cannot be used for approach.
Page 202
34-60-67 8 July 2014
C. Technical Manuals
NOTE: Refer to the following manuals for further information about compatible peripheral
equipment. These manuals are available from Universal Avionics Systems
Corporation.
Technical Manuals
Component Report Number
Application Server Unit (ASU) Report No. 46-20-03
SBAS FMS SCN 1001/1101 Interface Manual Report No. 34-60-71
SBAS FMS SCN 1001/1101 Configuration Report No. 34-61-02
Manual
LCS - Loran–C Antenna Report No. 34-50-13
LCS – Loran-C Sensor Report No. 34-50-13
GPS-1000 GPS Sensor Report No. 34-50-03
GPS-1000A GPS Sensor Report No. 34-50-08
GPS-1200 GPS Sensor Report No. 34-50-04
GNSS-2400 GPS/GLONASS Sensor Report No. 34-50-08
RRS - Radio Reference Sensor Report No. 34-50-10
RTU – Radio Tuning Unit Report No. 23-80-05
Collins CSDB
ARINC RTU
Terrain Awareness and Warning System Report No. 34-40-01
UL-600 UniLink Report No. 23-20-01
UniVision Report No. 23-30-03
Universal Cockpit Display (UCD) Report No.46-20-01
Vision-1 Report No. 34-40-03
Page 203
34-60-67 8 July 2014
D. UNS-1Ew Part Number Matrix
3017 - X X - X X 1 (M)
Basic UNS-1Ew P/N
MMMS = 3
FMS = 4
Gray = 1
Black = 2
Gray, NVG = 5
Black, NVG = 6
Video & Graphics = 2
Reserved for Future Use = 3
Reserved for Future Use = 4
FLEXPERF = 5
ARINC & Analog = 1
Dual ARINC (All Digital) = 2
ASCB-A = 3
Unused Variable = 1
Military Version (MMMS Only) = M
E. Configuration Module
The part number of the Configuration Module is 30171.

F. 5-Inch FPCDU
1018 - X - X X X
Basic Part Number
No Video = 1
Video = 2
Gray = 1
Black = 2
Gray, NVG = 5
Black, NVG = 6
No Graphics = 0
UniLink Graphics Capable = 1
Standard Glass = 0
Hi-Resolution Glass = 3
Page 204
34-60-67 8 July 2014
G. 4-Inch FPCDU (P/N 1117-XX)
1117 - X X
Basic P/N
Aft Position = 5
Forward Position = 6
Gray = 1
Black = 2
H. 4-Inch FPCDU (P/N 1117-X-XXX)
1117 - X - X X X
Basic P/N
No Video = 1
Video = 2
Gray = 1
Black = 2
Gray, NVG = 5
Black, NVG = 6
No Graphics = 0
UniLink Graphics Capable = 1
Aft Position = 5
Forward Position = 6
I. Multifunction Control Display Unit (MCDU)
1018 - 0 1 - X 1 1
Basic P/N
Future Use Variable = 0
Gray = 1
Black = 2
Gray, NVG = 5
Black, NVG = 6
Page 205
34-60-67 8 July 2014
J. Data Transfer Unit (DTU-100)
1406 - 01 - X
Basic Part Number for Cockpit DTU-100
Future Use
Gray Faceplate = 1
Black Faceplate = 2
K. Portable Data Transfer Unit (PDTU-100)

1407 - 01 - 1
Basic Part Number for Portable DTU-100
Future Use
L. Solid State Data Transfer Unit

1408 - 00 - X
Basic Part Number for Cockpit SSDTU
Future Use
Gray Faceplate = 1
Black Faceplate = 2
M. Portable Solid State Data Transfer Unit

1409 - 00 - 2
Basic Part Number for Portable SSDTU
Future Use
Black Faceplate = 2
Page 206
34-60-67 8 July 2014
N. UNS-1Ew Part Number Configuration
(1) Digital and Analog Configuration (P/N 3017–XX–X11)
This configuration has a CPU board, SBAS/ARINC board, SBAS/Analog board,
Analog board and Auxiliary board. The Analog board supplies AC pitch steering
outputs. These options are wired for analog navigational signals.
(2) All Digital Configuration (P/N 3017–XX–X21)
This configuration has a CPU board, SBAS/ARINC board, SBAS/Analog board and
Auxiliary board. This option supports aircraft which do not require analog interfaces
other than annunciators and fuel flow inputs.
(3) ASCB Version A Configuration (P/N 3017-XX-X31)
This configuration has a CPU board, SBAS/ARINC board, SBAS/Analog board,
ASCB board and Auxiliary board. The ASCB board provides the FMS with an
interface to the ASCB Version A data bus that was developed by Honeywell and
supplements ARINC, CSDB and analog interfaces of the FMS. The ASCB board
hardware supports data bus Version A only.
(4) Military Version Configuration (P/N 3017-3X-XX1M)
This configuration has special Airdrop and ARC Search capabilities. This version is
applicable to the Multi-Mission Management System (MMMS) version of the FMS.
Page 207
34-60-67 8 July 2014
2. Power Specifications
Power specifications for the components of the FMS and compatible peripherals are as
follows:
NOTE: Current and power values for the FMS include powering one integrated FPCDU. In
addition, FMS power specifications are based on the particular configuration that
will consume the most power. All other configurations use less.
Component Current (A @ V) Power (W @ V)
Type Part Number 19.0 V 27.5 V 32.0 V 19.0 V 27.5 V 32.0 V
Min Nominal Max Min Nominal Max
FMS 3017-XX-XX1 2.90 2.41 2.38 55.10 66.27 76.16
3017-XX-XX1M
5-Inch FPCDU 1018-X-XXX 0.9 0.6 0.6 17.1 16.5 19.2
4-Inch FPCDU 1117-XX 0.9 0.6 0.6 17.1 16.5 19.2
4-Inch FPCDU 1117-X-XX3 0.9 0.87 0.75 17.1 23.93 24.0
1117-X-XX4
w/o Mod 9
4-Inch FPCDU 1117-X-XX3 1.15 1.50 1.55 21.85 41.25 49.60
1117-X-XX4
with Mod 9
4-Inch FPCDU 1117-X-XX5 0.74 0.51 0.44 14.06 14.03 14.08
1117-X-XX6
LPV Monitor 3116-52-1110 3.21 2.70 2.64 60.99 74.25 84.48
RTU 1055 0.5 0.3 0.3 9.5 8.3 9.6
RTU (ARINC) 1056-01-XX 0.7 0.5 0.4 13.8 13.2 12.8
DTU-100 1406-01-X 0.3 0.3 0.2 5.7 11.0 6.4
Portable 1407-01-1 0.3 0.4 0.2 5.7 11.0 6.4
DTU-100
SSDTU 1408-00-X 0.41 0.3 0.28 7.79 8.4 8.96
Portable 1409-00-2 0.41 0.3 0.28 7.79 8.4 8.96
SSDTU
RRS 1058 1.1 0.8 0.7 20.9 22.0 19.2
LCS 1040 1.1 0.7 0.6 20.9 19.3 19.2
GPS-1000 1075-01 0.33 0.23 0.20 6.27 6.33 6.40
GPS-1200 1080-01 0.4 0.3 0.3 7.6 8.3 9.6
Page 208
34-60-67 8 July 2014
3. Equipment Specifications
The following tables list the physical, environmental and electrical parameters of the Flight
Management System.
A. UNS-1Ew FMS
Characteristics Specifications
Size 5.75” W x 6.38” H x 8.98" D
Weight: 8.1 lbs.
Mounting 1/4 turn Dzus Fasteners
Power Requirements 27.5 VDC, 2.66 A, .73.15 W (Power-up surge)
Keypad Lighting 2.77 A @28 VDC
1.18 A @5 VDC/5 VAC
B. LPV Monitor (P/N 3116–52–1110)

Size 2MCU – 2.24” W x 7.64” H x 15.26" D
Weight: 6.7 lbs.
Mounting 2MCU Rack
Power Requirements (nominal) 27.5 VDC, 2.70 A, 74.25 W
C. 5-Inch FPCDU (P/N 1018-X-XXX)

Size 5.75" W x 6.37" H x 4.177" D
Component Weight 1018-X-XX0 3.8 lbs.
1018-X-XX3 (w/o Mod 9) 4.1 lbs.
1018-X-XX3 (with Mod 9) 3.3 lbs.
Power Requirements Power input from NCU 19.2 W maximum
(Startup may be higher)
Panel Lighting 0.46 A @ 28 V maximum or
1.54 A @ 5 V maximum
Page 209
34-60-67 8 July 2014
D. 4-Inch FPCDU
Size 5.75" W x 4.50" H x 3.25" D
Component Weight 1117-XX 2.6 lbs.
1117-X-XX3 2.9 lbs.
1117-X-XX4 2.9 lbs.
1117-X-X05 2.41 lbs.
1117-X-X06 2.41 lbs.
1117-X-X15 2.47 lbs.
1117-X-X16 2.47 lbs.
Power Requirements Power input from NCU 19.2 W maximum
(Startup may be higher)
Panel Lighting 1117-XX, 1117-X-XX3, 1117-X-XX4 - 0.5 A @
28 V maximum 1.6 A @ 5 V maximum
1117-X-XX5, 1117-X-XX6 - 0.4 A @ 28 V
maximum 2.07 A @ 5 V maximum,
also an internal heater for brightness
stabilization draws approximately 1.0 amp
E. Data Transfer Unit (DTU-100) (P/N 1406-01-X)

Size 5.750" W x 2.124" H x 8.14" D
Component Weight 3.25 lbs. (P/N 1406–01–X)
5.8 lbs. (P/N 1407–01–1) (Portable)
Power Requirements 18 VDC @ 0.22 A
27.5 VDC @ 0.350 A Nominal
Mounting 1/4 Turn DZUS Fasteners
(1406–01–X only)
F. SSDTU (P/N 1408-00-X)

Size 5.750” W x 2.250” H x 7.764" D
Weight 2.4 lbs.
Mounting 1/4 Turn Dzus Fastener
Power Requirements (nominal) 27.5 VDC, 0.3 A, 8.4 W
Page 210
34-60-67 8 July 2014

Manual Affected
Filing Instructions
Insert this Temporary Change in the Equipment Specifications section adjacent Page 210.
Purpose
To update the Power Requirements and Panel Lighting details for the 4-Inch FPCDU.
Instructions
Update the 4-Inch FPCDU table on Page 210:
Power Requirements 1117-XX - 0.6 A @ 28 V
1117-X-XX3, 1117-X-XX4 - 0.87 A @ 28 V
(without Mod 9)
1117-X-XX3, 1117-X-XX4 – 1.50 A @ 28 V
(with Mod 9)
1117-X-XX5, 1117-X-XX6 – 0.51 A @ 28 V
Panel Lighting 1117-XX, 1117-X-XX3, 1117-X-XX4 - 0.5 A @
28 V maximum 1.6 A @ 5 V maximum
1117-X-XX5, 1117-X-XX6 - 0.4 A @ 28 V
maximum 2.07 A @ 5 V maximum,
also an internal heater for brightness
stabilization draws approximately 1.0 amp
Page 1 of 1
34.60.67-3
The information contained herein is subject to the Export Administration
Regulation (“EAR”), 15 C.F.R. Parts 730-774. Diversion contrary to U.S.
law is prohibited. 15 March 2016
G. Portable SSDTU (P/N 1409-00-2)
Unit Size 6” W x 12.5” H x 5.5" D
Weight N/A
Power Requirements 27.5 VDC, 0.3 A, 8.4 W
Cooling N/A
Mounting SSDTU mounted in portable carrying case
Interconnect Wiring Harness P/N 81304072 – PSSDTU J1 to aircraft bulkhead J1
Part Numbers (see NOTE) (New installation and previous Portable DTU-100
Contact Universal Avionics for connection)
more information. P/N 81140811 – PSSDTU J2 to aircraft bulkhead J2
(Previous Portable DTU-100 connection)
P/N 81140821 – PSSDTU J2 to aircraft bulkhead J2
(New installation)
NOTE: When using the Portable SSDTU in new installations or upgrading the Portable
DTU-100 bulkhead connectors to the Portable SSDTU bulkhead connectors, up
to 8 Ethernet ports may be wired and configured.
When bulkhead connectors from a prior Portable DTU-100 installation are used
for the Portable SSDTU, up to 4 Ethernet ports may be available for use and
configuration. Consult aircraft wiring diagrams to verify the number of Ethernet
ports that are wired.
Page 211
34-60-67 8 July 2014
H. GPS/SBAS Antenna (P/N 10708)
Weight 0.5 lbs.
Frequency 1575.42 ±10.23 MHz
VSWR ≤ 1.5:1
Polarization Right Hand Circular
Radiation Pattern Elevation Angle Gain (dBic)
(degrees
0 -5
5 -3.5
10 0
20 2
30 2
30<Elev.<75 2.5
>75 3.0
Impedance 50 Ohms
Gain 30 ±3 dB
Stability Unconditionally stable for any source or load
impedance
Power Handling 1 Watt
Power Requirements 4.5-15 VDC
Power Consumption 60.0 mA (max)
Rejection @ SatCom frequency of 1625 >60 dB
MHz
Icing With 0.050” thick hard ice on radome, a gain
decrease of no greater than 2 dB from no ice
condition when signal viewed at 30 degrees or
greater elevation with respect to horizon.
TSO C190
Page 212
34-60-67 8 July 2014
I. GPS/SBAS Sirius Dual Element Antenna (P/N 10709)
Overall Antenna Specifications
Weight 0.5 lbs.
Altitude 55,000 ft.
Operating Temperature -55ºC to +71ºC
Storage Temperature -55ºC to +85ºC
GPS Connector TNCF
SIRIUS Connector TNCF
WAAS Antenna Specifications
Axial Ratio 3 dB Max at Bore Site
0º -5
5º -3.5
10º 0
20º 2
30º 2
30º< Elev. ≤75º 2.5
>75º 3.0
Gain 30 ±3 dB
Impedance 50 Ohms
VSWR ≤ 1.5:1
Power Consumption 60.0 mA (Max)
Sirius Antenna Specifications
Frequency 2319.5 – 2332.5 MHz
Polarization Left Hand Circular
5º -10
15º -3
5º Increments 30º≤ Elev. ≤60º 0
Bore Site 5
Gain 24.5 ±2 dB
Impedance 50 Ohms
VSWR ≤ 1.5:1
Power Requirements 3.6-5.5 VDC
TSO TSO-C190
Page 213
34-60-67 8 July 2014
J. GPS/SBAS XM Dual Element Antenna (P/N 10710)
Overall Antenna Specifications
Weight 0.5 lbs.
Altitude 55,000 ft.
Operating Temperature -55ºC to +70ºC
Storage Temperature -55ºC to +85ºC
GPS Connector TNCF
XM Connector TNCF
GPS Antenna Specifications
0º -5
5º -3.5
10º 0
20º +2
30º +2
30º< Elev. ≤75º +2.5
>75º +3.0
Gain 30 ±3 dB
Impedance 50 Ohms
VSWR ≤ 1.5:1
Rejection at SatCom Freq 1625 MHz 50 dB
XM Weather and Radio Antenna Specifications
Frequency 2332.5 – 2345 MHz
Polarization Left Hand Circular
20º 0.0
25º +0.5
5º Increments 30º≤ Elev. ≤60º +2.0
Bore Site -2.35
Gain 24 ±2 dB
Impedance 50 Ohms
VSWR ≤ 1.5:1
Band Rejection 25 dB @ F±230
Power Requirements 3.6-5.5 VDC
TSO TSO-C190
Page 214
34-60-67 8 July 2014
K. FMS Annunciators
NOTE: Annunciators are not available from Universal Avionics System Corporation.
NOTE: When installing an SBAS FMS that is not intended to be LPV capable, an
LNAV/VNAV and LNAV annunciator must be installed. This is required to alert
the pilot whether SBAS or baro-corrected altitude is being used for vertical
component of the approach. If vertical is not coupled or displayed these
annunciators are not required
The following is a suggested list of manufacturers, part numbers and descriptions of
annunciators used in a typical SBAS FMS installation.
Aerospace Optics Eaton Corporation
3201 Sandy Lane Aerospace Controls Division
Fort Worth, TX 76112 1640 Monrovia Ave.
(888) VIVISUN Costa Mesa , CA 92627
(888) 848 4786 (800) 300-9320
(949) 642-2427
Annunciator Color Company Part Number
Aerospace LED-40-18-DA-39224 (4G3 FMS1 LOS; 5G3 LPV; 6G3 LNAV; 7G3
FMS1 LPV
LOS Green Green Optics VNAV)
LNAV VNAV Green Green Eaton 582-20A0B0C3F84L520N15(G,G,G,G),P37,109
(FMS1,LOS/LPV/LNAV/VNAV)
Aerospace LED-40-18-DA-39225 (4G3 FMS2 LOS; 5G3 LPV; 6G3 LNAV; 7G3
FMS2 LPV
Aerospace LED-40-18-DA-40262 (4G3 FMS LOS; 5G3 LPV; 6G3 LNAV; 7G3
FMS LPV
FMS,LOS/LPV/LNAV/VNAV
Aerospace LED-40-18-DA-40263 (4A3 FMS1 LOS; 5G3 LPV; 6G3 LNAV; 7G3
FMS1 LPV
LOS White Green Optics VNAV)
LNAV VNAV Green Green Eaton 582-20A0B0C3F84L520N15(D,G,G,G),P37,109
Aerospace LED-40-18-DA-40264 (4A3 FMS2 LOS; 5G3 LPV; 6G3 LNAV; 7G3
FMS2 LPV
Aerospace LED-40-18-DA-40265 (4A3 FMS LOS; 5G3 LPV; 6G3 LNAV; 7G3
FMS LPV
(FMS,LOS/LPV/LNAV/VNAV)
Page 215
34-60-67 8 July 2014

Aerospace LED-40-18-DA-40266 (4T3 FMS1 LOS; 5G3 LPV; 6G3 LNAV; 7G3
FMS1 LPV
LOS Blue Green Optics VNAV)
LNAV VNAV Green Green Eaton 582-20A0B0C3F84L520N15(L,G,G,G),P37,109
Aerospace LED-40-18-DA-40267 (4T3 FMS2 LOS; 5G3 LPV; 6G3 LNAV; 7G3
FMS2 LPV
Aerospace LED-40-18-DA-40268 (4T3 FMS LOS; 5G3 LPV; 6G3 LNAV; 7G3
FMS LPV
NOTE: The following annunciators are applicable for use with Night Vision equipment.
Aerospace LED-40-18-MA-40269 (4J3 FMS1 LOS; 5J3 LPV; 6J3 LNAV; 7J3
FMS1 LPV
LNAV VNAV Green Green Eaton 582-40A0B0C3F4L60N15(F,F,F,F),P37,109
Aerospace LED-40-18-MA-40270 (4J3 FMS2 LOS; 5J3 LPV; 6J3 LNAV; 7J3
FMS2 LPV
Aerospace LED-40-18-MA-40271 (4J3 FMS LOS; 5J3 LPV; 6J3 LNAV; 7J3
FMS LPV
Aerospace LED-40-18-MA-40272 (4Q3 FMS1 LOS; 5J3 LPV; 6J3 LNAV; 7J3
FMS1 LPV
Aerospace LED-40-18-MA-40273 (4Q3 FMS2 LOS; 5J3 LPV; 6J3 LNAV; 7J3
FMS2 LPV
Aerospace LED-40-18-MA-40274 (4Q3 FMS LOS; 5J3 LPV; 6J3 LNAV; 7J3
FMS LPV
Aerospace LED-40-18-MA-40275 (4E3 FMS1 LOS; 5J3 LPV; 6J3 LNAV; 7J3
FMS1 LPV
LNAV VNAV Green Green Eaton N/A (Eaton does not have blue NVG compatible annunciators.)
Page 216
34-60-67 8 July 2014

Aerospace LED-40-18-MA-40276 (4E3 FMS2 LOS; 5J3 LPV; 6J3 LNAV; 7J3
FMS2 LPV
Aerospace LED-40-18-MA-40277 (4E3 FMS LOS; 5J3 LPV; 6J3 LNAV; 7J3
FMS LPV
Page 217
34-60-67 8 July 2014
4. Installation Kits
A. UNS-1Ew FMS Installation Kit P/N K12024
NOTE: Configuration Module, P/N 30171, is not part of the installation kit.
Quantity Part Number Description
1 83002611 J1 Connector, Plug, Circular,
or 61POS (A CLKD)
MS27473T24F61SA
or 61POS (STD CLK)
MS27473T24F61S
or 61POS (D CLKD)
MS27473T24F61SD
3 83001992 Backshell/Strain Relief
or
M85049/49-2S24N
B. UNS-1lFw/1Lw (LPV Monitor) Installation Kit P/N K12075

NOTE: This Installation Kit is applicable to the LPV Monitor.
1 80009000 Tray, 2 MCU
or
93921-1 Barry Controls
1 83303130 ARINC Plug, 2 MCU
or
S612MGLNW2P0004AN Souriau
SB612MGLNW2P0004AN Souriau
4 88600063 Screw, 6-32 x 3/8” Pan Head
or
MS51957-28
2 88600200 (see Note) Screw, 6-32 x 1.25” Pan Head
or
MS51957-35
4 88640094 Nut, #6, Hex, Self-Locking
or
MS21083C06
NOTE: The 1.25” screws (P/N 88600200) included with the kit are not used for the
installation of the LPV Monitor.
Page 218
34-60-67 8 July 2014
C. 4-Inch and 5-Inch FPCDU Installation Kit P/N K12026-4
Quantity Part Number or Equivalent Description
1 83001150 FPCDU connector
or
91-577049-15S (Amphenol) Amphenol
1 83002086 Video connector
or
MS27473T12F8S or Amphenol/Bendix,
MS27473T12A8S or Burndy/Souriau, ITT Cannon, or
MS27473T12B8S Matrix Science
1 83002087 Video connector backshell
or
M85049/49-2-12W or
M85049/49-2-12A or
M85049/49-2-12N
1 83001087-02 UniLink connector
or
MS27473T12F8SC
D. Data Transfer Unit (DTU-100) Installation Kit P/N K12050

1 83001150 Connector J1
or
91-577049-15S Amphenol
JT06RE-14-15S(SR) Amphenol
JT06RT-14-15S(SR) Amphenol
MS27473E14F15S(SR)
1 83002152 Connector, J2, Plug 15P Circular
or Size 14 (C CLKD)
MS27473T14F15SC
1 83001157-02 Strain Relief, Crimp Circular,
or Plug, Size 14, Olive Drab
M85049/49-2-14W
Page 219
34-60-67 8 July 2014
E. Portable Data Transfer Unit (DTU-100) Installation Kit P/N K12050-1
1 83000131 DTU Connector, J1, Receptacle,
or Size 10, 13-SKT, Crimp, Wall
Mount, (STD CLK)
MS27472E10A35S
MS27472E10B35S
MS27472E10F35S
1 83002154 DTU Connector, J2, Receptacle,
or Circular, Size 14, 15P Male Crimp
Type, Panel Mount W/ Flange
MS27472E14B15PC
F. SSDTU Installation Kit P/N K12079-1

1 83000255 Connector J2, Plug,16 Shell
or Circular 55P Crimp (STD CLK)
MS27473T16A35S
MS27473T16B35S
1 83000257 Backshell J2, 16 Straight, Circular
or Connector (Electroless Nickel)
M85049/49-2S16N
1 83001150 Connector J1, Plug,14 Shell 15P
or Circular W/Strain-Relief
91-577049-15S Amphenol
JT06RE-14-15S(SR) Amphenol
JT06RT-14-15S(SR) Amphenol
MS27473E14F15S(SR)
1 83001157-1 Bushing for J1 Strain Relief, Size
or 14
687-340-14
Glenair Inc.
Page 220
34-60-67 8 July 2014
G Portable SSDTU Installation Kit P/N K12079-2
1 83000131 Connector, Size 10, 13-SKT,
or Crimp, Wall Mount (STD CLK)
MS27472E10A35S Cadmium Finish
MS27472E10B35S Olive Drab Finish
MS27472E10F35S Electroless Nickel Finish
1 83000558 Connector, Circular, Size 16, 55
or POS Crimp, Wall-Mount, (STD
CLK)
MS27472E16A35S Cadmium Finish
MS27472E16B35S Olive Drab Finish
MS27472E16F35S Electroless Nickel Finish
H. GPS Antenna Installation Kit P/N K12021 (Use with UNS-1Ew FMS) (OEM Only)
1 83201018 Plug, BNC, Straight, Crimp
or
031-326 Amphenol
PE4044 Pasternack Enterprise
1 83202010 Plug, BNC, Right Angle, Crimp
or
KC-59-246 King Electronics
M39012/20-0003
1 83217010 Plug, TNC, Angle, Crimp
or
31-2381 Amphenol
I. GPS (WAAS) Antenna Installation Kit K12080 (Use with LPV Monitor)
1 83211018 Connector, RF Coax, Crimp
or
225791-2 Tyco Electronics
1 83217010 Plug, TNC Angle, Crimp
or
31-2381 Amphenol
Page 221
34-60-67 8 July 2014
5. Required Tools
A. Crimping Tools Required
(1) UNS-1Ew J1, J2 and J3 socket contacts: M22520/1-01.
(2) Portable DTU-100 panel-mounted socket contacts: M22520/2-01.
(3) GPS coaxial cable: no special tools required.
B. Pin Insertion/Extraction Tools Required
(1) UNS-1Ew J1, J2 and J3 socket contacts: Red/White, Military P/N M81969/14-10
(Matrix P/N 6500-055-0020).
(2) Portable DTU-100 socket contacts: Gray/White, Military P/N M81969/14-01 (Matrix
P/N 6500-048-0022).
(3) GPS coaxial cable: no special tools required.
6. Wire and Cable Manufacturers
The following is a list of wire and cable manufacturers that can supply, but are not the only
sources of, multi-conductor cables for use during installations.
Wire and Cable Manufacturers
Name and Address Mailing Address Phone and Fax
A.E. Petsche Company, Inc. (817) 461-9473
2112 W. Division
Arlington, TX 76012
Calmont Engineering and (714) 549-0336
Electronics Corporation
420 E. Alton Ave.
Santa Ana, CA 92707
Electronic Cable Specialists P.O. Box 37497 (414) 421-5300
5300 W. Franklin Dr. Milwaukee, WI 53237-0497 Fax: (414) 421-5301
Franklin, WI 53132-8642
PIC Wire and Cable Supply, Inc. P.O. Box 330 (414) 246-0500
N63 W22619 Main St. Sussex, WI 53089-0330 (800) 742-3191
Sussex, WI 53089 Fax (414) 246-0450
Page 222
34-60-67 8 July 2014
A.
7.
TOP VIEW
4.45
APPROX
4.45
APPROX
2.63
APPROX
2.489
4.978
Equipment Drawings

2.87
APPROX 8.979

0.561
UNIVERSAL
3.25 1.961
APPROX J3
Z
Y b A a
X t u v c B
W
GG HH C
6.370 V
s FF
NN JJ w
d D
r EE PP
e
U KK x E
q DD f
y g F
T p MM LL
S CC zh G
R
n BB AA
6.246 i H
Pm k l J
N M L K
5.236
DATA NAV VNAV DTO LIST PRE
V 1 2 3
2.250
FUEL FPL PERF TUNE MENU NEXT
UNS-1Ew (P/N 3017-XX-XX1 and 3017-XX-XX1M)
4 5 6 J1
J2
Z Z
Y b A Y b A
A B C D E F G 7 8 9 X t u v
a
B X t u
a
v B
GG HH c C GG HH c C
W W
s FF JJ w d D s FF JJ w d D
V NN V NN
BACK MSG r EE PP
e PP
e
KK x E
r EE
KK x E
0 U f U f
H I J K L M N q DD y g F q DD y g F
T p MM LL T p MM LL
S CC zh G S CC zh G
ON/O n BB AA n BB AA
R i H R i H
FF ± Pm k l J Pm k l J
DIM N M L K N M L K
O P Q R S T 1.491
U V W X Y Z ENTER
5.381 0.560 8.714 1.728 2.279
5.745
34-60-67
SIDE VIEW REAR VIEW
FRONT VIEW
NOTES:
1. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES

2. WEIGHT: APPROXIMATELY 8.1 LBS

3. MATING CONNECTOR: SEE INSTALLATION KIT K12024
8 July 2014
Page 223
Viewing Angles for the UNS-1Ew FMS
TOP VIEW
10
45
35
SIDE VIEW
NOTE: WHEN VIEWING TAWS ON THE UNS-1Ew, THE MAXIMUM BOTTOM VIEWING
ANGLE IS 25 DEGREES.
Page 224
34-60-67 8 July 2014
UNS-1Ew Flight Management System Installation Manual
B. Configuration Module (P/N 30171) and Installation
1.60
1.76
0.188 0.375
0.75
0.302
NOTES:
0.369
2. WEIGHT APPROXIMATELY 0.8 OZS
0.56
UNS-1Ew
STRAIN RELIEF
SCREW & WASHER
CONFIGURATION
MODULE
THREADED SIDE
OF WIRE CLAMP
CONNECTOR
Configuration Module Installation Instructions:
The UNS-1Ew configuration module is normally mounted on, and becomes part of the P1 connector strain relief.
The configuration module wires should be inserted into the P1 connector in accordance with the applicable wiring
diagram prior to mounting the configuration module on the strain relief.
It is permissible to mount the configuration module with the wires exiting toward the UNS-1Ew. It is also
permissable to install it on the bottom of the strain relief.
It is permissible, where space is limited, to not use the strain relief and to mount the configuration
module on or near the wire bundle.
Some early configuration modules were a slightly different shape but mounted in exactly the same manner.
Install the Configuration module as follows:
1. Remove and discard the non-threaded half of the connector strain relief wire clamp.
2. Position the configuration module on the strain relief as illustrated above, and using the threaded portion of
the strain relief, secure the wires as normal.
Page 225
34-60-67 8 July 2014
C.
2.170
ABCDEFGHJK
1 5
5
10
UNIVERSAL
15 7.50
1
6.36

5
LPV Monitor (P/N 3016-52-1110)
7.64

10 1.10
15
4 4.10
4 3 2 1
6 8 7 5
10 11 9
13 12 1.37
0.120
12.672
15.23
NOTES:
1. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES.
34-60-67
2. WEIGHT: APPROXIMATELY 6.7 LBS.
UNS-1Ew Flight Management System Installation Manual
3. MATING CONNECTOR: SEE INSTALLATION KIT K12075.
4 REAR CONNECTOR OF LP/LPV MONITOR IS KEYED AT #02 POLARIZATION PER ARINC 600.
5 INTAKE FAN REQUIRES A MINIMUM OF 0.75 INCH CLEARANCE FOR UNRESTRICTED AIRFLOW.
8 July 2014
Page 226
0.18 DIA 4 PLCS D.
0.20 DIA 2 PLCS
14.92
1.50
9.00 2.38
1.77
1.312 12.756
2 PLACES
14.92
0.20 DIA 2 PLCS

2.50
0.69

12.457
LPV Monitor 2MCU Rack (P/N 80009000)
7.28
4
34-60-67
NOTES:
1. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES.

2. WEIGHT: RACK = 11.2 ozs., CONNECTOR = 9.0 ozs.
3. MATING CONNECTOR: SEE INSTALLATION KIT K12075.
4 REAR CONNECTOR OF THE LP/LPV MONITOR IS KEYED TO #02 POLARIZATION PER ARINC 600.
8 July 2014
Page 227
E. 5-Inch FPCDU (P/N 1018-X-XXX)
TOP VIEW
5.000
3.617
FRONT VIEW SIDE VIEW

UNIVERSAL
6.380 6.260
5.250 DATA NAV VNAV DTO LIST PREV
1 2 3
A B C D E F G 7 8 9
H I J K L M N
BACK
0 MSG
O P Q R S T
ON/OFF
DIM ±
U V W X Y Z ENTER
5.365 0.560
3.25
5.750
REAR VIEW
J3
J2
J1
NOTES:

3. MATING CONNECTOR: SEE INSTALLATION KIT K12026-4
Page 228
34-60-67 8 July 2014
Viewing Angles for the 5-Inch FPCDU P/N 1018-X-XX3 (Mod 10)
TOP VIEW
10
45
35
SIDE VIEW
NOTE: WHEN VIEWING TAWS ON THE 5-INCH FPCDU, THE MAXIMUM BOTTOM VIEWING
ANGLE IS 25 DEGREES.
Page 229
34-60-67 8 July 2014
F. 4-Inch FPCDU (P/N 1117-( ))
(1) P/N 1117-XX, 1117-X-XX3 and 1117-X-XX4
0.884
4.985
2.300
J1
BACK VIEW TOP VIEW
5.750 0.585 3.634

5.365 3.250
MSG NAV
DATA DTO
4.500 FUEL FPL
TUNE VNAV 4.370

3.375
PREV LIST
NEXT A B C D E F G 1 2 3 MENU
PWR
DIM H I J K L M N 4 5 6 PERF
O P Q R S T U 7 8 9
0.560 V W X Y Z ENTER BACK 0
NOTES:
Page 230
34-60-67 8 July 2014
(2) P/N 1117-X-XX5 and 1117-X-XX6
4.974
3.787
2.662
0.874
4.974
3.049
4.370
J3
2.300
J1
1.549
J2
TOP VIEW
BACK VIEW
5.750 3.634
0.585
5.365 3.250
MSG NAV
DATA DTO
4.500 FUEL FPL
TUNE VNAV 4.370

3.375
PREV LIST
NEXT A B C D E F G 1 2 3 MENU
PWR
DIM H I J K L M N 4 5 6 PERF
O P Q R S T U 7 8 9
0.560 V W X Y Z ENTER BACK 0
NOTES:
Page 231
34-60-67 8 July 2014
(3) Forward and Aft Mount Top View (P/N 1117-X-XX5 and 1117-X-XX6)
X
MA
P/N 1117-X-XX5 and P/N 1117-X-XX6
G LE
AN
EW
VI
45 deg.
CENTER LINE
SCREEN BOUNDRY
45 deg.
VI
EW
AN
GL
E
FWD AND AFT MOUNT MA
TOP VIEW X
(4) Aft Mount Side View (P/N 1117-X-XX5)

X
MA
E
GL
AN
EW
VI
P/N 1117-X-XX5
35 deg.
SCREEN BOUNDRY
CENTER LINE
10 deg.
VIEW A
NGLE M
AX
AFT MOUNT - SIDE VIEW
Page 232
34-60-67 8 July 2014
(5) Forward Mount Side View (P/N 1117-X-XX6)
P/N 1117-X-XX6
MAX
ANGLE
VIEW
10 deg.
CENTER LINE
SCREEN BOUNDRY
35 deg.
VI
EW
AN
GL
E
MA
X
FWD MOUNT - SIDE VIEW
Page 233
34-60-67 8 July 2014
G. DTU-100 (P/N 1406-01-1X)
UNIVERSAL
5.750
2.250
0.562
7.762
1.88
3.60 0.38
5.00 2.124
DTU CONNECTOR
PIN IDENTIFICATION
NOTES:
1. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES L

A
L
A
K M B K M B
2. WEIGHT: APPROXIMATELY 3.25 LBS J R N C J R N C
P P
H D H D
G F E G F E
J1 J2
Page 234
34-60-67 8 July 2014
H. SSDTU (P/N 1408-00-X)
5.750
2.250
0.604
2.90
6.66
2.50 0.88
0.385
4.99 2.100
5.365
1.495 2.000
NOTES:
1.125 1. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES
Page 235
34-60-67 8 July 2014
I. ERP (P/N 1015-1-XX) (Lear 60 Pro Line 4 installations only)
5.0
4.44
0.562
5.75
RANGE HSI MAP TFC RDR NAV BRG TILT

1.12 1.00
0.562
UNIVERSAL
5.365
NOTES:
Page 236
34-60-67 8 July 2014
J. GPS/SBAS Antenna (P/N 10708)
4X MOUNTING SCREWS
10-32 UNF-2A X 1.00 LONG
CROSS RECESSED
FLATHEAD S.S.
P/N MS23693-C276
0.50
0.75
TNC FEMALE NITRILE O-RING

CONNECTOR 2.375 ID X 0.130 WIDE X .070 DEEP
P/N MS28775-142
4.700 0.75
1.600 3.000
0.800
0.70
CONNECTOR
CLEARANCE 1.040
HOLE: 0.63 DIA.
4X 0.22 THRU 0.385 DIA.
0.610
100 DEGREE
3.300
NOTES:
2. WEIGHT APPROXIMATELY 0.5 LBS
Page 237
34-60-67 8 July 2014
K. GPS/SBAS Sirius Dual Element Antenna (P/N 10709)
4X MOUNTING SCREWS
10-32 UNF-2A X 1.00 LONG
CROSS RECESSED
FLATHEAD S.S.
P/N MS24693-C276
0.65
0.75
BLUE YELLOW
GPS SIRIUS
TNC FEMALE TNC FEMALE
CONNECTOR CONNECTOR
NITRILE O-RING
2.375 ID X 0.130 WIDE X 0.070 DEEP
CONNECTOR P/N MS28775-142
CLEARANCE
HOLE: 0.63 DIA.
4.700 0.88
1.600 3.000
SIRIUS
0.800
GPS
0.70
1.040
4X 0.22 THRU 0.385 DIA.
0.610 0.700
100 DEGREE
3.300
NOTES:
Page 238
34-60-67 8 July 2014
L. GPS/SBAS XM Dual Element Antenna (P/N 10710)
4X MOUNTING SCREWS
10-32 UNF-2A X 1.00 LONG
CROSS RECESSED
FLATHEAD S.S.
P/N MS24693-C276
0.65
0.75
BLUE YELLOW
GPS XM
TNC FEMALE TNC FEMALE
CONNECTOR CONNECTOR
NITRILE O-RING
2.375 ID X 0.130 WIDE X 0.070 DEEP
CONNECTOR P/N MS28775-142
CLEARANCE
HOLE: 0.63 DIA.
4.700 0.88
1.600 3.000
0.800
GPS
XM
0.70
0.70 1.040
4X 0.22 THRU 0.385 DIA.
0.610 0.700
100 DEGREE
3.300
NOTES:
Page 239
34-60-67 8 July 2014
Installation and Wiring

1. General
The basic Flight Management System architecture is shown in the Description and Operation
section for single and dual systems. Non-shielded wires are MIL-W-22759, and shielded
wires are MIL-W-27500 or equivalent.
A. Form – Dimensions and Communications
This FMS is designed to comply with the dimensional standards specified in ARINC
Specification 600, Air Transport Avionics Equipment Interfaces.
Inter-unit communications between navigation sensors/equipment and the FMS, as well as
between the FMS and the flight guidance system are transmitted and received in two-wire
ARINC 429 digital format. The digital ARINC 571 and 575 are also standard formats for
interface with navigation and air data systems. The FMS utilizes an aircraft mounted or
portable Data Transfer Unit (DTU-100 or SSDTU) connected through a 10base-T/100base-T
Ethernet for database loading and downloading from data storage devices (USB memory,
Secure Digital or Zip disk data storage devices).
A representative listing of compatible sensors and systems with which the FMS can
communicate, are in the Digital Inputs, Analog Inputs, Digital Outputs, and Analog Outputs
tables. Information about the formats/types of input and output data required and used for
each of the sensors/systems is also indicated in the table.
The tables are used to determine and select compatible sensors/systems for use with the FMS,
and obtain data format/type information for system interconnection strapping when installing
the sensors/systems.
The FMS is configured to a specific aircraft installation by the use of a configuration module
that is a part of the aircraft P1 connector. At the time of installation, the configuration module
is programmed through keypad inputs to completely define the sensor input ports, fuel flow
types, air data type, EFIS interface etc. A replacement FMS of both the same part number and
SCN can be installed without having to reprogram the FMS because the configuration
module retains the programmed information for the aircraft.
B. Sensor/Equipment Compatibility/Selection
When determining compatibility and selecting sensors, the following information applies:
The FMS is capable of receiving inputs from a variety of short and long-range sensors. The
signal input type from these sensors must be in a digital format to properly interface with the
FMS. The number of sensors the FMS is capable of using is determined by the type of FMS
and the number of available input ports. Some sensor inputs are port specific. This must be a
consideration when multiple sensor inputs are used.
(1) IRS or IRS/GPS Sensors
A maximum of three may be used configured in any order or combination. All IRS or
IRS/GPS sensors are to be of the same type.
Page 301
34-60-67 8 July 2014
(2) GPS Sensors
A maximum of three GPS sensors, including GLS, GNSS, GPS, Internal GPS/SBAS
and Hybrid GPS and IRS sensors may be used. These sensors can be configured in
any order or combination.
The FMS, in conjunction with either an internal GPS/SBAS or an appropriate
external GPS, is certifiable for use as a primary means of navigation in
remote/oceanic airspace using GPS in accordance with the provisions of AC 20-138C
Appendix 1. There are specific FMS hardware and software requirements as well as
GPS/SBAS hardware and software requirements. Additionally, a RAIM prediction
program is required to verify that adequate integrity will exist for the proposed flight.
(3) RRS Sensor
An RRS may be used in place of DME/VOR/TACAN receivers. (The RRS contains
the electronics of a multi–channel DME/TACAN receiver-transmitter with a VOR
receiver. The RRS is tuned remotely by the FMS using the ARINC 429 data bus.)
(4) RRS/RTU
The RRS and RTU can be installed and used in the same aircraft. The RRS provides
radio navigation inputs and the RTU is used for pilot command tuning of radios. In
the event of an RRS failure, the pilot must select CSDB tuning of the DME (if
installed) to allow uninterrupted DME–DME navigation.
The FMS provides optional radio tuning of COM, NAV, ADFs and transponders via
CSDB or ARINC 429, depending on radio manufacture and type. It may also be
dependent on the use of Universal’s Radio Tuning Unit (RTU). If an RTU is used, the
RTU software version must be compatible with the FMS software. Tuning of the
VHF NAV and DME for navigation does not require an external RTU because tuning
is handled by the FMS.
(5) Air Data
Air data must be supplied in ARINC 429 or 575 formats. If an analog air data
computer is installed in the aircraft, an Air Data Converter Unit (ACU) may be an
option. The ACU will convert the analog air data to ARINC 429. If the aircraft has no
TAS source, an air data computer must be installed.
The type of air data input (barometric altitude, pressure altitude or both) provided by
the air data source must be verified. The FMS must be configured to exactly match
these inputs. Both barometric altitude and pressure altitude must be configured if the
advanced performance option is enabled with the FMS.
The accuracy of the air data is also a consideration when the FMS will be certified for
VNAV or 3D coupled approaches. If the accuracy is not sufficient, then only lateral
approach operation will be possible.
Universal requires the use of barometric altitude. Without barometric altitude, SIDs
and STARs with altitude terminators and missed approach procedures cannot be
flown. Also, VNAV operation below 18,000 feet is not possible and the system is
limited to enroute navigation and 2D approaches only. Flight manual supplement
limitations will be required.
Page 302
34-60-67 8 July 2014
(6) ARINC Radio Tune Unit (ARTU)
The ARTU provides interface between the FMS and the Collins 429 radios using the
Collins RTU-870 Radio Tuning Unit. Radios may be tuned via the UASC FMS or the
Collins RTU-870. The UASC FMS and the Collins RTU-870 are interactive and no
external switching is required. If an ARTU is used, the ARTU software version must
be compatible with the FMS software.
(7) Display Interfaces
Instrument display input signal type must be determined (either analog or digital) and
if digital, the format (ARINC 429, 561, 571) must also be determined.
(a) Universal’s Electronic Flight Instrument (EFI) and Multi-Function Display
(MFD)
Universal EFIs (ND/HSI and ADI) and MFD when interfaced with
Universal’s FMS are capable of correctly displaying navigation and flight plan
data. EFI and MFD displays give the operator the capability to select and
display needed information on demand as flight data changes occur.
(b) Electro-mechanical Instruments
Aircraft that incorporate electro-mechanical instruments may not have
autocourse slewing. This requires the flight crew to manually position the
course pointer to display desired track. Bearing pointers may also not be
compatible due to load problems and may require the addition of an amplifier.
(c) EFIS
CAUTION: IF 429 ADV IS PROGRAMMED WITHOUT A
COMPATIBLE EFIS, THE FLIGHT PLAN WILL BE
DRAWN INCORRECTLY. 429 GAMA MUST BE
PROGRAMMED WITH ANALOG INSTRUMENT
INTERFACES OR NON-COMPATIBLE EFIS.
Collins EFIS 85/86 status B-4, B-14, C-4, C-14, E-F, E-14 or Bendix/King
EFIS 40/50 (SG 65 symbol generators) or equivalent can be configured for
interface by selecting 429 ADV. When 429 ADV is selected, the EFIS will be
capable of correctly displaying a flight plan on the map display when the flight
plan contains a gap or procedural leg. The map display will draw the flight
plan line to the last fixed waypoint before the gap or procedural leg and end
there. The flight plan display will start again at the next fixed waypoint after
the gap and be drawn to the following waypoints.
When interfaced to EFIS displays the FMS must be correctly configured for
signal type (429 ADV, 429 GAMA, EDZ 705, 429 DHC, ASCB, etc.).
Display scaling for each EFIS display must be addressed, not all EFIS displays
meet the necessary criteria for approaches. With ARINC 429 EFIS interfaces
where the EFIS is not compliant with TSO C-129 scaling requirements, the
system may be restricted to the use of flight director steering only for terminal
and approach operations. The installer should discuss the issue with the
certification agency before proceeding with the installation. Analog and
ARINC 561 displays usually present no problems.
Page 303
34-60-67 8 July 2014
(8) Universal’s Terrain Awareness Warning System (TAWS)
When interfaced with a Universal FMS, the TAWS system is able to provide terrain
awareness information based on information from the FMS. The information from the
FMS provides TAWS with the ability to determine the aircraft’s state and intent and
provide caution and warning alerts. The FMS is capable of displaying maps and
symbology generated by TAWS. TAWS provides “Flight Plan Look Ahead” terrain
alerts by comparing the FMS flight plan to terrain databases.
(9) Radar
The FMS can be configured to accept input from one or two radar sensors. When two
radar sensors are used, one must be a Doppler radar and the other must be a 429, 571,
or 1500 radar. The FMS supports the following radar systems:
Collins WXR–300 MFD
Sperry Data Nav III
Bendix Radar Nav IU–2023B
Bendix Radar 1500 IU–1507A
Racal Avionics Limited Doppler 91
AN/ASN–137 Doppler
NOTE: For further compatibility information on specific equipment, refer to the
applicable sensor manual.
(10) Annunciators
Standard annunciations provided by the FMS are: FMS HDG (heading), FMS SXTK
(selected crosstrack), MSG (message), WPT (waypoint), DR (dead reckoning) and
FMS APPR (approach). If utilizing GPS for approach or for GPS Primary Means of
Navigation, then GPS INTEG (GPS integrity) will be required. Universal’s FMS
outputs discretes for these annunciations. Annunciator signals are also provided on
the applicable busses for use in EFIS installations when desired. On EFIS systems
which display G/S (glideslope) in lieu of VNAV (vertical deviation) during FMS
approach mode, a PSEUDO ILS annunciator may be required to alert the flight crew
that the vertical display is FMS generated information and not sourced or provided
glideslope information. There may be minor variations to the actual nomenclature
displayed but the FMS modes must be in some way displayed and annunciated.
Level of Service (LOS) discretes are provided by the SBAS subsystem for SBAS
approaches. These non-configurable discretes are LPV, LNAV/VNAV and LNAV
(LOS 1, LOS 2 and LOS 3 respectively). These provide annunciation for the LOS in
installations not interfaced with Universal’s EFI-890R or EFI-550.
It is required that the approach type be annunciated in the pilot's primary field of
view.
For aircraft that have LPV approval, LPV, LNAV/VNAV and LNAV, annunciators
must be installed. Aircraft that do not have LPV approval, LNAV/VNAV and LNAV
annunciators must be installed. This is required to alert the pilot whether SBAS or
baro-corrected altitude is being used for vertical component of the approach. If
vertical is not coupled or displayed these annunciators are not required
Page 304
34-60-67 8 July 2014
(11) Enroute Steering Interfaces
Many existing long-range navigation systems have been interfaced in the past to flight
guidance/autopilot systems via left/right deviation steering only. This was adequate
for those systems capable of only enroute navigation. However, new and advanced
systems require that roll steering be used. By using a roll command interface the FMS
can provide steering for all procedural leg types including heading to altitude, DME
arcs, holding patterns, turn anticipation, procedure turns and other complex
maneuvers.
The FMS outputs roll command steering at 393 mV/deg for enroute and terminal
navigation and roll steering only approaches. Interface with flight director/autopilot
normally uses a designated LRN input to the F/D and A/P equipment or through the
HDG channel with external switching. F/D and A/P coupled operation utilizing L/R
deviation only is not recommended and is not certifiable.
If a designated LRN F/D and A/P input is not available (specifically the J.E.T. FC-
200 F/D and A/P) a Universal Steering Interface Unit (SIU) can be utilized to switch
the roll command steering signal to the F/D and A/P and properly scale the 393
mV/deg. The SIU will also command the necessary logic to annunciate the
appropriate modes of operation.
(12) Approach Functions and Options
Universal FMS systems have been certified in the United States and other countries
for GPS only, GPS overlay, VOR, VOR/DME, TACAN, RNAV and NDB non-
precision approaches using GPS as the navigation sensor. Approaches of these types
contained in the FMS published navigation database include approach transitions and
missed approach segments. The FMS systems use GPS combined with other
navigation sensors and baro-corrected altitude data to provide lateral and vertical
guidance from the Final Approach Fix (FAF) to the runway and then to the missed
approach and missed approach holding waypoints.
At approach initiation, when the approach mode is selected on the Control Display
Unit by the pilot, the GPS will remain selected when the approach definition data
used is contained within the FMS on-board published database as an approved GPS
approach. If the approach from the database is not a published GPS approach then the
sensor will automatically be deselected at approach initiation.
Generally there are several ways of installing Universal’s FMS for approach
operations. It must be decided how the FMS is to be certified concerning approaches;
whether or not the FMS approach capability will be roll steering only, or roll steering
with VDEV displayed, fully 3D coupled or RNAV(GPS) approach procedures using a
GPS/SBAS sensor calculated position. This determination will dictate which
additional annunciation(s) will be required to be added to the cockpit for certification,
which strapping will be required on certain EFIS systems, etc.
Using the GPS/SBAS sensor calculated position, the FMS provides localizer
performance and vertical guidance for SBAS approach procedures. A SBAS approach
is one that is charted as RNAV (GPS) and approved for SBAS. In addition to standard
Lateral Navigation (LNAV) guidance, the FMS provides lateral and vertical guidance
for Lateral Navigation/Vertical Navigation (LNAV/VNAV) and Localizer
Page 305
34-60-67 8 July 2014
Performance with Vertical Guidance (LPV) approach minimums for SBAS
approaches. LNAV/VNAV approaches use lateral and vertical guidance from the
FMS for a controlled descent to the runway. An LPV approach is similar to an
LNAV/VNAV approach except it has lower approach minimums and requires dual
FMS installation.
The FMS can also provide a 2D coupled (along track and crosstrack) operation using
the roll steering input channel to the FGS. The approach gain for the roll steering
output from the FMS is configurable to provide a more aggressive path following for
approaches. A gain of ’3X’ is recommended. The FGS will remain in NAV mode; the
FMS will steer the approach transition segments and final approach using the same
roll steering command input that is used for enroute operations. In this case, it is very
desirable to provide a vertical display on the HSI of the pseudo glideslope VNAV
deviation. Coupled vertical approach will not be possible with this interface design
and it will be up to the flight crew to make the descent using another FGS mode.
From an interface standpoint, this is the simplest method to interface for approaches.
The limitation of this interface is the lack of coupled vertical ILS-like operation.
Some installations such as the LR-60, LR-31, Dash 8, Falcon 2000 and Astra SPX do
use pitch command for approach mode but this is not the typical scenario for retrofit
installations.
A third method of interfacing the FMS for approach involves 3D fully coupled
pseudo ILS approaches. This is accomplished by switching FMS analog lateral and
vertical deviation signals in place of real ILS data to the HSI and FGS. During the
approach transition segments with NAV mode selected on FGS and LRN selected for
display, the FMS (established inbound and less than 0.2 nm crosstrack for auto-
activation) the FMS approach active annunciator output from the FMS is used to
provide relay logic to switch the FMS deviation to the HSI and FGS along with
simulated Tune-to-Localizer. FMS lateral and vertical deviations are switched to the
FGS and approach arm/capture functions are available for F/D and A/P operation.
The HSI and FGS will use the simulated ILS and thus ILS control laws of the FGS are
used. This generally results in approaches with better path following than roll steering
approaches. This type of installation obviously adds complexity and requires detailed
description in the AFM supplement as well as proper aircrew training.
Page 306
34-60-67 8 July 2014

Manual Affected
Filing Instructions
Insert this Temporary Change in the Installation and Wiring section adjacent to Page 307.
Purpose
To clarify GPS (SBAS) antenna mounting.
Instructions
Replace (1) Installation Considerations with the following:
(1) Installation Considerations
The antenna should be mounted on top of the fuselage near the cockpit. Avoid
mounting the antenna near any projections, the propeller, the T–Tail, and minimize
shadowing by the wing during maneuvers. The antenna should also be located with
proper spacing to other system antennas such that no performance degradation will
occur due to shadowing of signals and/or RF interference.
Minimum Antenna Separation
Antennas Distances
GPS-GPS 12 inches
GPS-SATCOM (INMARSAT, 1625 MHz) 4 feet
GPS-all other antennas 4 feet
Limited by aircraft dimensions, valid range is defined for each axis component of
antenna offset. The table below lists the valid range, standard offset values, and the
positive sense for the antenna offset.
NOTE: For the LP/LPV Monitor, antenna offsets cannot be changed through
configuration and the standard offsets are used.
Navigational Center (NC) is defined as the navigational center of the
aircraft, typically the ILS glideslope antenna.
Valid Range, Standard Offset and Positive Sense for Antenna Offset Configuration
Antenna Offset Valid Range Standard Positive Sense
Axis Offset (relative to the NC)
Longitudinal (X) +90 m, -30 m +3 m AFT of the NC
Right of the NC
Lateral (Y) +4 m, -4 m 0m
(aircraft cockpit in the front)
Vertical (Z) +15 m, 0 m +2 m Above the NC
Page 1 of 2
34.60.67-2
law is prohibited. 26 January 2015
(a) Acceptable Antenna Placement
When using the standard antenna offsets (X = 3.0 m, Y = 0.0 m, Z = 2.0m), It
is intended that for most aircraft it is acceptable to use the standard antenna
offsets as a default.
Y axis: It is acceptable to place the antenna anywhere on the Y axis and still
use the standard offset of Y = 0.
X axis: It is acceptable to place the antenna anywhere on the X axis and still
use the standard offset of X = 3. The assumption is that the antenna is not
generally installed forward of the aircraft's forward bulkhead which is usually
associated with the NC (navigation center).
Z axis: It is acceptable to place the antenna up to 5 meters above ground level
(bottom of the aircraft wheels) and still use the standard offset of Z = 2.
(b) Recommended configurations:
Dual WAAS FMS installations:
For any antennas that are installed within 5 meters of the ground, use the
standard offsets for those antennas.
For any antennas that are installed higher than 5 meters above the ground,
configure the actual antenna offsets in the FMS.
WAAS FMS with a LP/LPV Monitor Installations:
If both antennas are installed within 5 meters of the ground, use the standard
offset in the FMS.
If one antenna is installed higher than 5 meters above the ground and one
antenna is within 5 meters of the ground, wire the antenna that is within 5
meters of the ground to the LP/LPV Monitor box and the antenna that is
higher than 5 meters to the FMS. Use the standard offsets for the LP/LPV
Monitor and use actual antenna offsets in the FMS.
If both antennas are installed higher than 5 meters, use of the LP/LPV
Monitor box is not acceptable.
NOTE: It is possible for antennas installed higher than 5 meters to use the
standard offsets, but the placement of the antenna will need to be
analyzed. The analysis will depend upon aircraft length, fuselage
height, location of the NC and the pitch attitude when the aircraft
flies on the glideslope. Generally, in this case, the further aft the
antenna is installed, the better.
Page 2 of 2
34.60.67-2
law is prohibited. 26 January 2015
C. Electrical Connectors
The FMS uses three size 24 - 61-pin connectors. Each connector has a different shell
polarization to ensure proper mating of each plug and socket set. The GPS antenna coaxial
cable is fitted with either a straight or a 90-degree connector at the FMS end. The portable
DTU-100 uses two 10 - 13-pin connectors.
CAUTION: FMS REAR MATING CONNECTORS P1, P2 AND P3 ARE KEYED
DIFFERENTLY AND ARE NOT INTERCHANGEABLE. BE SURE
THAT THE CORRECT CONNECTOR IS USED ON THE END OF
EACH WIRE BUNDLE. KEYING: P1 = A, P2 = NORMAL AND P3 = D.
D. Remote Annunciators
The FMS provides outputs to remotely mounted panel annunciators. These include remote
Message, Waypoint Alert, Selected Crosstrack, GPS Integrity, FMS Heading and FMS
Approach advisories. In addition, a “System On” discrete output is available to the installer
for use in activating remote switching (if required).
Level of Service (LOS) discretes are provided by the SBAS subsystem for SBAS approaches.
These non-configurable discretes are LPV, LNAV/VNAV and LNAV (LOS 1, LOS 2 and
LOS 3 respectively). These provide annunciation for the LOS in installations not interfaced
with Universal’s EFI-890R or EFI-550.
E. FMS Mounting
The FMS is instrument or pedestal mounted using standard configuration Dzus rails.
Consideration should be given to the depth of the FMS, the GNSS coaxial cable and wire
bundles when planning installation.
The Configuration Module is mounted directly onto the P1 connector strain relief. Refer to
Configuration Module Installation drawing in the Equipment Specifications section of this
manual.
F. Antenna Mounting
(1) Installation Considerations
The antenna should be mounted on top of the fuselage near the cockpit. Avoid
mounting the antenna near any projections, the propeller, the T–Tail, and minimize
shadowing by the wing during maneuvers. The antenna should also be located with
proper spacing to other system antennas such that no performance degradation will
occur due to shadowing of signals and/or RF interference.
Minimum Antenna Separation
Antennas Distances
GPS-GPS 12 inches
GPS-SATCOM (INMARSAT, 1625 MHz) 4 feet
GPS-all other antennas 4 feet
Page 307
34-60-67 8 July 2014
(2) Installation Instructions

Total attenuation losses due to antenna cabling and connections must not exceed the
minimum recommended specifications listed below. Attenuation losses will vary
depending on the type of RF cable connected to the antenna. The gain of the
antenna/preamplifier minus the loss of the cable and end connectors should be
between 20 (minimum) and 30 dB for optimum performance. For instance, if the GPS
is being connected to antenna P/N 10708, which has a nominal gain of 30 dB, total
attenuation losses, must not exceed 10 dB. To ensure a minimum 20 dB of gain from
the antenna input to the GPS/SBAS sensor.
It is also highly recommended that only high quality, low-loss cable such as ECS or
PIC RG-142, RG-400 or equivalent coax cable is used in the installation. Refer to the
following table for the maximum allowable cable loss specifications based on the
amount of antenna gain.
Gain/Loss Specifications
Antenna Part Number Antenna Gain Maximum Cable Loss
10708 30 ± 3 dB 10 dB
10709 30 ± 3 dB 10 dB
10710 30 ± 3 dB 10 dB
Mechanical structure modifications to install GPS antenna(s) should be carried out in

accordance with the guidelines of FAA Advisory Circular AC 43.13. Installation of
the antenna, its electrical bonding to the structure, coaxial cable routing and clamping
should also be accomplished per this advisory. Refer to the antenna installation
drawing contained in the Equipment Specifications section of this manual for detailed
information.
The design of the GPS antenna is such that a ground plane is required. To assure
maximum protection from a possible lightning strike, the antenna base should
conduct to the mounting surface. This can be accomplished by removing paint in the
area of contact between the antenna base and the aircraft skin.
The hole for TNC connector should be about 0.75-inch diameter. Make the smallest
practical hole in the pressure vessel.
Fasten the antenna with four screws of sufficient length to assure that at least two full
threads protrude beyond the locking nut or threaded backing plate (if used). Apply a
maximum torque of 10 in. lbs. to avoid cracking the plastic radome of the antenna.
Apply a sealant (RTV is recommended) over screw heads and around the periphery of
the antenna to exclude moisture.
Check bonding of the antenna to the aircraft skin by measuring the resistance between
the skin of the aircraft and the antenna connector housing using a shunt-type
ohmmeter such as a Wheatstone Bridge or Kelvinometer. There should be no more
than 100 milliohms resistance measured. This measurement is accomplished from the
inside of the aircraft with the antenna installed.
Page 308
34-60-67 8 July 2014
(3) Long Cable Runs
In installations with very long cable runs, it is permissible to use a low loss coax
cable (such as Electronic Cable Specialists P/N 311501) for the run from the antenna
to a bulkhead connector. Then use a smaller coax (such as ECS P/N 3C3160
M17/113-RG316) from the bulkhead connector to the UNS–1Ew. Components for
this application are listed below.
Coax cable P/N 311501 3C3160
Attenuation 1.575 GHz = 0.087 dB/ft. 1.575 GHz = 0.405 dB/ft.
Minimum Bend Radius 1.22 in. (nominal) 1.02 in. (nominal)
RF Connectors P/Ns
TNC Straight CTS922 31-2315-1000
TNC 90º CTR922 KA-59-281
Bulkhead TNC BTS922 N/A
BNC Straight CBS922 225395-7
BNC 90º CBR922 KC-59-318
Complete FMS GPS cable assemblies as well as bulk coax cable and connectors
are available from Electronic Cable Specialists. Refer to Wire and Cable
Manufacturers in the Equipment Specifications section of this manual.
Page 309
34-60-67 8 July 2014
G. Solid State Data Transfer Unit (SSDTU)
Installation Considerations
The SSDTU is available in two models, a fixed installation model that is permanently
installed in the aircraft and a portable model which is carried into the aircraft, attached to an
interface connector, used, then disconnected and removed prior to flight. The SSDTU is the
same fit as a DTU-100.
The SSDTU may be used as a replacement for a DTU-100 and can be directly installed
without any modifications to the aircraft or wiring using connector P1, which allows the use
of a single Ethernet connection. If the aircraft is wired for the DTU-100 using four Ethernet
ports, connector P2 must be replaced with connector P/N 83000255 which is included in the
SSDTU installation kit P/N K12079-1, no additional wiring is needed. To have all eight
Ethernet ports available on the SSDTU, the P2 connector must be replaced and additional
wiring must be installed.
If the aircraft is wired for a Portable DTU-100, use the wiring harness (P/N 81304072) to
connect bulkhead connector P1 to the Portable SSDTU J1 and the retrofit wiring harness
(P/N 81140811) to connect bulkhead P2 to J2 of the Portable SSDTU. This allows one
Ethernet connection on P1 and three Ethernet connections on P2. For the additional four
Ethernet ports to be available to the Portable SSDTU, the existing P2 bulkhead connector
must be replaced with connector P/N 83000558 and additional wiring must be installed.
Refer to the applicable pin identification tables and wiring diagrams in this section.
J1 Pin Crossover
SSDTU SSDTU DTU-100 DTU-100
Functions Pins Functions Pins
EIA-485 (Side A) (FMS 485 A) A RS-422 A A
EIA-485 (Side B) (FMS 485 B) B RS-422 B B
Ethernet #1 RX (+) C Ethernet #0 RX (+) C
Ethernet #1 RX (-) D Ethernet #0 RX (-) D
Ethernet #1 Shield E Ethernet #0 Shield E
Ethernet #1 TX (+) F Ethernet #0 TX (+) F
Ethernet #1 TX (-) G Ethernet #0 TX (-) G
H Option Pin 0 H
J Option Pin 1 J
K K
Chassis Ground L Chassis Ground L
Power 28 VDC M Power 28 VDC M
EIA-232 RX N Aux Port RX (RS-232 RX) N
Ground P Ground P
EIA-232 TX R Aux Port TX (RS-232 TX) R
Page 310
34-60-67 8 July 2014
J2 Pin Crossover
NOTE: Pin numbers/letters not listed are not used or assigned any function.
DTU-
SSDTU SSDTU DTU-100
100
Functions Pins Functions
Pins
Ethernet #3 RX (+) 1 Ethernet #2 RX (+) E
Ethernet #3 TX (+) 2 Ethernet #2 TX (+) G
Ethernet #2 RX (-) 4 Ethernet #1 RX (-) B
Ethernet #3 RX (-) 6 Ethernet #2 RX (-) F
Ethernet #3 TX (-) 7 Ethernet #2 TX (-) H
Ethernet #4 TX (-) 8 Ethernet #3 TX (-) N
Ethernet #4 TX (+) 9 Ethernet #3 TX (+) L
Ethernet #2 TX (-) 10 Ethernet #1 TX (-) D
Ethernet #2 RX (+) 11 Ethernet #1 RX (+) A
Ethernet #3 Shield 13
Ethernet #4 RX (-) 15 Ethernet #3 RX (-) K
Ethernet #4 RX (+) 16 Ethernet #3 RX (+) J
Ethernet #2 TX (+) 18 Ethernet #1 TX (+) C
Ethernet #2 Shield 19 Ethernet Shield P
Ethernet #8 TX (-) 27
Ethernet #8 RX (-) 28
Ethernet #5 TX (+) 31
Ethernet #8 RX (+) 36
Page 311
34-60-67 8 July 2014
2. FMS Interfaces
Interconnection wiring information between the aircraft, FMS, CDU, DTU is provided in the
following paragraphs and wiring diagrams. Information about the connection to VOR, DME,
TACAN, radar, flight control and fuel flow systems is provided in the SBAS FMS SCN
1001/1101 Interface Manual, 34-60-71. Configuration of the FMS can be found in the SBAS
FMS SCN 1001/1101 Configuration Manual, 34-61-02.
A. Analog Inputs
Input Description Plug/Pin Characteristics
Autopilot Reference J1-P (H) 26 VAC, 400 Hz
J1-R (Common) 26 VAC, 400 Hz
Input Voltage: 26 VAC RMS ± 10%,
400 Hz ± 20 Hz
Input Impedance: 80 kΩ (minimum)
Input Load: 2 mA (maximum)
Fuel Flow #1 J1-A (A) Depends on Configuration
J1-B (B)
Fuel Flow #2 J1-C (A) Depends on Configuration
J1-D (B)
Fuel Flow #3 J2-i (A) Depends on Configuration
J2-j (B)
Fuel Flow #4 J3-CC (A) Depends on Configuration
J3-DD (B)
Heading Synchro J1-X (X) Impedance = 33 kΩ
J1-Y (Y) Impedance = 33 kΩ
J1-Z (Z) Impedance = 24 kΩ
Standard ARINC 407 three–wire synchro
transmitter (or equivalent) with two–wire
reference signal from aircraft compass
system.
Heading Synchro Reference J1-K (H) 26 VAC, 400 Hz
J1-L (Common) 26 VAC, 400 Hz
400 Hz ± 20 Hz
Input Impedance: 80k Ω (minimum)
Input Load: 2 mA (maximum)
Instrument Synchro Reference J1-M (H) 26 VAC, 400 Hz
(Applicable to Analog configuration J1-N (Common) 26 VAC, 400 Hz
P/N 3017-XX-X11 only)
400 Hz ± 20 Hz
Input Impedance: 80k Ω (minimum)
Input Load: 2 ma (maximum)
WAAS Crosschannel Lateral Deviation J3-j (H)
(Applicable to Analog configuration J3-k (L)
WAAS Crosschannel Vertical Deviation J3-NN (H)
(Applicable to Analog configuration J3-PP (L)
Page 312
34-60-67 8 July 2014
B. Discrete Inputs
Discrete Input 1 J3-T Ground / Open (Configurable)
See System Data Installation for list of
discrete inputs.
Discrete Input 2 J1-MM Ground / Open (Configurable)
discrete inputs.
Discrete Input 3 J1-LL Ground / Open (Configurable)
discrete inputs.
Discrete Input 4 J1-DD Ground / Open (Configurable)
discrete inputs.
Discrete Input 5 J1-AA Ground / Open (Configurable)
discrete inputs.
Discrete Input 6 J1-CC Ground / Open (Configurable)
discrete inputs.
Discrete Input 7 J1-GG Ground / Open (Configurable)
discrete inputs.
Discrete Input 8 J3-R Ground / Open (Configurable)
discrete inputs.
Discrete Input 9 J3-P Ground / Open (Configurable)
discrete inputs.
Discrete Input 10 J3-S 28 VDC / Open (Configurable)
discrete inputs.
Crosschannel Level of Service 4 J3-h Ground / Open
Monitor
FMS #2 J1-EE Ground / Open (Ground = FMS #2)
FMS #3 J1-FF Ground / Open (Ground = FMS #3)
Heading Input MAG/TRUE J1-HH 28 VDC / Open
(Open = MAG / 28 VDC = TRUE)
Heading Input Valid J1-V 28 VDC / Open
WAAS Crosschannel Level of Service J1-BB Ground / Open
WAAS Crosschannel Fail J3-g Ground / Open
Steering Valid J2-CC 28 VDC / Open (28 VDC = Valid)
WAAS Crosschannel Vertical Guidance J2-h 28 VDC / Open
Monitor
WAAS Crosschannel Lateral Guidance J3-f 28 VDC / Open
Monitor
Power Control J2-FF Ground / Open (FMS Power On/Off)
Page 313
34-60-67 8 July 2014
C. Digital Inputs
(1) ASCB Inputs
bus developed by Honeywell and supplement the ARINC, CSDB, and analog
interfaces of the FMS.
ASCB Discrete In 1 J1-NN Ground / Open
ASCB Discrete In 2 J1-PP Ground / Open
ASCB Discrete In 3 J2-PP Ground / Open
ASCB Discrete In 4 J2-w Ground / Open
ASCB Discrete In 5 J2-e Ground / Open
ASCB Discrete In 6 J2-f Ground / Open
ASCB Discrete In 7 J2-MM Ground / Open
ASCB Discrete In 8 J1-s Ground / Open
ASCB A Clock 1 + J2-z
ASCB A Clock 1 – J2-g
ASCB A Data 1 + J2-x
ASCB A Data 1 – J2-y
ASCB B Clock 2 + J3-E
ASCB B Clock 2 – J3-F
ASCB B Data 2 + J2-v
ASCB B Data 2 – J2-HH
NOTE: Assuming NCU #1 is to be configured for TX/RX on Left ASCB bus, ASCB A Port
(On-Side) is connected to the Left ASCB Bus and ASCB B Port (Off-Side) is
connected to the Right ASCB Bus.
Page 314
34-60-67 8 July 2014
(2) CSDB Inputs
Some sensors are restricted to certain input ports. The allowable CSDB port
assignments and their pin numbers are found in the SBAS FMS SCN 1001/1101
Configuration Manual 34-61-02.
Receive From External CDU #2 (Note) J1-p (H) External CDU
J1-q (L)
CSDB Receiver Port 1 J1-w (A) Depends on Configuration
J1-x (B)
CSDB Receiver Port 2 J1-y (A) Depends on Configuration
J1-z (B)
CSDB Receiver Port 3 J1-u (A) Depends on Configuration
J1-v (B)
CSDB Receiver Port 4 J3-p (A) Depends on Configuration
J3-q (B)
WAAS Differential Timemark A J3-K (A) RS-422
WAAS Differential Timemark B J3-L (B) RS-422
UniLink Display Data J2-Z (H)
J2-X (L)
NOTE: CDU #2 In is for communication with a remote CDU. There are no external
connections between the NCU and CDU #1 because they are packaged in the
same unit.
Page 315
34-60-67 8 July 2014
(3) ARINC Input Ports
Some sensors are restricted to certain input ports. The allowable ARINC port
assignments and their pin numbers are found in the SBAS FMS SCN 1001/1101
Configuration Manual 34-61-02.
Port Plug/Pin Input Description Notes
Port 0 N/A ARINC 429 and 419 (LS) 1, 2, 4
Port 1 J1-c (A) ARINC 429 and 419 (LS)
J1-d (B)
Port 2 J1-e (A) ARINC 429 and 419 (LS)
J1-f (B)
Port 3 J1-g (A) ARINC 429 and 419 (LS)
J1-h (B)
Port 4 J3-EE (A) ARINC 429 and 419 (LS or HS)
J3-FF (B)
Port 5 J3-GG (A) ARINC 429 and 419 (LS or HS)
J3-HH (B)
Port 6 J3-JJ (A) ARINC 429 and 419 (LS or HS)
J3-KK (B)
Port 7 J3-LL (A) ARINC 429 and 419 (LS or HS)
J3-MM (B)
Port 8 J1-N (A) ARINC 429 and 419 (LS) 3
J1-M (B)
Port 9 J2-w (A) ARINC 429 and 419 (LS) 3
J2-PP (B)
Port 10 J1-W (A) ARINC 429 and 419 (LS) 3
J1-s (B)
Port 11 J2-t (A) ARINC 429 and 419 (LS) 3
J2-r (B)
Port 12 J1-NN (A) ARINC 429 and 419 (LS or HS) 3
J1-PP (B)
Port 13 J2-GG (A) ARINC 429 and 419 (LS or HS) 3
J2-NN (B)
Port 14 J2-v (A) ARINC 429 and 419 (LS or HS) 3
J2-HH (B)
Port 15 J3-E (A) ARINC 429 and 419 (LS or HS) 3
J3-F (B)
WAAS Port 0 J2-P (A) WAAS Offside FMS 5
J2-R (B)
WAAS Port 1 J3-H (A) WAAS Crosschannel Receive 5
J3-J (B)
WAAS Port 2 J3-j (A) WAAS Crosschannel Monitor 1 3, 5
J3-k (B)
WAAS Port 3 J3-NN (A) WAAS Crosschannel Monitor 2 3, 5
J3-PP (B)
WAAS Port J1-NN (A) WAAS Crosschannel Monitor 6
J1-PP (B)
Page 316
34-60-67 8 July 2014
NOTES: 1. In all dual SBAS FMS installations, RX Port 0 must be configured to WAAS n (where
n represents 1 for FMS#1 or 2 for FMS#2) This is required because internal SBAS
subsystem uses the configuration information for RX Port #0 to setup the speed for
the WAAS ARINC 743A TX port.
2. In single SBAS FMS with LPV Monitor installations, RX Port #0 must be configured for
WAAS 1. In this installation, the configuration information for RX Port #0 is used to
setup the speed for the WAAS ARINC 743A TX port of the internal SBAS subsystem
and the LPV Monitor.
3. Applicable to Digital, P/N 3017-XX-X21 and ASCB, P/N 3017-XX-X31 UNS-1Ew.
4. Port #0 should not be connected to any external system.
5. Not a configurable port.
6. Applicable to Analog UNS-1Ew P/N 3017-XX-X11 with Mod 4.
Page 317
34-60-67 8 July 2014
D. Analog Outputs
Output Description Plug/Pin Characteristics
Desired Track J2-e (X) Synchro X
J2-f (Y) Synchro Y
J2-g (Z) Synchro Z
Lateral Deviation J2-KK (H) +R – Fly Right, Left of Course
J2-LL (L) +L – Fly Left, Right of Course
See Lateral Deviation Characteristics
Table Below
Pitch Command J3-E (H) AC or DC pitch
J3-F (L) Pitch Return
Roll Steering J2-AA (H) 0.393 VAC RMS/Degree
J2-BB (L) Right Roll in Phase
To/From J2-MM (H) + To 180-250 mV Output
J2-NN (L) + From
Vertical Deviation J2-GG (H) +Up – Fly Up, Below Course
J2-HH (L) +Down– Fly Down, Above Course
See Vertical Deviation Characteristics
Table Below
Waypoint Bearing/Drift Angle J2-x (X) Synchro X
J2-y (Y) Synchro Y
J2-z (Z) Synchro Z
(1) Lateral Deviation Characteristics

Range 2 Dot Value Invalid Stow Value
Low Level Configuration
Enroute –250 to +250 mVDC L/R 2NM –150 to +150 mVDC 0.0 VDC N/A
Terminal –250 to +250 mVDC L/R 1NM –150 to +150 mVDC 0.0 VDC N/A
0.3 NM –250 to +250 mVDC L/R 0.3NM –150 to +150 mVDC 0.0 VDC N/A
Approach –250 to +250 mVDC L/R (angular) –150 to +150 mVDC 0.0 VDC N/A
High Level Configuration
Enroute –10 to +10 VDC L/R 2NM –6 to +6 VDC 0.0 VDC N/A
Terminal –10 to +10 VDC L/R 1NM –6 to +6 VDC 0.0 VDC N/A
0.3 NM –10 to +10 VDC L/R 0.3NM –6 to +6 VDC 0.0 VDC N/A
Approach –10 to +10 VDC L/R (angular) –6 to +6 VDC 0.0 VDC N/A
Page 318
34-60-67 8 July 2014
(2) Vertical Deviation Characteristics
Range 2 Dot Value Invalid Stow Value
Low Level Configuration
Enroute –205 to +205 mVDC L/R 1476 ft. –150 to +150 mVDC 750 mVDC 1.3 VDC
Terminal –250 to +250 mVDC L/R 492 ft. –150 to +150 mVDC 750 mVDC 1.3 VDC
0.3 NM –250 to +250 mVDC L/R 200 ft. –150 to +150 mVDC 750 mVDC 1.3 VDC
Approach –250 to +250 mVDC L/R (angular) –150 to +150 mVDC 750 mVDC 1.3 VDC
High Level Configuration
Enroute –2.78 to +2.78 VDC L/R 1476 ft. –2 to +2 VDC 3.5 VDC 8.12 VDC
Terminal –3.33 to +3.33 VDC L/R 492 ft. –2 to +2 VDC 3.5 VDC 8.12 VDC
0.3 NM –3.33 to +3.33 VDC L/R 200 ft. –2 to +2 VDC 3.5 VDC 8.12 VDC
Approach –3.33 to +3.33 VDC L/R (angular) –2 to +2 VDC 3.5 VDC 8.12 VDC
Page 319
34-60-67 8 July 2014
E. Discrete Outputs
All discrete outputs are of two types: Ground/Open and 28VDC/Open. Both the
Ground/Open and 28VDC/Open discrete outputs may be either configurable or non-
configurable. Non-configurable discretes must be assigned to a specific pin. Configurable
discretes may be assigned to any one of a specific set of pins.
(1) Non-Configurable Discretes
Digital Valid J2-v 28 VDC / Open (28 VDC = Valid)
Message Annunciator Output J2-U Ground / Open (GND = Message, 350mA is
the maximum allowable load)
Level of Service 1 J3-B Ground / Open
Nav Valid J2-DD 28 VDC / Open (28 VDC = Valid)
Pitch Command Valid J3-G 28 VDC / Open (28 VDC = Valid)
Steering Valid J2-CC 28 VDC / Open (28 VDC = Valid)
Vertical Valid J2-JJ 28 VDC / Open (28 VDC = Valid)
Level of Service 2 J3-C Ground / Open
Level of Service 3 J3-D Ground / Open
WAAS Crosschannel Fail J3-e Ground / Open
Level of Service 4 J2-k Ground / Open
(2) Configurable Discretes

Discrete Output 1 J3-i Ground / Open (Configurable)
discrete inputs.
Discrete Output 2 J2-W Ground / Open (Configurable)
discrete inputs.
Discrete Output 3 J2-V Ground / Open (Configurable)
discrete inputs.
Discrete Output 4 J2-S Ground / Open (Configurable)
discrete inputs.
Discrete Output 5 J2-T Ground / Open (Configurable)
discrete inputs.
Discrete Output 6 J3-n Ground / Open(Configurable)
discrete inputs.
Discrete Output 7 J3-m Ground / Open (Configurable)
discrete inputs.
Discrete Output 8 J2-Y Ground / Open (Configurable)
discrete inputs.
Discrete Output 9 28 V J2-EE 28 VDC / Open (Configurable)
discrete inputs.
Page 320
34-60-67 8 July 2014
F. Digital Outputs
The following tables show a list of the configurable CSDB and ARINC 429 outputs along
with the ports to which they default when the configuration module is initialized. Each of
these ports is configurable.
Some sensors are restricted to certain output ports. The allowable ARINC port assignments and
their pin numbers are found in the SBAS FMS SCN 1001/1101 Configuration Manual, 34-61-02.
(1) CSDB Output Ports
CSDB TX 1 J2-c (A)
J2-d (B)
CSDB TX 2 J2-a (A)
J2-b (B)
(2) ASCB Outputs

bus developed by Honeywell and supplement the ARINC, CSDB, and analog
interfaces of the FMS.
ASCB Discrete Out 1 J2-t ASCB Discrete Out 1 (28V/OPEN)
ASCB Discrete Out 2 J2-r ASCB Discrete Out 2 (28V/OPEN Spare)
ASCB Discrete Out 3 J2-p ASCB Discrete Out 3 (GND/OPEN Spare)
ASCB Discrete Out 4 J3-G ASCB Discrete Out 4 (GND/OPEN)
NOTE: Assuming NCU #1 is to be configured for TX/RX on Left ASCB bus, ASCB A Port (On-
Side) is connected to the Left ASCB Bus and ASCB B Port (Off-Side) is connected to the
Right ASCB Bus.
Page 321
34-60-67 8 July 2014
(3) ARINC Output Ports
Port Plug/Pin Default Configuration Notes
Port 0A J2-A (A) ARINC 429 HS
J2-B (B)
Port 0B J3-r (A)
J3-s (B)
Port 1 J2-C (A) ARINC 571
J2-D (B)
Port 2A J3-w (A) ARINC 429 LS 3, 4, 6
J3-x (B)
Port 2B J3-y (A)
J3-z (B)
Port 2C J2-M (A)
J2-N (B)
Port 3 J3-AA (A) ARINC 429 Crossfill HS
J3-BB (B)
Port 4 J3-c (A) ARINC 429 LS 1
J3-d (B)
Port 4A J2-x (A) ARINC 429 Tune LS 2
J2-y (B)
Port 4B J2-e (A) 2
J2-f (B)
Port 5 J2-z (A) 2
J2-g (B)
Port 6A J2-JJ (A) 2
J2-KK (B)
Port 6B J2-MM (A) 2
J2-LL (B)
Port 7 J2-DD (A) 2
J2-p (B)
WAAS Port 0 J1-JJ (A) WAAS Crosschannel Transmit 5
J1-KK (B)
WAAS Port 1 J2-K (A) WAAS Transmit ARINC 743A Data 5
J2-L (B)
WAAS Port 1 J1-a (A) WAAS Transmit Port 5
J1-b (B)
NOTES: 1. Available in Analog configuration P/N 3017-XX-X11 only.
2. Available in Digital configuration P/N 3017-XX-X21 only.
3. In dual SBAS FMS Installations, Transmit Port #2 must be configured for one
of the following bus types: 429 HS, 429 LS, HS429 MOD2, HS429 MOD 3,
HS429 MOD 4, GPS XPDR LS, GPS XPDR HS or UNS HS429-1 to setup the
speed for the WAAS OFFSIDE RECEIVE.
4. In single SBAS FMS with LPV Monitor Installations, Transmit Port #2 must be
configured for one of the following bus types: 429 HS, 429 LS, HS429 MOD2,
HS429 MOD 3, HS429 MOD 4, GPS XPDR LS, GPS XPDR HS or UNS
HS429-1 to setup the speed for the WAAS OFFSIDE RECEIVE of the internal
SBAS subsystem and the LPV Monitor.
5. Not a configurable port.
6. Configuring any of the following bus types will cause manual de-selection of
geostationary satellites to not be supported: HS429 MOD 2, HS429 MOD 3,
UNS HS429-1, GPS XPDR LS and GPS XPDR HS.
Page 322
34-60-67 8 July 2014
3. Pin Assignment
A. UNS-1Ew – Analog (P/N 3017-XX-X11)
(1) Connector J1
Pin Function Pin Function
A Fuel Flow 1 In (H) j 28 VDC Aircraft Bus
B Fuel Flow 1 In (L) k 5 VDC Keypad Lighting (Note 1)
C Fuel Flow 2 In (H) m 28 VDC Keypad Lighting (Note 1)
D Fuel Flow 2 In (L) n Keypad Lighting Return
E Configuration Module Data I/O p RS-422 (H) (Receive from External CDU)
F Configuration Module Data Clock q RS-422 (L) (Receive from External CDU)
G Configuration Module Power r UniLink Display Data RX (L)
H Configuration Module Power Return s NC
J t UniLink Display Data (H)
K 26 VAC Heading Reference u CSDB RX Port 3 (A)
L 26 VAC Heading Reference Return v CSDB RX Port 3 (B)
M 26 VAC Instrument Reference w CSDB RX Port 1 (A)
N 26 VAC Instrument Reference Return x CSDB RX Port 1 (B)
P Autopilot Reference (H) y CSDB RX Port 2 (A)
R Autopilot Reference (L) z CSDB RX Port 2 (B)
S AA Discrete In 5 (GND/Open)
T RS-422 (H) (Transmit to External CDU) BB WAAS LOS Monitor
U RS-422 (L) (Transmit to External CDU) CC Discrete In 6 (GND/Open)
V Heading Valid Flag (28 V Discrete) DD Discrete In 4 (GND/Open)
W NC EE FMS2 Discrete In (GND = FMS #2)
X Synchro In Heading X FF FMS3 Discrete In (GND = FMS #3)
Y Synchro In Heading Y GG Discrete In 7 (GND/Open)
Z Synchro In Heading Z HH Heading Flag Input (28 VDC = True,
Open = Mag)
a WAAS TX Port 1 (A) JJ WAAS Crosschannel TX Port 0 (H)
b WAAS TX Port 1 (B) KK WAAS Crosschannel TX Port 0 (L)
c ARINC RX Port 1 (A) LL Discrete In 3 (GND/Open)
d ARINC RX Port 1 (B) MM Discrete In 2 (GND/Open)
e ARINC RX Port 2 (A) NN NC
f ARINC RX Port 2 (B) NN WAAS Crosschannel Monitor 1 (H) (Note 2)
g ARINC RX Port 3 (A) PP NC
h ARINC RX Port 3 (B) PP WAAS Crosschannel Monitor 1 (L) (Note 2)
i Ground (Power Return)
NOTES: 1 Use either 5 VDC or 28 VDC power for keypad lighting, but not both.
2 Applicable to Analog UNS-1Ew P/N 3017-XX-X11 with Mod 4.
Page 323
34-60-67 8 July 2014
(2) Connector J2
A ARINC TX Port 0A (A) i Fuel Flow 3 In (H)
B ARINC TX Port 0A (B) j Fuel Flow 3 In (L)
C ARINC TX Port 1 (A) k LOS Discrete 4
D ARINC TX Port 1 (B) m WAAS Monitor RX (RS-232)
E RS-232 TX (Monitor Port) n WAAS Monitor TX (RS-232)
F RS-232 RX (Monitor Port) p ARINC 561 Data (H)
G Lab Use Only q ARINC 561 Data (L)
H Lab Use Only r ARINC 561 Synch (H)
J RS-232 Chassis Ground s ARINC 561 Synch (L)
K WAAS TX Port 1 (H) ARINC 743 Data t ARINC 561 Clock (H)
L WAAS TX Port 1 (L) ARINC 743 Data u ARINC 561 Clock (L)
M ARINC TX Port 2C (A) v ARINC 561 Data Valid
N ARINC TX Port 2C (B) w NC
P WAAS RX Port 0 (A) – Offside FMS Receive x Synchro Bearing X
R WAAS RX Port 0 (B) – Offside FMS Receive y Synchro Bearing Y
S Discrete Out 4 (GND/Open) z Synchro Bearing Z
T Discrete Out 5 (GND/Open) AA Roll Steering Out (H)
U Annunciator Out Discrete (GND/Open) BB Roll Steering Out (L)
V Discrete Out 3 (GND/Open) CC Steering Valid Out (28 VDC = Valid)
W Discrete Out 2 (GND/Open) DD Navigation Valid (28 VDC = Valid)
X UniLink Display Data TX (L) EE Discrete Out 9 (28 VDC/Open)
Y Discrete Out 8 (GND/Open) FF Power Control (FMS Power On/Off)
Z UniLink Display Data TX (H) GG Vertical Deviation (Analog DC)
a CSDB TX Port 2 (A) HH Vertical Deviation Return (Analog DC)
b CSDB TX Port 2 (B) JJ Vertical Deviation Valid Out (28 VDC = Valid)
c CSDB TX Port 1 (A) KK Lateral Deviation (Analog DC)
d CSDB TX Port 1 (B) LL Lateral Deviation Return (Analog DC)
e Synchro In Desired Track X MM To/From (Analog DC)
f Synchro In Desired Track Y NN To/From Return (Analog DC)
g Synchro In Desired Track Z PP NC
h WAAS Crosschannel Vertical Valid
NOTE: 1 Applicable to Analog and Digital UNS-1Ew units with Mod 4.
Page 324
34-60-67 8 July 2014
(3) Connector J3
A Ethernet Receive (H) i Discrete Out 1 (GND/Open)
B LOS 1 Discrete j WAAS Crosschannel Lateral Deviation (H)
C LOS 2 Discrete k WAAS Crosschannel Lateral Deviation (L)
D LOS 3 Discrete m Discrete Out 7 (GND/Open)
E Analog AC Pitch Command n Discrete Out 6 (GND/Open)
F Analog AC Pitch Command Return p CSDB RX Port 4 (A)
G Pitch Valid (28 VDC = Valid) q CSDB RX Port 4 (B)
H WAAS RX Port 1 (H) – Crosschannel r ARINC TX Port 0B (A)
Receive
J WAAS RX Port 1 (L) – Crosschannel s ARINC TX Port 0B (B)
Receive
K WAAS Differential Timemark A t External Camera Video Synch Return
L WAAS Differential Timemark B u External Camera Video Synch
M v Ethernet Transmit (L)
N w ARINC TX Port 2A (A)
P Discrete In 9 (GND/Open) x ARINC TX Port 2A (B)
R Discrete In 8 (GND/Open) y ARINC TX Port 2B (A)
S Discrete In 10 (28 VDC/Open) z ARINC TX Port 2B (B)
T Discrete In 1 (GND/Open) AA ARINC TX Port 3 (A)
U External Camera Video Red BB ARINC TX Port 3 (B)
V External Camera Video Red Return CC Fuel Flow 4 In (H)
W External Camera Video Green DD Fuel Flow 4 In (L)
X External Camera Video Green Return EE ARINC RX Port 4 (A)
Y External Camera Video Blue FF ARINC RX Port 4 (B)
Z External Camera Video Blue Return GG ARINC RX Port 5 (A)
a Ethernet Transmit (H) HH ARINC RX Port 5 (B)
b Ethernet Receive (L) JJ ARINC RX Port 6 (A)
c ARINC TX Port 4 (A) KK ARINC RX Port 6 (B)
d ARINC TX Port 4 (B) LL ARINC RX Port 7 (A)
e WAAS Crosschannel Fail Discrete Out MM ARINC RX Port 7 (B)
f WAAS Crosschannel Nav Valid Monitor NN WAAS Crosschannel Vertical Deviation (H)
g WAAS Crosschannel Fail Discrete In PP WAAS Crosschannel Vertical Deviation (L)
h Crosschannel LOS 4 Monitor Back Ethernet Shield
shell
Page 325
34-60-67 8 July 2014
B. UNS-1Ew – All Digital (P/N 3017-XX-X21)
(1) Connector J1
A Fuel Flow 1 In (H) i Ground (Power Return)
B Fuel Flow 1 In (L) j 28 VDC Aircraft Bus
C Fuel Flow 2 In (H) k 5 VDC Keypad Lighting (See Note)
D Fuel Flow 2 In (L) m 28 VDC Keypad Lighting (See Note)
E Configuration Module Data I/O n Keypad Lighting Return
F Configuration Module Data Clock p RS-422 (A) (Receive from External CDU)
G Configuration Module Power q RS-422 (B) (Receive from External CDU)
H Configuration Module Power Return r UniLink Display Data RX (L)
J s ARINC RX Port 10 (B)
K 26 VAC Heading Reference t UniLink Display Data RX (H)
L 26 VAC Heading Reference Return u CSDB In Port 3 (A)
M ARINC RX Port 8 (B) v CSDB In Port 3 (B)
N ARINC RX Port 8 (A) w CSDB In Port 1 (A)
P Autopilot Reference (H) x CSDB In Port 1 (B)
R Autopilot Reference (L) y CSDB In Port 2 (A)
S z CSDB In Port 2 (B)
T RS-422 (A) (Transmit to External CDU) AA Discrete In 5 (GND/Open)
U RS-422 (B) (Transmit to External CDU) BB WAAS LOS Monitor
V Heading Valid Flag (28 V Discrete) CC Discrete In 6 (GND/Open)
W ARINC In Port 10 A DD Discrete In 4 (GND/Open)
X Synchro In Heading X EE FMS2 Discrete In (Ground = FMS #2)
Y Synchro In Heading Y FF FMS3 Discrete In (Ground = FMS #3)
Z Synchro In Heading Z GG Discrete In 7 (GND/Open)
a WAAS TX Port 1 (H) HH Heading Flag Input (28 VDC = True,
Open = Mag)
b WAAS TX Port 1 (L) JJ WAAS Crosschannel TX Port 0 (H)
c ARINC RX Port 1 (A) KK WAAS Crosschannel TX Port 0 (L)
d ARINC RX Port 1 (B) LL Discrete In 3 (GND/Open)
e ARINC RX Port 2 (A) MM Discrete In 2 (GND/Open)
f ARINC RX Port 2 (B) NN ARINC RX Port 12 (A)
g ARINC RX Port 3 (A) PP ARINC RX Port 12 (B)
h ARINC RX Port 3 (B)
NOTE: Use either 5 VDC or 28 VDC power for keypad lighting, but not both.
Page 326
34-60-67 8 July 2014
(2) Connector J2
C ARINC TX Port 1 (A) k LOS 4 Discrete
D ARINC TX Port 1 (B) m WAAS Monitor Receive (RS-232)
E RS-232 TX (Monitor Port) n WAAS Monitor Transmit (RS-232)
F RS-232 RX (Monitor Port) p ARINC TX Port 7 (B)
G Lab Use Only q Reserved
H Lab Use Only r ARINC RX Port 11 (B)
J RS-232 Chassis Ground s Reserved
K WAAS TX 1 (H) ARINC 743 Data t ARINC RX Port 11 (A)
L WAAS TX 1 (L) ARINC 743 Data u Reserved
M ARINC TX Port 2C (A) v ARINC RX Port 14 (A)
N ARINC TX Port 2C (B) w ARINC RX Port 9 (A)
P WAAS RX Port 0 (H) – Offside FMS Receive x ARINC TX Port 4A (A)
R WAAS RX Port 0 (L) – Offside FMS Receive y ARINC TX Port 4A (B)
S Discrete Out 4 (GND/Open) z ARINC TX Port 5 (A)
W Discrete Out 2 (GND/Open) DD ARINC TX Port 7 (A)
Z UniLink Display Data TX (H) GG ARINC RX Port 13 (A)
a CSDB TX Port 2 (A) HH ARINC RX Port 14 (B)
b CSDB TX Port 2 (B) JJ ARINC TX Port 6A (A)
c CSDB TX Port 1 (A) KK ARINC TX Port 6A (B)
d CSDB TX Port 1 (B)) LL ARINC TX Port 6B (B)
e ARINC TX Port 4B (A) MM ARINC TX Port 6B (A)
f ARINC TX Port 4B (B) NN ARINC RX Port 13 (B)
g ARINC TX Port 5 (B) PP ARINC RX Port 9 (B)
Page 327
34-60-67 8 July 2014
(3) Connector J3
B LOS 1 Discrete j WAAS Crosschannel Monitor 1 (H)
C LOS 2 Discrete k WAAS Crosschannel Monitor 1 (L)
E ARINC RX Port 15 (A) n Discrete Out 6 (GND/Open)
F ARINC RX Port 15 (B) p CSDB In Port 4 (A)
G Reserved q CSDB In Port 4 (B)
Receive
Receive
c KK ARINC RX Port 6 (B)
d LL ARINC RX Port 7 (A)
f WAAS Crosschannel Nav Valid Monitor NN WAAS Crosschannel Monitor 2 (H)
g WAAS Crosschannel Fail Discrete In PP WAAS Crosschannel Monitor 2 (L)
shell
Page 328
34-60-67 8 July 2014
C. UNS-1Ew – ASCB (P/N 3017-XX-X31)
(1) Connector J1
A Fuel Flow 1 In (H) i Ground (Power Return)
B Fuel Flow 1 In (L) j 28 VDC Aircraft Bus
C Fuel Flow 2 In (H) k 5 VDC Keypad Lighting (See Note)
D Fuel Flow 2 In (L) m 28 VDC Keypad Lighting (See Note)
E Configuration Module Data I/O n Keypad Lighting Return
F Configuration Module Data Clock p RS-422 (A) (Receive from External CDU)
G Configuration Module Power q RS-422 (B) (Receive from External CDU)
H Configuration Module Power Return r UniLink Display Data RX (L)
J s ASCB Discrete In 8
K 26 VAC Heading Reference t UniLink Display Data RX (H)
L 26 VAC Heading Reference Return u CSDB In Port 3 (A)
M ARINC RX Port 8 (B) v CSDB In Port 3 (B)
N ARINC RX Port 8 (A) w CSDB In Port 1 (A)
P Autopilot Reference (H) x CSDB In Port 1 (B)
R Autopilot Reference (L) y CSDB In Port 2 (A)
S z CSDB In Port 2 (B)
T RS-422 (A) (Transmit to External CDU) AA Discrete In 5 (GND/Open)
U RS-422 (B) (Transmit to External CDU) BB WAAS LOS Monitor
V Heading Valid Flag (28 V Discrete) CC Discrete In 6 (GND/Open)
W ARINC In Port 10 A DD Discrete In 4 (GND/Open)
X Synchro In Heading X EE FMS2 Discrete In (Ground = FMS #2)
Y Synchro In Heading Y FF FMS3 Discrete In (Ground = FMS #3)
Z Synchro In Heading Z GG Discrete In 7 (GND/Open)
a WAAS TX Port 1 (H) HH Heading Flag Input (28 VDC = True,
Open = Mag)
b WAAS TX Port 1 (L) JJ WAAS Crosschannel TX Port 0 (H)
c ARINC RX Port 1 (A) KK WAAS Crosschannel TX Port 0 (L)
d ARINC RX Port 1 (B) LL Discrete In 3 (GND/Open)
e ARINC RX Port 2 (A) MM Discrete In 2 (GND/Open)
f ARINC RX Port 2 (B) NN ASCB Discrete In 1
g ARINC RX Port 3 (A) PP ASCB Discrete In 2
h ARINC RX Port 3 (B)
NOTE: Use either 5 VDC or 28 VDC power for keypad lighting, but not both.
Page 329
34-60-67 8 July 2014
(2) Connector J2
C ARINC TX Port 1 (A) k LOS 4 Discrete
D ARINC TX Port 1 (B) m WAAS Monitor Receive (RS-232)
E RS-232 TX (Monitor Port) n WAAS Monitor Transmit (RS-232)
F RS-232 RX (Monitor Port) p ASCB Discrete Out 3 (GND/Open)
G Lab Use Only q Reserved
H Lab Use Only r ASCB Discrete Out 2 (28V/Open)
J RS-232 Chassis Ground s Reserved
K WAAS TX 1 (H) ARINC 743 Data t ASCB Discrete Out 1 (28V/Open)
L WAAS TX 1 (L) ARINC 743 Data u Reserved
M ARINC TX Port 2C (A) v ASCB B Data +
N ARINC TX Port 2C (B) w ASCB Discrete In 4
P WAAS RX Port 0 (H) – Offside FMS Receive x ASCB A Data +
R WAAS RX Port 0 (L) – Offside FMS Receive y ASCB A Data -
S Discrete Out 4 (GND/Open) z ASCB A Clock +
W Discrete Out 2 (GND/Open) DD ARINC TX Port 7 (A)
Z UniLink Display Data TX (H) GG ARINC RX Port 13 (A)
a CSDB TX Port 2 (A) HH ARINC RX Port 14 (B)
b CSDB TX Port 2 (B) JJ ARINC TX Port 6A (A)
c CSDB TX Port 1 (A) KK ARINC TX Port 6A (B)
d CSDB TX Port 1 (B)) LL ARINC TX Port 6B (B)
e ASCB Discrete In 5 MM ASCB Discrete In 7
f ASCB Discrete In 6 NN ASCB B Data -
g ASCB A Clock - PP ASCB Discrete In 3
NOTE: 1 Applicable to UNS-1Ew units with Mod 4.
Page 330
34-60-67 8 July 2014
(3) Connector J3
B LOS 1 Discrete j WAAS Crosschannel Monitor 1 (H)
C LOS 2 Discrete k WAAS Crosschannel Monitor 1 (L)
E ASCB B Clock + n Discrete Out 6 (GND/Open)
F ASCB B Clock - p CSDB In Port 4 (A)
G ASCB Discrete Out 4 (GND/Open) q CSDB In Port 4 (B)
Receive
Receive
c KK ARINC RX Port 6 (B)
d LL ARINC RX Port 7 (A)
f WAAS Crosschannel Nav Valid Monitor NN WAAS Crosschannel Monitor 2 (H)
g WAAS Crosschannel Fail Discrete In PP WAAS Crosschannel Monitor 2 (L)
shell
NOTE: 1 Applicable to UNS-1Ew units with Mod 4.
Page 331
34-60-67 8 July 2014
D. 5-Inch FPCDU Pin Assignment P/N 1018-X-XXX
J1 Connector
Pin Description
A Red
B Red Return
C Green
D Green Return
E Blue
F Blue return
G Sync
H Sync Return
J2 Connector
Pin Function
A CDU RX Data (H)
B CDU RX Data (L)
C CDU RX Data Shield
D
E +28 VDC Keypad Lighting
F Ground Keypad Lighting
G +5 VDC or 5 VAC Keypad Lighting
CAUTION: Use 5 V or 28 V power for keypad lighting but not both.
H
J CDU TX Data (H)
K CDU TX Data (L)
L CDU TX Data Shield
M +28 VDC Power Input
N
P Power +28 VDC Return
R Power On Control Output
J3 Connector
Pin Description
A
B RS-422 Display Data TX (H)
C RS-422 Display Data TX (L)
D Ground
E RS-422 Display Data RX (H)
F RS-422 Display Data RX (L)
G Remote (Repeater) CDU when grounded
H Ground
Page 332
34-60-67 8 July 2014
E. 4-Inch FPCDU Pin Assignment
(1) P/N 1117-XX and 1117-1-X0X (No Video or Graphics Capability)
J1 Connector
Pin Function
A CDU RX Data (H)
B CDU RX Data (L)
D #2 CDU Strap
H
J CDU TX Data (H)
K CDU TX Data (L)
N Ground
Page 333
34-60-67 8 July 2014
(2) 1117-2-X1X (With Video and Graphics Capability)
J1 Connector
Pin Function
A CDU RX Data (H)
B CDU RX Data (L)
D #2 CDU Strap
H
J CDU TX Data (H)
K CDU TX Data (L)
N Ground
J2 Connector
Pin Description
A Red Input
B Red Return
C Green Input
D Green Return
E Blue Input
F Blue Return
G Sync Input
H Sync Return
J3 Connector
Pin Description
A
B RS-422 Display Data TX (H)
C RS-422 Display Data TX (L)
D Ground
E RS-422 Display Data RX (H)
F RS-422 Display Data RX (L)
G Remote (Repeater) CDU when grounded
H Ground
Page 334
34-60-67 8 July 2014
F. LPV Monitor – Pin Assignment
(1) Connector – Top Plug
2A WAAS X-Channel Monitor (H) (Guidance 4H WAAS Discrete In X-Channel LOS Monitor
Bus 1
2B WAAS X-Channel Monitor (L) (Guidance 4J WAAS X-Channel Vertical Guidance Flag
Bus 1 Monitor
2C WAAS X-Channel Monitor (H) (Guidance 4K WAAS X-Channel Lateral Guidance Flag
Bus 2 Monitor
2D WAAS X-Channel Monitor (L) (Guidance 7F WAAS Monitor Return
Bus 2
2G WAAS X-Channel Lateral Deviation (H) 7G RS-232 WAAS Monitor Transmit
2H WAAS X-Channel Lateral Deviation Return 7H RS-232 WAAS Monitor Receive
2J WAAS X-Channel Vertical Deviation (H) 10A WAAS Differential Timemark A
2K WAAS X-Channel Vertical Deviation Return 10B WAAS Differential Timemark B
4D WAAS Form Factor Select 10J ARINC 429 WAAS Transmit 0 (A)
4E WAAS Discrete Out X-Channel Fail Out 10K ARINC 429 WAAS Transmit 0 (B)
4F WAAS SDI Select
(2) Connector – Middle Plug

4C WAAS Transmit 1B (H) – ARINC 743A Data 10F WAAS Receive 0 (H) – Offside FMS
4D WAAS Transmit 1B (L) – ARINC 743A Data 10G WAAS Receive 1 (H) – X-Channel Receive
8J WAAS Flight Data Recording – Lab Only 10H WAAS Receive 1 (L) – X-Channel Receive
8K WAAS Flight Data Recording – Lab Only 10J WAAS Transmit 1A (H) – ARINC 743A Data
10E WAAS Receive 0 (L) – Offside FMS 10K WAAS Transmit 1A (L) – ARINC 743A Data
(3) Connector – Bottom Plug

1 On Battery Annunciator Discrete Output 7 FMS Chassis Ground
2 +28 VDC Input 8 FMS DC Power Return
3 +28 VDC Battery Input 13 GPS Coax
4 Power Control
Page 335
34-60-67 8 July 2014
G. DTU-100 – Pin Assignment
(1) Connector – J1
A RS-422 (A) J Option Pin 1
B RS-422 (B) K Option Pin 2 (Not Used)
C Ethernet #0 RX (+) L Chassis Ground
D Ethernet #0 RX (-) M Power 28 VDC
E Ethernet #0 Shield N Aux Port RS-232 RX
F Ethernet #0 TX (+) P Power Return
G Ethernet #0 TX (-) R Aux Port RS-232 TX
H Option Pin 0
A Ethernet #1 RX (+) J Ethernet #3 RX (+)
B Ethernet #1 RX (-) K Ethernet #3 RX (-)
C Ethernet #1 TX (+) L Ethernet #3 TX (+)
D Ethernet #1 TX (-) M Not Used
E Ethernet #2 RX (+) N Ethernet #3 TX (-)
F Ethernet #2 RX (-) P Ethernet Shield
G Ethernet #2 TX (+) R Not Used
H Ethernet #2 TX (-)
Page 336
34-60-67 8 July 2014
H. SSDTU – Pin Assignment
A EIA-485 (Side A) (FMS 485 A) J
B EIA-485 (Side B) (FMS 485 B) K
C Ethernet #1 RX (+) L Chassis Ground
D Ethernet #1 RX (-) M SSDTU Power 28 VDC
E Ethernet #1 Shield N EIA-232 RX
F Ethernet #1 TX (+) P SSDTU Ground
G Ethernet #1 TX (-) R EIA-232 TX
H
1 Ethernet #3 RX (+) 29 Ethernet #8 Shield
2 Ethernet #3 TX (+) 30 Ethernet #5 Shield
3 31 Ethernet #5 TX (+)
4 Ethernet #2 RX (-) 32
5 33
7 Ethernet #3 TX (-) 35 Ethernet #8 TX (+)
8 Ethernet #4 TX (-) 36 Ethernet #8 RX (+)
9 Ethernet #4 TX (+) 37
10 Ethernet #2 TX (-) 38 Ethernet #5 RX (+)
11 Ethernet #2 RX (+) 39 Ethernet #5 TX (-)
12 40 Ethernet #7 RX (+)
13 Ethernet #3 Shield 41 Ethernet #7 RX (-)
14 42 Ethernet #7 Shield
16 Ethernet #4 RX (+) 44 Ethernet #6 Shield
17 45
18 Ethernet #2 TX (+) 46 Ethernet #5 RX (-)
19 Ethernet #2 Shield 47 Ethernet #7 TX (+)
20 48 Ethernet #7 TX (-)
21 49
22 50 Ethernet #6 TX (+)
23 Ethernet #4 Shield 51 Ethernet #6 RX (+)
24 52
25 53
26 54 Ethernet #6 TX (-)
27 Ethernet #8 TX (-) 55 Ethernet #6 RX (-)
28 Ethernet #8 RX (-)
Page 337
34-60-67 8 July 2014
4. UNS–1Ew Wiring
The following wiring diagrams represent the basic FMS wiring, including ARINC, discrete,
CSDB, analog and other inputs and outputs. The diagrams also include ancillary equipment
such as the FPCDU and Data Transfer Unit. For all other interfaces such as radar and radios,
refer to SBAS FMS SCN 1001/1101 Interface Manual, Report No. 34-60-71.
Wiring diagrams apply to all versions of the UNS-1Ew unless otherwise noted on the wiring
diagram. Reference to the Pin Identification Charts found later in this section will be helpful
in understanding the differences between FMS versions. There is also an FMS part number
matrix in the Equipment Specifications section of this manual, which will further aid in
understanding FMS differences.
The information, drawings and wiring diagrams contained in this manual are intended as a
reference for engineering planning only. The drawings and wiring diagrams contained herein
do not represent any specific STC or Form 337 aircraft installation. It is the installer’s
responsibility to compose installation drawings specific to the aircraft. This manual and the
drawings contained herein may not be used as a substitute for an STC or Form 337 drawing
package.
Page 338
34-60-67 8 July 2014
A. UNS-1Ew Configurations
(1) UNS-1Ew Power and Configuration Module
UNS-1Ew 3017-XX-XX1
P1
5VDC OR 5VAC 4
H k 20
PANEL LIGHTING
KEYPAD m 20 28 V PANEL LIGHTING
4 H 4
LIGHTING
L n 20
28 VDC IN j 20 5 28 VDC AIRCRAFT BUS
DC RETURN i 20
GND H 24 AWG BROWN

CONFIGURATION
+5 VDC G 24 AWG RED MODULE
CONFIG P/N 30171
MODULE DATA CLK F 24 AWG YELLOW
3
DATA I/O E 24 AWG BLUE
P2
ANN DISC #5 OUT
HDG T 5
(GND/OPEN)
ANNUNCIATOR
MSG U
OUTPUT
REMOTE FMS
ANN DISC #2 OUT 5 ANNUNCIATORS
(GND/OPEN) WPT W
IF INSTALLED
ANN DISC #3 OUT (GND = ON)
SXTK V 5
(GND/OPEN)
ANN DISC #4 OUT 5
APRCH S
(GND/OPEN)
SENSOR POWER ON FF TO SENSOR POWER CONTROL

CONTROL OUTPUT INPUTS OF UNS SENSORS (20 mA MAX)
P3
REMOTE FMS
ANN DISC #6 OUT n 6 ANNUNCIATOR
INTEG
(GND/OPEN) IF INSTALLED
(GND = ON)
WAAS GPS ANTENNA

P/N 10708
NOTES:
1. ALL WIRING TO BE 22 A.W.G. UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED.
2. DO NOT 'DAISY CHAIN' SHIELD GROUNDS.
3 THE CONFIGURATION MODULE IS PROGRAMMED THROUGH THE NCU AND IS MOUNTED ON, AND BECOMES PART
OF, THE CONNECTOR STRAIN RELIEF. WIRES SHOWN ARE PART OF THE CONFIGURATION MODULE.
4 USE EITHER 5 V OR 28 VDC, NOT BOTH.
5 REMOTE ANNUNCIATOR DISCRETES ARE CONFIGURABLE ON P2 PINS S, T, V & W. DEFAULT CONFIGURATION SHOWN.
6 DISCRETES ARE CONFIGURABLE WITH NO DEFAULT. REFER TO THE WAAS FMS CONFIGURATION MANUAL.
CAUTION: IT IS THE INSTALLER'S RESPONSIBILITY TO VERIFY PIN NUMBERS ON EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURED BY OTHER THAN UNIVERSAL
AVIONICS SYSTEMS CORPORATION.
Page 339
34-60-67 8 July 2014
(2) Dual SBAS FMS – Analog Configuration (P/N 3017-XX-X11) (page 1 of 2)
FMS #1 FMS #2
UNS-1Ew 3017-XX-X11 UNS-1Ew 3017-XX-X11
P1 P1
WAAS LOS MONITOR BB BB WAAS LOS MONITOR
P2 P2
APPROACH APPROACH S APPROACH ANNUNCIATOR

APPROACH ANNUNCIATOR S
ANNUNCIATOR ANNUNCIATOR DISCRETE OUT #4
DISCRETE OUT #4
LATERAL DEVIATION VALID DD HSI #1 HSI #2 DD LATERAL DEVIATION VALID
FLAG 28 V DISCRETE OUT FLAG28 V DISCRETE OUT
VERTICAL DEVIATION VALID JJ VERTICAL DEVIATION VALID

JJ HSI #1 HSI #2
FLAG28 V DISCRETE OUT FLAG 28 V DISCRETE OUT
h WAAS CROSSCHANNEL
VERTICAL VALID MONITOR
WAAS CROSSCHANNEL h
H GG GG H
VERTICAL DEVIATION HSI #1 HSI #2 VERTICAL DEVIATION
L HH HH L
H KK KK H
LATERAL DEVIATION HSI #1 HSI #2 LATERAL DEVIATION
L LL LL L
P3
NN H WAAS CROSSCHANNEL
VERTICAL DEVIATION
PP L MONITOR #2
j H WAAS CROSSCHANNEL
LATERAL DEVIATION
k L MONITOR #1
P3
WAAS CROSSCHANNEL H NN
VERTICAL DEVIATION
MONITOR #2 L PP
WAAS CROSSCHANNEL H j
LATERAL DEVIATION
MONITOR #1 L k
f WAAS CROSSCHANNEL
LATERAL VALID MONITOR
WAAS CROSSCHANNEL f
B LPV LPV B LEVEL OF SERVICE #1

LEVEL OF SERVICE #1
ANNUNCIATOR ANNUNCIATOR
2 2
LNAV/VNAV
LNAV/VNAV C LEVEL OF SERVICE #2
LEVEL OF SERVICE #2 C ANNUNCIATOR
ANNUNCIATOR
2 2
LNAV LNAV
LEVEL OF SERVICE #3 D ANNUNCIATOR D LEVEL OF SERVICE #3
ANNUNCIATOR
NOTES:
1. FOR SBAS INSTALLATIONS, FMS SYSTEMS MUST BE WIRED AS ILLUSTRATED.
2 USE DIODE P/N IN2222A.
CAUTION: IT IS THE INSTALLER'S RESPONSIBILITY TO VERIFY PIN NUMBERS ON EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURED

BY OTHER THAN UNIVERSAL AVIONICS SYSTEMS CORPORATION.
Page 340
34-60-67 8 July 2014
Dual SBAS FMS – Analog Configuration (P/N 3017-XX-X11) (page 2 of 2)
FMS #1 FMS #2
P1 P1
A JJ JJ A
WAAS CROSSCHANNEL WAAS CROSSCHANNEL
OUTPUT TX PORT #0 B KK OUTPUT TX PORT #0
KK B
P2 P2
A
3 ARINC 429 RX PORT
B
A K GPS/SBAS GPS/SBAS K A
WAAS ARINC 743A DATA WAAS ARINC 743A DATA
TO TAWS, TO TAWS,
TX PORT #1 L TX PORT #1
B VISION-1, ETC. VISION-1, ETC. L B
A
ARINC 429 RX PORT 3
B
A M P A
WAAS OFFSIDE FMS
ARINC 429 TX PORT #2C INPUT RX PORT #0
B N R B
A P M A
WAAS OFFSIDE FMS ARINC 429 TX PORT #2C
INPUT RX PORT #0 N B
B R
P3
H A
WAAS CROSSCHANNEL
P3 INPUT RX PORT #1
J B
A H
WAAS CROSSCHANNEL
INPUT RX PORT #1
B J
WAAS DIFFERENTIAL K K WAAS DIFFERENTIAL

TIMEMARK A 2 2 TIMEMARK A
WAAS DIFFERENTIAL L L WAAS DIFFERENTIAL
TIMEMARK B TIMEMARK B
e WAAS CROSSCHANNEL FAIL
WAAS CROSSCHANNEL FAIL g
DISCRETE OUT
DISCRETE IN
e g WAAS CROSSCHANNEL FAIL
WAAS CROSSCHANNEL FAIL
DISCRETE IN
DISCRETE OUT
NOTES:
2 DIFFERENTIAL TIMEMARK IS USED IN SPECIAL MISSIONS APPLICATIONS WHERE SYNCHRONIZATION

WITH EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT IS DESIRED.
Page 341
34-60-67 8 July 2014
(3) Dual SBAS FMS – Digital Configuration (P/N 3017-XX-X21) (page 1 of 2)
FMS #1 FMS #2
P1 P1
WAAS LOS MONITOR BB BB WAAS LOS MONITOR
4 P2 P2 4
LATERAL AND VERTICAL A A A A LATERAL AND VERTICAL

PRIMARY NAV PRIMARY NAV
DEVIATION DEVIATION
DISPLAY DISPLAY
ARINC 429 TX PORT #0A B B B B ARINC 429 TX PORT #0A
A
2 ARINC 429 RX PORT
B
A K GPS/SBAS GPS/SBAS K A
WAAS TX PORT #1 WAAS TX PORT #1
TO TAWS, TO TAWS,
ARINC 743A DATA L ARINC 743A DATA
B VISION-1, ETC. VISION-1, ETC. L B
A
ARINC 429 RX PORT 2
B
APPROACH APPROACH
APPROACH ANNUNCIATOR S S APPROACH ANNUNCIATOR
DISCRETE OUT #4 DISCRETE OUT #4
P3 P3
B LPV LPV B LEVEL OF SERVICE #1

LEVEL OF SERVICE #1
3 3
LNAV/VNAV LNAV/VNAV LEVEL OF SERVICE #2
LEVEL OF SERVICE #2 C C
3 3
LNAV LNAV
LEVEL OF SERVICE #3 D D LEVEL OF SERVICE #3
4
A r j A
ARINC 429 TX PORT #0B WAAS CROSSCHANNEL
B s k B INPUT MONITOR #1
4
WAAS CROSSCHANNEL A j r A
INPUT MONITOR #1 ARINC 429 TX PORT #0B
B k s B
NOTES:
2 MULTIPLE CONFIGURABLE PORTS. REFER TO THE SBAS FMS CONFIGURATION MANUAL FOR DETAILS.
4 ARINC 429 TX PORT #0 AND #7 MUST BE CONFIGURED AS HS429, LS429, IC-600-01, IC615-01, HS429 MOD 2, HS429 MOD 3, 571 LRN, P4-01 IOC,
P4-02 IOC, P4-03 IOC, P4-04 IOC, P4-05 IOC, LS429 MOD 1, UNS HS429-1, BAE-146, AN HS429-1, PL21-01, IMS-01, IMS-02A, IMS-02B.
CAUTION: IT IS THE INSTALLER'S RESPONSIBILITY TO VERIFY PIN NUMBERS ON EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURED BY OTHER THAN UNIVERSAL AVIONICS
SYSTEMS CORPORATION.
Page 342
34-60-67 8 July 2014
Dual SBAS FMS – Digital Configuration (P/N 3017-XX-X21) (page 2 of 2)
FMS #1 FMS #2
P1 P1
A JJ JJ A
OUTPUT TX PORT #0 KK OUTPUT TX PORT #0
B KK B
P2 P2
A M P A
WAAS OFFSIDE FMS
B N R B
A P M A
INPUT RX PORT #0 N B
B R
P3
H A
WAAS CROSSCHANNEL
P3 INPUT RX PORT #1
J B
A H
WAAS CROSSCHANNEL
INPUT RX PORT #1
B J

e WAAS CROSSCHANNEL FAIL

DISCRETE OUT
DISCRETE IN
e g WAAS CROSSCHANNEL FAIL
WAAS CROSSCHANNEL FAIL
DISCRETE IN
DISCRETE OUT
NOTES:
2 DIFFERENTIAL TIMEMARK IS USED IN SPECIAL MISSIONS APPLICATIONS WHERE SYNCHRONIZATION

WITH EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT IS DESIRED.
Page 343
34-60-67 8 July 2014
(4) Dual SBAS FMS – EFI-890 Digital Configuration (P/N 3017-XX-X21)
FMS #1 FMS #2
P2 P2
LATERAL AND VERTICAL EFI-890 LATERAL AND VERTICAL
H A EFI-890 A H
4 DEVIATION PRIMARY NAV DEVIATION
PRIMARY NAV 4
LOS ANNUNCIATION B DISPLAY LOS ANNUNCIATION
L DISPLAY B L
ARINC 429 TX PORT #0A ARINC 429 TX PORT #0A
H
2 ARINC 429 RX PORT
L
H K GPS/SBAS GPS/SBAS K H
TO TAWS, TO TAWS,
ARINC 743A DATA L L ARINC 743A DATA
VISION-1, ETC. VISION-1, ETC. L L
H
ARINC 429 RX PORT 2
L
H M P H
WAAS OFFSIDE FMS
L N R L
H P M H
INPUT RX PORT #0 N L
L R
P1 P1
WAAS CROSSCHANNEL BB BB WAAS CROSSCHANNEL
LOS MONITOR LOS MONITOR
H JJ JJ H
WAAS CROSSCHANNEL
WAAS CROSSCHANNEL
OUTPUT TX PORT #0
OUTPUT TX PORT #0 L KK KK L
P3
B WAAS LOS #1
H H
WAAS CROSSCHANNEL
P3 J L INPUT RX PORT #1
WAAS LOS #1 B
H H
WAAS CROSSCHANNEL
INPUT RX PORT #1 L J

WAAS CROSSCHANNEL FAIL e g WAAS CROSSCHANNEL FAIL
DISCRETE OUT DISCRETE IN
WAAS CROSSCHANNEL FAIL g e WAAS CROSSCHANNEL FAIL
DISCRETE IN DISCRETE OUT
4
4 r
H j H
WAAS CROSSCHANNEL
ARINC 429 TX PORT #0B
L s k L MONITOR #1
j r H
H
WAAS CROSSCHANNEL ARINC 429 TX PORT #0B
MONITOR #1 k s L
L
NOTES:
3 DIFFERENTIAL TIMEMARK IS USED IN SPECIAL MISSIONS APPLICATIONS WHERE SYNCHRONIZATION WITH EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT IS DESIRED.
Page 344
34-60-67 8 July 2014
(5) LPV Monitor Power Installation (P/N 3116-52-1110)
LPV MONITOR
P/N 3116-52-1110
TP
5 WAAS FORM 4D
FACTOR SELECT
6 WAAS SDI SELECT #3 4F
BP
FMS ON BATTERY 1 4
ANNUNCIATOR OUT
28 VDC IN 2 16 5 28 VDC AIRCRAFT BUS
28 VDC BATTERY IN 3 16 5 EMERGENCY BATTERY IF INSTALLED 3
POWER CONTROL 4 20
CHASSIS GND 7 16
POWER RETURN 8 16
WAAS GPS COAX 13
WAAS GPS ANTENNA

P/N 10708
NOTES:
1. ALL WIRING TO BE 22 A.W.G. UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED.

2. DO NOT 'DAISY CHAIN' SHIELD GROUNDS.
3 BATTERY INPUT (28 VDC) APPLIES ONLY IF EMERGENCY BATTERY IS USED.
4 SHOULD ONLY BE CONNECTED AND CONFIGURED IF EMERGENCY BATTERY IS USED.
5 PIN TP 4D MUST BE CONNECTED TO GROUND TO ACTIVATE LP/LPV CAPABILITY.
6 SDI VALUE FOR THE ARINC 743A BUS

PIN TP 4F - GROUNDED, SDI = 1
PIN TP 4F - OPEN, SDI = 2
Page 345
34-60-67 8 July 2014
(6) Single SBAS FMS (Analog Configuration) (3017-XX-X11) to LPV Monitor
FMS #1 LPV MONITOR
2 2
UNS-1Ew 3017-XX-X11 P/N 3116-52-1110
P1 MP
A JJ 10G A
OUTPUT TX PORT #0 KK 10H B INPUT RX PORT #1
B
P2
A K GPS/SBAS GPS/SBAS 4C A
TO TAWS, TO TAWS,
ARINC 743A DATA L ARINC 743A DATA
B VISION-1, ETC. VISION-1, ETC. 4D B
A
ARINC 429 RX PORT 3
B
A M 10F A
WAAS OFFSIDE FMS
ARINC 429 TX PORT #2 INPUT RX PORT #0
B N 10E B
H GG
VERTICAL DEVIATION HSI #1
L HH
H KK
LATERAL DEVIATION HSI #1
TP
L LL
2J H WAAS VERTICAL
DEVIATION MONITOR #2
2K L
2G H
WAAS LATERAL
2H DEVIATION MONITOR #1
L
LATERAL DEVIATION VALID DD HSI #1
FLAG 28V DISCRETE OUT 4K WAAS CROSSCHANNEL
VERTICAL DEVIATION VALID JJ HSI #1
FLAG 28V DISCRETE OUT 4J WAAS CROSSCHANNEL
P3
4E WAAS CROSSCHANNEL FAIL
DISCRETE OUT
DISCRETE IN
4H WAAS CROSSCHANNEL
LPV LOS MONITOR
LEVEL OF SERVICE #1 B
ANNUNCIATOR
5
LNAV/VNAV
LEVEL OF SERVICE #2 C
ANNUNCIATOR
5
LNAV
LEVEL OF SERVICE #3 D
ANNUNCIATOR
A H 10J A
INPUT RX PORT #1 OUTPUT TX PORT #0
B J 10K B
WAAS DIFFERENTIAL K
4 TIMEMARK A
WAAS DIFFERENTIAL L
TIMEMARK B
NOTES:
2 THE PRECISION APPROACH SUBSYSTEM (PAS) SCN IS USED BY THE SBAS FMS MUST BE THE SAME AS THAT OF THE LPV MONITOR,
OTHERWISE LPV APPROACH WILL NOT FUNCTION. THE PAS SCN IS INDICATED ON THE EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION PLATE.
Page 346
34-60-67 8 July 2014
(7) Single SBAS FMS (Digital Configuration) (3017-XX-X21) to LPV Monitor
FMS #1 LPV MONITOR 2
2
UNS-1Ew 3017-XX-X21 P/N 3116-52-1110
P1 MP
A JJ 10G A
OUTPUT TX PORT #0 INPUT RX PORT #1
B KK 10H B
P2
A K GPS/SBAS GPS/SBAS 4C A
WAAS ARINC 743A DATA WAAS ARINC 743A DATA
TO TAWS, TO TAWS,
TX PORT #1 L TX PORT #1
B VISION-1, ETC. VISION-1, ETC. 4D B
A
ARINC 429 RX PORT 3
B
A M 10F A
WAAS OFFSIDE FMS
ARINC 429 TX PORT #2 INPUT RX PORT #0
B N 10E B
6
A DD
ARINC 429 TX PORT #7 PRIMARY NAV
GUIDANCE BUS #2 B p DISPLAY #2 TP
2C A WAAS CROSSCHANNEL
INPUT MONITOR #2
2D B RX PORT #3
2A A WAAS CROSSCHANNEL
INPUT MONITOR #1
2B B RX PORT #2
P3
6
A r
ARINC 429 TX PORT #0B PRIMARY NAV
GUIDANCE BUS #1 B s DISPLAY #1
WAAS CROSSCHANNEL FAIL g 4E WAAS CROSSCHANNEL FAIL

DISCRETE IN DISCRETE OUT
4H WAAS CROSSCHANNEL
LOS MONITOR
LEVEL OF SERVICE #1 B LPV ANNUNCIATOR
5
LEVEL OF SERVICE #2 C LNAV/VNAV ANNUNCIATOR
5
LEVEL OF SERVICE #3 D LNAV ANNUNCIATOR
A H 10J A
INPUT RX PORT #1 10K B OUTPUT TX PORT#0
B J
WAAS DIFFERENTIAL K
TIMEMARK A 4
WAAS DIFFERENTIAL L
TIMEMARK B
NOTES:
2 THE PRECISION APPROACH SUBSYSTEM (PAS) SCN IS USED BY THE SBAS FMS MUST BE THE SAME AS THAT OF THE LPV MONITOR,
OTHERWISE LPV APPROACH WILL NOT FUNCTION. THE PAS SCN IS INDICATED ON THE EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION PLATE.
Page 347
34-60-67 8 July 2014
(8) 5-Inch FPCDU
5-INCH FPCDU
UNS-1Ew 3017-XX-XX1 P/N 1018-X-XXX
J1 J2
H T A H
CDU DATA TX CDU DATA RX
RS422 B
L U L
2 2 C
H p J H
CDU DATA RX CDU DATA TX
RS422
L q K L
L
J2
FMS POWER CONTROL IN FF R POWER ON CONTROL OUT
1
AIRCRAFT +28 VDC POWER 2 20 M 28V POWER INPUT
20 P POWER RETURN
3 28 VDC 20 E H
20 F L FPCDU LIGHTING
5 VDC
3 OR 20 G H
5 VAC
J1
A RED
B RED RETURN
C GREEN
4
D GREEN RETURN
VIDEO
E BLUE
F BLUE RETURN
G SYNC
H SYNC RETURN
NOTES:
1 USE TRANSORB FOR ADDITIONAL SPIKE PROTECTION (TRANSORB P/N = 1N6284A)
2 DO NOT 'DAISY CHAIN' SHIELD GROUNDS.
3 USE EITHER 5 VDC OR 28 VDC, NOT BOTH.
4 VIDEO IS APPLICABLE ONLY TO 5-INCH FPCDU P/N 1018-2-XXX.
CAUTION: IT IS THE INSTALLER'S RESPONSIBILITY TO VERIFY PIN NUMBERS ON EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURED BY OTHER THAN
UNIVERSAL AVIONICS SYSTEMS CORPORATION.
Page 348
34-60-67 8 July 2014
(9) 4-Inch Flat Panel CDU P/N 1117-1-XXX
4-INCH FPCDU
P/N 1117-XX or
UNS-1Ew 3017-XX-XX1 P/N 1117-1-XXX
J1 J1
H T A H
CDU DATA TX CDU DATA RX
RS422
L U B L
2 2 C
H p J H
CDU DATA RX
CDU DATA TX
RS422
L q K L
L
J2
FMS POWER CONTROL IN FF R POWER ON CONTROL OUT
1
AIRCRAFT +28 VDC POWER 20 M 28V POWER INPUT
2
20 P POWER RETURN
3 28 VDC 20 E H
20 F L FPCDU LIGHTING 3
5 VDC
3 OR 20 G H
5 VAC
NOTES:
1 USE TRANSORB FOR ADDITIONAL SPIKE PROTECTION (TRANSORB P/N = 1N6284A)
2 DO NOT 'DAISY CHAIN' SHIELD GROUNDS.
3 USE EITHER 5 VDC OR 28 VDC, NOT BOTH.
Page 349
34-60-67 8 July 2014
(10) DTU-100
DTU 100
(P/N 1406-01-X)
P1
H OPTION PIN 0
1
FMS #1 J OPTION PIN 1
UNS-1Ew P/N 3017-XX-XX1
P3 L CHASSIS GROUND
3 20
H a C H
ETHERNET ETHERNET
TX v RX CH0
L D L
H A F H
ETHERNET ETHERNET
RX TX CH0
L b G L
E SHIELD
ETHERNET SHIELD 2
20 P DC RETURN
28 VDC M 28 VDC IN
AIRCRAFT BUS 1
P2
A H ETHERNET
RX CH1
B L
CONNECT TO
FMS #2
IF INSTALLED C H
ETHERNET
TX CH1
D L
E H
ETHERNET
RX CH2
F L
CONNECT TO
FMS #3
IF INSTALLED G H ETHERNET
TX CH2
H L
J H ETHERNET
RX CH3
K L
L H ETHERNET
TX CH3
N L
NOTES:
P ETHERNET SHIELD
1 INTERFACE PIN 0 PIN 1
RS422 ONLY GND OPEN
ETHERNET ONLY OPEN GND
RS422 & ETHERNET GND GND
2 CONNECT ETHERNET SHIELD TO BACKSHELL OF P3.
3 ETHERNET CABLE PER ARINC 626 (10 BASE-T FOR AVIONICS USE)
P/N ECS 392404 OR EQUIVALENT.
CAUTION: IT IS THE INSTALLERS RESPONSIBILITY TO VERIFY PIN NUMBERS ON EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURED BY OTHER THAN
Page 350
34-60-67 8 July 2014
(11) Portable DTU-100
FMS #1
UNS-1Ew P/N 3017-XX-XX1 PORTABLE DTU 100
BULKHEAD (P/N 1407-01-1)
P3 CONNECTOR 1
P1
3
H a 9 9 C H
ETHERNET
ETHERNET RX CH0
TX L v 8 8 D L
6 6 F H
H A
ETHERNET
ETHERNET TX CH0
RX 7 7 G L
L b
E SHIELD
ETHERNET SHIELD 2 5 5
1 1 A H RS-422
DATA
2 2 B L
H OPTION PIN 0
4
J OPTION PIN 1
12 12 P DC RETURN
20 11 11 L CHASSIS GROUND
28 VDC 20 M 28 VDC IN
AIRCRAFT BUS 1 13 13
BULKHEAD
CONNECTOR
A A A H
ETHERNET
RX CH1
CONNECT TO B B B L
FMS #2
IF INSTALLED C C C H
ETHERNET
TX CH1
D D D L
E E E H ETHERNET
RX CH2
CONNECT TO F F F L
FMS #3
IF INSTALLED G G G H ETHERNET
TX CH2
H H H L
J J J H
ETHERNET
RX CH3
K K K L
L L L H ETHERNET
TX CH3
N N N L
P P P ETHERNET SHIELD
NOTES:
1 THE DASHED LINES BETWEEN THE PORTABLE DTU AND P1 AND P2 CONNECTORS REPRESENT A WIRING HARNESS
WHICH IS PART OF THEPORTABLE DTU
3 ETHERNET CABLE PER ARINC 626 (10 BASE-T FOR AVIONICS USE)
P/N ECS 392404 OR EQUIVALENT.
4 INTERFACE PIN 0 PIN 1

RS422 ONLY GND OPEN
ETHERNET ONLY OPEN GND
RS422 & ETHERNET GND GND
Page 351
34-60-67 8 July 2014
(12) SSDTU Installation and DTU-100 Replacement
SSDTU
(P/N 1408-00-X)
6 P1
A EIA-485 SIDE A
FMS #1 B EIA-485 SIDE B

P3 L CHASSIS GROUND
20
1 2
+ a C +
ETHERNET ETHERNET
TX RX CH1
- v D -
+ A F +
ETHERNET ETHERNET
RX TX CH1
- b G -
E SHIELD
ETHERNET SHIELD 3
20 P DC RETURN
28 VDC M 28 VDC IN
AIRCRAFT BUS 1
P2
1 2 5
11 +
ETHERNET
RX CH2
P2 4 -
1 2 5
51 + 18 +
ETHERNET ETHERNET
RX CH6 TX CH2
55 - 10 -
50 19 SHIELD
+
ETHERNET
TX CH6 1 +
54 - ETHERNET
RX CH3
6 -
44 SHIELD
40 + 2 +
ETHERNET ETHERNET
RX CH7 TX CH3
41 - 7 -
47 13 SHIELD
+
ETHERNET
TX CH7 16 +
48 - ETHERNET
RX CH4
15 -
42 SHIELD
36 + 9 +
ETHERNET ETHERNET
RX CH8 TX CH4
28 - 8 -
35 23 SHIELD
+
ETHERNET
TX CH8 38 +
27 - ETHERNET
RX CH5
46 -
29 SHIELD
31 +
ETHERNET
TX CH5
39 -
30 SHIELD
NOTES:
1 USE ETHERNET CABLE ECS P/N 392404 OR THERMAX/CDT P/N 956-426 OR EQUIVALENT.
2 THE EXPOSED UNSHIELDED ETHERNET WIRE BETWEEN THE SHIELD AND THE CIRCULAR CONNECTOR SHOULD BE LESS THAN
0.5 INCHES LONG.
REPLACING A DTU-100 WITH AN SSDTU:

4. ETHERNET PORTS ON THE DTU-100 ARE NUMBERED ZERO(0) THRU THREE (3). PORTS ON THE SSDTU ARE NUMBERED ONE (1) THRU EIGHT (8).
5 TO HAVE ETHERNET PORTS TWO (2) THRU EIGHT (8) AVAILABLE WHEN REPLACING A DTU-100 WITH AN SSDTU, ADDITIONAL
WIRING MUST BE ADDED FOR PORTS FOUR (4) THRU EIGHT(8) AND THE DTU-100 P2 CONNECTOR MUST BE REPLACED WITH
CONNECTOR PART NUMBER 83000255 WHICH IS INCLUDED IN INSTALLATION KIT K12079-1.
6 WHEN REPLACING A DTU-100 WITH AN SSDTU, NO CHANGES ARE REQUIRED TO THE PLUG P1 OR WIRING.
Page 352
34-60-67 8 July 2014
(13) Portable SSDTU
FMS #1 PORTABLE SSDTU
UNS-1Ew P/N 3017-XX-XX1 J1 BULKHEAD HARNESS (P/N 1409-00-2)
P3 CONNECTOR P/N 81304072 P1
3 4
+ a 9 9 C +
ETHERNET ETHERNET
TX RX CH1
- v 8 8 D -
+ A 6 6 F +
ETHERNET ETHERNET
RX TX CH1
- b 7 7 G -
ETHERNET SHIELD 2 5 5 E SHIELD
1 1 A A
EIA-485 DATA
2 2 B B
12 12 P DC RETURN
28 VDC 20 13 M 28 VDC IN
AIRCRAFT BUS 1 13
J2 BULKHEAD HARNESS
CONNECTOR P/N 81140821 P2
11 11 11 +
ETHERNET
3 RX CH2
4 4 4 -
J2 BULKHEAD
3 4 CONNECTOR P2
4 18 18 18 +
ETHERNET
51 51 TX CH2
51 + 10 10 10 -
ETHERNET
RX CH6
55 55 55 - 19 19 19 SHIELD #2
50 50 50 + 1 1 1 +
ETHERNET ETHERNET
TX CH6 RX CH3
54 54 54 - 6 6 6 -
44 44 44 SHIELD #6 2 2 2 +
ETHERNET
40 40 40 TX CH3
+ 7 7 7 -
ETHERNET
RX CH7
41 41 41 - 13 13 13 SHIELD #3
47 47 47 + 16 16 16 +
ETHERNET ETHERNET
TX CH7 RX CH4
48 48 48 - 15 15 15 -
42 42 42 SHIELD #7 9 9 9 +
ETHERNET
36 36 36 TX CH4
+ 8 8 8 -
ETHERNET
RX CH8
28 28 28 - 23 23 23 SHIELD #4
35 35 35 + 38 38 38 +
ETHERNET ETHERNET
TX CH8 RX CH5
27 27 27 - 46 46 46 -
29 29 29 SHIELD #8 31 31 31 +
ETHERNET
TX CH5
39 39 39 -
30 30 30 SHIELD #5
NOTES:
1. THE DASHED LINES BETWEEN THE PORTABLE DTU AND P1 AND P2 CONNECTORS REPRESENT A WIRING HARNESS
WHICH IS PART OF THE PORTABLE DTU.
4 THE EXPOSED UNSHIELDED ETHERNET WIRE BETWEEN THE SHIELD AND THE CIRCULAR CONNECTOR SHOULD BE
LESS THAN 0.5 INCHES LONG.
Page 353
34-60-67 8 July 2014
(14) Portable SSDTU (Portable DTU-100 Retrofit)
FMS #1
UNS-1Ew P/N 3017-XX-XX1 HARNESS PORTABLE SSDTU
J1 BULKHEAD (P/N 1409-00-2)
P3 CONNECTOR 4 P/N 81304072 P1
2 3
+ a 9 9 C +
ETHERNET ETHERNET
TX RX CH1
- v 8 8 D -
+ A 6 6 F +
ETHERNET ETHERNET
RX TX CH1
- b 7 7 G -
ETHERNET SHIELD 5 5 5 E SHIELD
1 1 A H
EIA-485 DATA
2 2 B L
12 12 P DC RETURN
28 VDC 20 13 M 28 VDC IN
AIRCRAFT BUS 1 13
J2 BULKHEAD HARNESS
CONNECTOR 4 P/N 81140811 P2
A A 11 +
ETHERNET
RX CH2
B B 4 -
C C 18 +
ETHERNET
TX CH2
D D 10 -
19 SHIELD #2
E E 1 +
ETHERNET
RX CH3
F F 6 -
G G 2 +
ETHERNET
TX CH3
H H 7 -
13 SHIELD #3
J J 16 +
ETHERNET
RX CH4
K K 15 -
L L 9 +
ETHERNET
TX CH4
N N 8 -
23 SHIELD #4
P P
NOTES:
1. THE DASHED LINES BETWEEN THE PORTABLE SSDTU AND P1 AND P2 CONNECTORS REPRESENT A WIRING HARNESS
WHICH IS PART OF THE PORTABLE SSDTU.
3 THE EXPOSED UNSHIELDED ETHERNET WIRE BETWEEN THE SHIELD AND THE CIRCULAR CONNECTOR SHOULD BE
LESS THAN 0.5 INCHES LONG.
4 THE PORTABLE SSDTU MAY BE USED IN PLACE OF THE PORTABLE DTU BY USING WIRING HARNESS P/N 81304072 TO
CONNECT J1 AND P/N 81140811 TO CONNECT J2 OF THE SSDTU TO BULKHEAD CONNECTORS USED FOR THE PORTABLE
DTU. USING THE SSDTU IN THIS CONFIGURATION LIMITS THE ETHERNET PORTS TO #1-4, PORTS #5-7 ARE NOT AVAILABLE
IN THIS CONFIGURATION.
Page 354
34-60-67 8 July 2014
(15) Compass, Heading and Fuel Flow – Analog Configuration (P/N 3017-XX-X11)
UNS-1Ew P/N 3017-XX-X11
P1
X X #1 COMPASS SYSTEM
SYNCHRO HEADING Y
Y
INPUT
Z Z
+28 HDG VALID INPUT V
HEADING FLAG HH
INPUT SELECT
TRUE = 28VDC
MAG = OPEN
H M 1 26 VAC AIRCRAFT BUS

26 VAC
INSTR REF L N
H K
HEADING REF
L L
H P 1 26 VAC AIRCRAFT BUS

26 VAC
A/P REF L R
P3
H E
PITCH CMD
OUTPUT
L F VNAV
PITCH VALID G
DISCRETE OUT 28 VDC
P2
FD/AP COMPUTER
STEERING VALID OUT CC
28 VDC/OPEN
H AA 1
ROLL STRG OUTPUT
L BB
P1
H A
#1 #1 FUEL FLOW
L B
H C
#2 #2 FUEL FLOW
L D
FUEL
FLOW P2
INPUTS
H i
#3 #3 FUEL FLOW
L j
P3
H CC
#4 #4 FUEL FLOW
L DD
NOTES:
1 IT IS RECOMMENDED THAT, ON LEARJET 30 SERIES AIRCRAFT, WITH JET FC200 AUTOPILOT, A STEERING INTERFACE
UNIT (SIU), P/N 92-7001-1, BE INSTALLED. THIS ALLOWS FULL FMS ROLL STEERING CAPABILITIES TO BE USED BY THE AUTOPILOT.
CAUTION: IT IS THE INSTALLER'S RESPONSIBILITY TO VERIFY PIN NUMBERS ON EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURED BY

OTHER THAN UNIVERSAL AVIONICS SYSTEMS CORPORATION.
Page 355
34-60-67 8 July 2014
(16) Compass, Heading and Fuel Flow – Digital Configuration (P/N 3017-XX-X21)
P1
X X #1 COMPASS SYSTEM
SYNCHRO HEADING Y
Y
INPUT
Z Z
+28 HDG VALID INPUT V
HEADING FLAG HH
INPUT SELECT
TRUE = 28VDC
MAG = OPEN
H K 1 26 VAC AIRCRAFT BUS

HEADING REF
L L
H P 1 26 VAC AIRCRAFT BUS

26 VAC
A/P REF L R
P2
FD/AP COMPUTER
STEERING VALID OUT CC
28 VDC/OPEN
H AA 1
ROLL STRG OUTPUT
L BB
P1
H A
#1 #1 FUEL FLOW
L B
H C
#2 #2 FUEL FLOW
L D
FUEL
FLOW P2
INPUTS
H i
#3 #3 FUEL FLOW
L j
P3
H CC
#4 #4 FUEL FLOW
L DD
NOTES:
1 IT IS RECOMMENDED THAT, ON LEARJET 30 SERIES AIRCRAFT, WITH JET FC200 AUTOPILOT, A STEERING INTERFACE
UNIT (SIU), P/N 92-7001-1, BE INSTALLED. THIS ALLOWS FULL FMS ROLL STEERING CAPABILITIES TO BE USED BY THE AUTOPILOT.

Page 356
34-60-67 8 July 2014
(17) Standard AC Pitch – Analog Configuration (P/N 3017-XX-X11)
UNS-1E P/N 3017-XX-211
P2
FD SWITCH UNIT FD SWITCH UNIT
R K (AS APPLICABLE)
LATERAL DEV (XTK)
(ANALOG DC)
L LL
MASTER NAV VALID D
U G
VERTICAL DEV
(ANALOG DC)
D H
VERTICAL DEVIATION VALID JJ

28 VDC
FMS PWR VHF NAV
FD NAV
SELECT FMS NAV
X-SIN x
SYNCHRO Y-COS y
OR
RESOLVER
BEARING Z-SIN/ z
COS RET
X-SIN e
SYNCHRO OR f
RESOLVER Y-COS
DES TRK
Z-SIN/ g
COS RET
H p
DATA
OUT
L q
ARINC 561 H r
OUTPUT SYN
L s
H t
CLK
L u
ARINC 561 DATA VALID v
TO MM
FROM NN
CAUTION: IT IS THE INSTALLER'S RESPONSIBILITY TO VERIFY PIN NUMBERS ON EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURED BY OTHER
THAN UNIVERSAL AVIONICS SYSTEMS CORPORATION.
Page 357
34-60-67 8 July 2014
(18) ARINC Input Ports
P1
A c
ARINC 429
INPUT PORT #1
B d
A e
ARINC 429
INPUT PORT #2
B f
A g
ARINC 429
INPUT PORT #3 B h
A N
ARINC 429
1 INPUT PORT #8
B M
1) POSITION
2) RADAR
A W 3) ARINC DME/VOR
ARINC 429 4) DADC
1 INPUT PORT #10 5) AHRS
B s
6) XFILL, IF CROSSIDE FMS IS INSTALLED
7) ARINC 429 HS, 429 LS, 571
A NN 8) TAWS
1 ARINC 429
INPUT PORT #12
B PP
P2
A w
ARINC 429
1 INPUT PORT #9
B PP
A t
ARINC 429
1
INPUT PORT #11
B r
A GG
ARINC 429
1 INPUT PORT #13
B NN
A v
ARINC 429
1 INPUT PORT #14 B HH
P3
A EE
ARINC 429
INPUT PORT #4
B FF
A GG
ARINC 429
INPUT PORT #5 B HH
A JJ
ARINC 429
INPUT PORT #6
B KK
A LL
ARINC 429
INPUT PORT #7 B MM
A E
ARINC 429
1 INPUT PORT #15 B F
NOTES:
1 ARINC RECEIVE PORTS ARE APPLICABLE TO THE ALL DIGITAL FMS PART NUMBER 3017-XX-X21.

Page 358
34-60-67 8 July 2014
(19) ARINC Output Ports
P2
A A
ARINC 429/571
OUTPUT PORT #0A
B B
A C
ARINC 429/571
OUTPUT PORT #1
B D
A x
ARINC 429/571
1 OUTPUT PORT #4A
B y
A e
1 ARINC 429/571
OUTPUT PORT #4B
B f
A z
ARINC 429/571
1
OUTPUT PORT #5
B g
A JJ
1 ARINC 429/571 1) POSITION
OUTPUT PORT #6A 2) RADAR
B KK
3) ARINC DME/VOR
4) DADC
A LL 5) AHRS
ARINC 429/571 6) XFILL, IF CROSSIDE FMS IS INSTALLED
1
OUTPUT PORT #6B 7) ARINC 429 HS, 429 LS, 571
B MM
8) TAWS
A DD
ARINC 429/571
1 OUTPUT PORT #7
B p
P3
A r
ARINC 429/571
OUTPUT PORT #0B
B s
A w
ARINC 429/571
OUTPUT PORT #2A
B x
A y
ARINC 429/571
OUTPUT PORT #2B
B z
A AA
ARINC 429/571
OUTPUT PORT #3 B BB
NOTES:
1 ARINC TRANSMIT PORTS #4A THRU #7 ARE ONLY AVAILABLE IN THE ALL DIGITAL FMS P/N 3017-XX-221.

Page 359
34-60-67 8 July 2014
(20) Discrete Inputs

P1
561 DTG DISCRETE 2 IN 1 OPEN = 0 - 3999 NM

MM
RES (GND/OPEN) GND = 0 - 399 NM
DISCRETE 3 IN LL 1
(GND/OPEN)
DISCRETE 4 IN DD 1
TEST
(GND/OPEN)
MAG/TRU DISCRETE 5 IN OPEN = MAGNETIC

AA 1
OUT SEL (GND/OPEN) GND = TRUE
GND
DISCRETE 6 IN GND W/ AC ON GND
STRUT SW
(GND/OPEN) CC 1
DISCRETE
AIR
FREQ DISCRETE 7 IN GG 1
MGMT (GND/OPEN)
P3
SPERRY DISCRETE 1 IN 1
T
VNAV (GND/OPEN)
CAPT
DISCRETE 8 IN R 1
(GND/OPEN)
DISCRETE 9 IN P 1
(GND/OPEN)
DISCRETE 10 IN S 1
(28 VDC/OPEN)
DISCRETE 11 IN h 1
4
(GND/OPEN)
NOTES:
1 CONFIGURABLE INPUT DISCRETE. DEFAULT CONFIGURATION SHOWN WHERE APPLICABLE.

REFER TO THE CONFIGURATION MANUAL 34-61-XX.
2. ATC1 SELECT: ATC1 = GND

STBY = OPEN
ATC2 = OPEN
3. REVERSION TUNE: BOTH RTUS OFF = GND

EITHER OR BOTH ON = OPEN
4 THIS DISCRETE BECOMES LP LOS ANNUNCUATION WITH MOD 4 AND IS NO LONGER CONFIGURABLE.
CAUTION: IT IS THE INSTALLER'S RESPONSIBILITY TO DETERMINE AND VERIFY PIN NUMBERS ON EQUIPMENT
MANUFACTURED BY OTHER THAN UNIVERSAL AVIONICS SYSTEMS CORPORATION.
Page 360
34-60-67 8 July 2014
(21) Discrete Outputs
P2
DISCRETE 2 OUT W
(GND/OPEN)
DISCRETE 3 OUT V
(GND/OPEN)
DISCRETE 4 OUT S
(GND/OPEN)
DISCRETE 5 OUT
(GND/OPEN) T
DISCRETE 8 OUT Y
(GND/OPEN)
DISCRETE 9 OUT EE
1
(28 VDC/OPEN)
P3
DISCRETE 1 OUT i
(GND/OPEN)
DISCRETE 6 OUT n
(GND/OPEN)
DISCRETE 7 OUT m
(GND/OPEN)
NOTES:
1 350 mA MAX LOAD.
Page 361
34-60-67 8 July 2014
(22) CSDB Ports
P1
A u
CSDB INPUT
PORT #3 v
B
A w
CSDB INPUT
PORT #1 x
B
A y
CSDB INPUT
PORT #2
B z
P2
CSDB DME/VOR 1
A a
CSDB OUTPUT
PORT #2
B b
A c
CSDB OUTPUT
PORT #1
B d
P3
A p
CSDB INPUT
PORT #4 q
B
NOTES:
1 RS-422-NRZ DATA FORMAT FOR ALL CSDB LISTINGS.

Page 362
34-60-67 8 July 2014
(23) ASCB Version A
P1
ASCB DISCRETE IN #1 NN
(GND/OPEN)
ASCB DISCRETE IN #2 PP
(GND/OPEN)
P2
ASCB DISCRETE IN #3 PP
(GND/OPEN)
ASCB DISCRETE IN #4 w
(GND/OPEN)
ASCB DISCRETE IN #5 e
(GND/OPEN)
ASCB DISCRETE IN #6 f
(GND/OPEN)
ASCB DISCRETE IN #7 MM
(GND/OPEN)
P1
ASCB DISCRETE IN #8 s
(GND/OPEN)
P2
ASCB DISCRETE OUT #1 t
(28 VDC/OPEN)
ASCB DISCRETE OUT #2 r

(28 VDC/OPEN)
ASCB DISCRETE OUT #3 p

(GND/OPEN)
P3
ASCB DISCRETE OUT #4 G

(GND/OPEN)
P2
+ x
ASCB A DATA
- y
+ z
ASCB A CLOCK
- g
+ v
ASCB B DATA
- NN
P3
+ E
ASCB B CLOCK
- F
Page 363
34-60-67 8 July 2014
(24) Video
UNS-1E P/N 3017-XX-XX1 DEMA-9S
P2
TX E 2
RS232 TEST RX F
3 MONITOR PORT 3
GND J
5
1
TO IBM COMPATIBLE
PC SERIAL PORT FOR
4 TEST PURPOSES ONLY
P3 7
8
RED U
RED RTN V
GREEN W
GREEN RTN X
EXTERNAL 1
VIDEO INPUT BLUE Y
BLUE RTN Z
SYNC u
SYNC RTN t
P1
#2 FMS SELECT EE GND IF APPLICABLE

2
#3 FMS SELECT FF GND IF APPLICABLE
GNSS ANTENNA 4
NOTES:
1 EXTERNAL RGB VIDEO INPUT ALLOWS THE FMS TO BE USED AS A VIDEO DISPLAY FOR CAMERAS ETC. THE RGB INPUTS ARE 75 OHM
TERMINATED. THEY ACCEPT THE RS-170 STANDARD ONE VOLT SIGNAL. THE SYNC INPUT CAN BE DRIVEN BY COMPOSITE SYNC, 0 TO 5V
NEGATIVE LOGIC SIGNAL.
2 FMS SELECT P1-EE P1-FF

FMS #1 OPEN OPEN
FMS #2 GND OPEN
FMS #3 (SIDE 1) OPEN GND
3 P2, J IS ALSO CHASSIS GND.
4 REFER TO EQUIPMENT SPECIFICATIONS FOR ANTENNA IDENTIFICATION AND COAX RECOMMENDATIONS.
Page 364
34-60-67 8 July 2014
System Data Installation

System data installation and system configuration instructions are contained in the SBAS
FMS SCN 1001/1101 Configuration Manual.
Applicable SCN Configuration Manual Report Number
SCN 1001.X/1101.X/1101.X(M) 34-61-02
Page 401
34-60-67 8 July 2014
Maintenance, Checkout and Troubleshooting

1. Maintenance
A. Flight Management System (FMS), P/N 3017-XX-XX1 and 3017-XX-XX1M
Do not schedule maintenance for the FMS. No maintenance is needed unless a problem is
found.
B. Configuration Module, P/N 30171
Do not schedule maintenance for the Configuration Module. No maintenance is needed
unless a problem is found.
C. Data Transfer Unit (DTU-100), P/N 1406-XX or 1407-XX
Do not schedule maintenance for the DTU-100. No maintenance is needed unless a problem
is found.
D. Solid State Data Transfer Unit (SSDTU), P/N 1408-00-X or 1409-00-2
Do not schedule maintenance for the SSDTU. No maintenance is needed unless a problem is
found.
E. Control Display Unit (5-Inch FPCDU), P/N 1018-X-XXX
Do not schedule maintenance for the CDU. No maintenance is needed unless a problem is
found.
F. Control Display Unit (4-Inch FPCDU), P/N 1117-XX or 1117-X-XXX
Do not schedule maintenance for the CDU. No maintenance is needed unless a problem is
found.
G. LPV Monitor, P/N 3116-52-1110
Do not schedule maintenance for the LPV Monitor. No maintenance is needed unless a
problem is found.
Page 501
34-60-67 8 July 2014
2. Installation Checkout
Use these procedures as necessary to approve the Universal Avionics SBAS FMSs or SBAS
FMS and LPV Monitor installations. Interfaces not included in the aircraft may be omitted.
A. Ground Test Plan
UNS-1( )w NCU System #1 System #2 or Monitor
Part Number:
Mod Status:
FMC SCN:
PAS SCN:
Serial Number:
GPS Antenna System #1 System #2 or Monitor
Part Number:
Mod Status:
Serial Number:
Config Module System #1 System #2 or Monitor
Part Number:
Mod Status:
Serial Number:
Page 502
34-60-67 8 July 2014
(1) Pre-Test Requirements
Test: 1
Phase of Flight: Ground Test
Operation: Pre -Test Requirements
Function: Required equipment is installed and operational
Remarks:
Test Condition: Verify that all of the required equipment and compatible SCNs are installed and
operational. (DO-187§ 3.4.1.1)
Outcome: 1. FMSs (#1 and #2)
2. DTU
3. Pilot displays
4. Copilot displays
5. TAWS
6. Flight Director / Autopilot
7. Radio Altimeter
8. Air Data Computer(s)
9. VHF com systems
10. VHF NAV Receivers (#1 and #2).
11. ASU/EFB if installed
12. ACARS if installed
13. Attitude and heading sources
Findings:
Time:
System #1:
System #2:
Page 503
34-60-67 8 July 2014
(2) Installation
Test: 2
Operation: Installation
Function: General Operation
Remarks:
Test Condition: General Requirements (DO-229D §2.1.1.1), (DO-187§ 3.1.3)
Outcome: 1. Airworthiness (DO-229D §2.1.1.1.1)
2. Design and manufacture of the airborne equipment shall support
installation so as not to impair the airworthiness of the aircraft.
3. General Performance (DO-229D §2.1.1.1.2 ), (DO-187§ 3.4.1.2) The
equipment shall perform its intended function.
4. Equipment Interfaces (DO-229D §2.1.1.1.4 ),(AC-20-138A §12.f.(2)), (DO-
187§ 3.4.1.3)
5. The interfaces with other aircraft equipment shall be designed such that,
properly installed with other adequately designed equipment, normal or
abnormal GPS/SBAS equipment operation shall not adversely affect the
operation of other equipment. Nor shall normal or abnormal operation of
other equipment adversely affect the GPS/SBAS equipment except as
specifically allowed.
Findings:
Time:
System #1:
System #2:
Page 504
34-60-67 8 July 2014
(3) Initialization and LPV Annunciation Test
Test: 3
Operation: Initialization & LPV Annunciation Test
Function: FMS Power On Self Test
Remarks:
Test Condition: Power up and initialize the FMSs.
Outcome: 1. Power up and initialize the FMSs.
2. Verify that each FMS has the current database.
3. On DATA Page 3/4 Verify that the FMS positions on each unit correspond
to ramp position
4. Verify all data on DATA page 2/4 is accurate and reflects the configuration
and sensors installed.
Findings:
Time:
System #1:
System #2:
Page 505
34-60-67 8 July 2014
(4) Configuration
Test: 4
Operation: Configuration
Function: Confirm Configuration
Remarks:
Test Condition: Configuration (AC-20-138A §18.a)
Antenna Offset (DO-229D §2.2.4.3.3)
Outcome: 1. Verify that the configurations comply with the configuration data for the
syatem.
Findings:
Time:
System #1:
System #2:
Page 506
34-60-67 8 July 2014
(5) DTU
Test: 5
Operation: DTU
Function: DATABASE
Remarks:
Test Condition: 1. Load a navigation database into both FMSs from the DATA DISK MENU
page.
Outcome: 1. Verify proper operation and database loading. (DO-229D §2.2.1.5.1) &
(DO-229D §2.2.1.5.2)
Findings:
Time:
System #1:
System #2:
Page 507
34-60-67 8 July 2014
(6) Air Data Computer
Test: 6
Operation: Air Data Computer
Function: Sensors
Remarks:
Test Condition: 1. On DATA page 2/4 verify that the ADC is deselected on each FMS.
2. Pull the ADC #1 and ADC #2 CBs.
3. Reset ADC #1 and ADC #2 CBs.
Outcome: 2. Verify that the ADC INPUT FAIL message appears on each FMS.
3. Verify that the values are returned to normal.
Findings:
Time:
System #1:
System #2:
Page 508
34-60-67 8 July 2014
(7) GPS/SBAS Sensor Evaluation
Test: 7
Operation: GPS/SBAS Sensor Evaluation
Function: Sensors
Remarks:
Test Condition: 1. Inspect Data page 2/4 on FMS.
2. On #1 FMS deselect SBAS #1.
3. Reselect SBAS #1.
4. Repeat above steps for #2 FMS and by deselecting SBAS #2.
Outcome: 1. On FMS, verify onside RNP/ANP factor is displayed.
2. On FMS, verify offside FMS is in SBAS mode.
3. On offside FMS, verify RNP/ANP is displayed.
4. After reselection verify onside FMS returns to normal.
Findings:
Time:
System #1:
System #2:
Page 509
34-60-67 8 July 2014
(8) DME/VOR Tuning and Inhibiting
Test: 8
Operation: DME/VOR tuning and navaid inhibiting.(If applicable)
Function: Sensors
Remarks: Normally on the ground VOR and DME are automatically deselected. (Test set may be
required)
Test Condition: 1. Access the DME page via DATA page 2/4 on each FMS.
2. Select the DME sensor.
3. Access the NVD INHBT page. Input a DME station to inhibit.
4. Access the VOR page via DATA page 2/4 on both FMSs.
5. Tune the VHF NAV to a local VOR, and select the VOR sensor.
6. After test deselect both the DME and VOR sensors.
Outcome: 1. Verify that the page indicates the DME is deselected.
2. Verify reception of local DMEs.
3. Verify proper operation of the navaid inhibit function.
4. Verify that the page indicates the VOR is deselected.
5. Verify proper radial display.
Findings:
Time:
System #1:
System #2:
Page 510
34-60-67 8 July 2014
(9) Power Loss Test
Test: 9
Operation: Power Loss Test
Function: FMS
Remarks:
Test Condition: 1. Locate and Pull each FMS circuit breaker.
2. Reset the circuit breakers within 5 seconds.
3. Pull each FMS circuit breaker. Reset the breakers after 20 seconds.
Outcome: 1. Verify that the FMS loses power and that loss of navigation is output. (DO-
229D §2.1.1.13.2),(AC-20-138A §18.e), (DO-187§ 3.4.1.4)
2. Verify that the FMS returns to the page displayed prior to pulling the circuit
breaker. Verify that SYNC is not lost. (If Configured for SYNC)
3. Verify that each FMS requires pressing the ON key to power up. Verify that
the POWER FAIL page appears.
4. Verify that the FMS which was powered down properly Syncs to the other
FMS.
Findings:
Time:
System #1:
System #2:
Page 511
34-60-67 8 July 2014
(10) ACARS
Test: 10
Operation: ACARS (if installed)
Function: ACARS
Remarks: NOTE: This test point can be deferred to flight if unable to accomplish on the
ground.
Test Condition: 1. Upload text weather
2. Upload graphics weather (if available).
3. Send text messaging.
Outcome: Verify that each FMS can send and receive ACARS messages over all
networks configured.
Findings:
Time:
System #1:
System #2:
Page 512
34-60-67 8 July 2014
(11) TAWS Control
Test: 11
Operation: TAWS Control (If configured)
Function: TAWS
Remarks:
Test Condition: 1. On the DATA TAWS MAINT page engage the test modes.
4. Add several altitudes to waypoints in the lateral flight plan.
Outcome: 1. Verify that the MAINT functions operate normally.
2. Verify line select keys for test functions operate normally.
3. Verify that the TAWS display on the specified display is as expected.
4. Verify the TAWS profile view accurately depicts intermediate crossing
waypoints.
Findings:
Time:
System #1:
System #2:
Page 513
34-60-67 8 July 2014
(12) Overall Evaluation of Pilot Interface
Test: 12
Operation: Overall evaluation of pilot interface.
Function: General Operation
Remarks:
Test Condition: Verify the following items:
Outcome: Annunciators (DO-229D §2.2.1.1.5.1)
1. Brightness is controllable.
2. Capability to test external Annunciators.
Findings:
Time:
System #1:
System #2:
Page 514
34-60-67 8 July 2014
B. Flight Test Plan
The following should be considered when the Universal Avionics SBAS FMS with LPV
approach capability enabled is interfaced with the Flight Guidance System.
In a new SBAS FMS installation or when upgrading an existing FMS to a SBAS FMS with
LPV approach capability enabled, it is the applicant’s responsibility to evaluate the
equipment when interfaced with a Flight Guidance System (FGS) through the use of properly
authorized Systems and Equipment, Flight Test, or Flight Analyst DER. The objective is to
ensure that the SBAS FMS equipment interface is compatible with the aircraft.
The Systems and Equipment, Flight Test, or Flight Analyst DER should evaluate the effects
when the FGS de-gains during an LPV approach. Some FGS use a radio altimeter input, and
will use glide slope capture and passage over the middle marker beacon to reduce the gain if
the radio altimeter is failed. Certain FGS depend upon such inputs to enable the "glideslope
extension" function to reduce "porpoising" or aerodynamic instability when coupled to a
glideslope signal during the final approach phase. SBAS FMS equipment designs do not
provide such signals
UNS-1( )w NCU System #1 System #2 or Monitor
Part Number:
Mod Status:
FMC SCN:
PAS SCN:
Serial Number:
GPS Antenna System #1 System #2 or Monitor
Part Number:
Mod Status:
Serial Number:
Config Module System #1 System #2 or Monitor
Part Number:
Mod Status:
Serial Number:
Page 515
34-60-67 8 July 2014
(1) Pre-Flight – Required Documents On-Board
Test: 1
Phase of Flight: Before Engine Start
Operation: Pre-Flight
Function: Required Documents on Board
Remarks:
Test Condition: Check for proper documentation aboard aircraft.
Outcome: 1. Registration Airworthiness Certificate
2. Current Weight and Balance
3. Required Flight Manuals and Supplements
4. Aircraft Flight Log
5. Aircraft Open Discrepancies
6. Aircraft Status Checked R&D/Show Compliance/Market Survey
Findings:
Time:
System #1:
System #2:
Page 516
34-60-67 8 July 2014
(2) Pre-Flight - Briefing
Test: 2
Operation: Pre-Flight
Function: Briefing
Remarks:
Test Condition: Brief the flight test
Outcome: 1. Review Flight Test Requirements
2. Review any limitations
3. Brief the purpose of the test
4. Brief the intended route of flight
5. Brief TFRs
6. Brief weather
Findings:
Time:
System #1:
System #2:
Page 517
34-60-67 8 July 2014
(3) Pre-Test Requirements – Required Equipment is Installed and Operational
Test: 3
Operation: Pre-Test Requirements
Function: Required equipment is installed and operational
Remarks:
Test Condition: Verify that all of the required equipment and compatible SCNs are installed and
operational. (DO-187§ 3.3.2)
Outcome: 1. FMSs (#1 and #2)
2. DTU
3. Pilot displays
4. Copilot displays
5. TAWS
6. Flight Director / Autopilot
7. Radio Altimeter
8. Air Data Computer(s)
9. VHF com systems
10. VHF NAV Receivers (#1 and #2).
11. ASU/EFB if installed
12. ACARS if installed
13. Attitude and heading sources
Findings:
Time:
System #1:
System #2:
Page 518
34-60-67 8 July 2014
(4) All – Flight Guidance Interface
Test: 4
Phase of Flight: Before Engine Start/Duration of flight
Operation: All
Function: Flight Guidance Interface
Remarks:
Test Condition: During the course of the flight test observe and verify that the interface between
the FMS and flight guidance does not alter the cockpit design philosophy or
intended function of an FGS mode, switch or annunciation. (AC 20-138A
§18.g),(AC 20-138A §23.b.(4))
Outcome: 1. Verify that the FMS or the FGS keeps the aircraft within the approved
operational envelope. (AC 20-138A §18.g.(2))
2. Verify that a positive, continuous and unambiguous indication is provided of
the FGS modes actually in operation. (AC 20-138A §18.g.(3))
3. Verify that there is consistent annunciation of engage/disengage timing of
the FGS. (AC 20-138A §18.g.(4))
4. Verify that those aircraft that have incorporated bank angle limiting,
consideration should be given to whether the GNSS equipment is defining
a path that cannot be flown. (AC 20-138A §18.g.(7))
Findings:
Time:
System #1:
System #2:
Page 519
34-60-67 8 July 2014
(5) All – Crew Workload
Test: 5
Phase of Flight: Before Engine Start/During flight
Operation: All
Function: Crew Workload
Remarks:
Test Condition: An analysis of crew workload when operating the GNSS equipment in
association with other piloting requirements should be conducted during all
phases of flight, including those non-normal procedures that can be evaluated
in flight. (AC 20-138A §23.b.(8))
Outcome: Before Engine Start/During flight
Findings:
Time:
System #1:
System #2:
Page 520
34-60-67 8 July 2014
(6) Initialization and LPV Annunciation Test – FMS Power On Self-Test
Test: 6
Phase of Flight: After Engine Start
Operation: Initialization & LPV Annunciation Test
Function: FMS Power On Self Test
Remarks:
Test Condition: 1. Power up and initialize both FMSs.
2. Enter information on Fuel pages as needed on only one FMS.
3. Enter a flight plan with the a SID and make the appropriate entries on the
FPL SUMMARY page.
Outcome: 1. Power up and initialize both FMSs.
2. Verify that both FMSs pass all items on the self test page.
3. Verify position matches the aircraft . Verify that the time and date are
correct.
4. Accept the position on FMS #1 and FMS #2 and verify that the reverse
video “I” disappears on both FMSs for SYNC operation.
5. Verify that FMS #1 and #2 have the current database.
6. Verify all data on DATA page 2/4 is accurate and reflects the configuration
and sensors installed.
7. Verify data on Fuel Pages 1 through 5 are correct. Verify that all fuel data
SYNC across.
8. Verify all data on FMS #2.
9. On Sensor page, verify SBAS1 is selected.
10. Verify FMS #2 data was transferred from FMS #1. either by SYNC or XFILL
Findings:
Time:
System #1:
System #2:
Page 521
34-60-67 8 July 2014
(7) Fly the Assigned SID – Take-off and SID
Test: 7
Phase of Flight: Departure
Operation: Fly the assigned SID
Function: TAKE-OFF & SID
Remarks: Approach scaling on first leg of Missed Approach and on the first leg of a SID
Test Condition: Take off and fly the legs of the SID. (DO-187§ 3.4.2.3.c), (DO-187§ 3.4.2.3.b)
Outcome: 1. Verify proper leg sequencing (DO-229D §2.2.1.2.4) with turn anticipation.
(AC 20-138A §23.b.(2)),(AC 20-138A §23.b.(4).(ii))
2. After takeoff verify ADC, DME, and VOR selected
3. Verify the data on NAV page 1/3.
4. Verify proper navigation of this procedure.
Findings:
Time:
System #1:
System #2:
Page 522
34-60-67 8 July 2014
(8) Fly the Assigned SID – Take-off and SID
Test: 8
Phase of Flight: Departure
Operation: Fly the assigned SID
Function: TAKE-OFF & SID
Remarks: Approach scaling on first leg of Missed Approach and on the first leg of a SID
Test Condition: Take off and fly the legs of the SID. (DO-187§ 3.4.2.3.c), (DO-187§ 3.4.2.3.b)
Outcome: 1. Verify proper leg sequencing (DO-229D §2.2.1.2.4) with turn anticipation.
(AC 20-138A §23.b.(2)),(AC 20-138A §23.b.(4).(ii))
2. After takeoff verify ADC, DME, and VOR selected
4. Verify proper navigation of this procedure.
Findings:
Time:
System #1:
System #2:
Page 523
34-60-67 8 July 2014
(9) Antenna Placement – Antenna Shadowing
Test: 9
Phase of Flight: Enroute
Operation: Antenna placement
Function: Airframe Shadowing
Remarks:
Test Condition: 1. Perform 30 degree bank turns both left and right.
2. On the GPS STATUS page monitor the satellite health.
Outcome: 1. Verify the airborne system receives differential SBAS correction.
2. INTEG should remain in SBAS throughout the entire maneuver. (AC 20-
138A §23.a.)
Findings:
Time:
System #1:
System #2:
Page 524
34-60-67 8 July 2014
(10) Manual Leg Changes – NAV
Test: 10
Operation: Manual Leg Changes
Function: NAV
Remarks:
Test Condition: From NAV page 1/3, perform a manual leg change.
Outcome: 1. Verify proper interception of new active NAV leg
3. Verify proper indications on EFIS consistent with NAV page 1/3.
Findings:
Time:
System #1:
System #2:
Page 525
34-60-67 8 July 2014
(11) SXTK
Test: 11
Operation: SXTK
Function: SXTK
Remarks:
Test Condition: 1. Perform a SXTK.
3. Cancel SXTK
Outcome: 1. Verify that SXTK mode is allowed.
2. Verify that it is correct and reasonable.
3. Verify that up to a 45 degree intercept is flown to the new offset course.
4. Verify that non-numeric cross-track deviation is readable and discernable.
(AC 20-138A §13.b.(5))
5. Verify that SXTK cancels and the aircraft returns to the original course via
up to a 45 degree intercept.
Findings:
Time:
System #1:
System #2:
Page 526
34-60-67 8 July 2014
(12) VTO and TOD Calculations – VNAV
Test: 12
Operation: VTO & TOD Calculations
Function: VNAV
Remarks:
Test Condition: 1. Go to VNAV PATH 1/2 and VTO to a FPL WPT.
2. Perform a DTO to a waypoint downstream of the VNAV WPT.
3. Press the VNAV key to access the PATH VNAV. Select a waypoint on the
FPL with an altitude and finish the VNAV entries.
4. Go to VNAV PATH 1/1 and cancel VNAV
Outcome: 1. Verify VNAV display is correct and recalculated.
3. Verify VNAV display goes invalid and proper message is pushed.
4. Verify computed TOD distance is reasonable.
5. Two minutes prior to TOD, verify "TOP OF DESCENT ALERT" message is
displayed.
6. Upon reaching TOD, verify "VERTICAL WPT ALERT" message is
displayed.
7. Verify that the VNAV indicator on the EFIS display becomes armed and will
show proper deviation from and to the VPATH.
8. Verify VNAV display goes invalid and pushes an appropriate message.
Findings:
Time:
System #1:
System #2:
Page 527
34-60-67 8 July 2014
(13) VHF and SATCOM Systems – ACARS
Test: 13
Operation: VHF & SAT COM systems (if installed)
Function: ACARS
Remarks:
Test Condition: 1. Request several VHF TEXT ONLY weather requests.
2. Request several weather maps.
Outcome: 1. Verify weather message received.
2. NOTE: If this was accomplished in the ground test, this step can be
skipped.
Findings:
Time:
System #1:
System #2:
Page 528
34-60-67 8 July 2014
(14) Course TO or FROM Operations
Test: 14
Operation: Course TO or FROM Operations
Function: PVOR
Remarks:
Test Condition: Create a PVOR using one or more of the following functions, from or to any
given WPT.
1. TRACK
2. INBOUND
3. OUTBOUND
Outcome: 1. Verify that the NAV display is correct
2. Verify that the aircraft flys the proper direction. (AC 20-138A §23.b.(2))
3. Cancel with the use of a DTO
4. Cancel with the use of a manual leg change
Findings:
Time:
System #1:
System #2:
Page 529
34-60-67 8 July 2014
(15) Holding Patterns – HOLD
Test: 15
Operation: Holding Patterns
Function: HOLD
Remarks:
Test Condition: 1. Define a standard holding pattern at the TO waypoint using the current
course as the inbound leg of the hold and Activate. (TSO-C115b a.(2),(ix))
or
2. Define a standard holding pattern at a TO waypoint using a course as the
inbound leg of the hold so as to create a PARALLEL entry and Activate or
3. Define a standard holding pattern at a TO waypoint using a course as the
inbound leg of the hold so as to create a TEAR DROP entry and Activate.
Outcome: 1. Verify entry is as expected.
2. Verify aircraft enters and flies the holding pattern correctly. (AC 20-138A
§23.b.(2))
Findings:
Time:
System #1:
System #2:
Page 530
34-60-67 8 July 2014
(16) SBAS Approach – Approach LOS as Required
Test: 16
Phase of Flight: Approach
Operation: SBAS Approach ( minimum 3 approaches)
Function: Approach LOS as required
Remarks: SBAS APPROACH
Note: Verify that flight technical error (FTE) can be maintained at less than 1.0
NM for enroute and approach transition operating modes, and less than 0.25
NM for non-precision approaches, both with and without autopilot and/or flight
director use. (AC 20-138A §23.b.(3)),(AC 20-138A §23.b.(4).(vi).(A))
Test Condition: 1. Assure that the correct LOS is selected and annunciated.
2. Continue the approach to the DA.
3. At the DA select TOGA and fly the missed approach procedure to the hold.
Repeat This Test Condition as necessary.
Outcome: 1. Verify that on the Approach Category Selection Page all available LOS are
listed.
2. Verify that the correct LOS is annunciated on the CDU. (DO-229D
§2.2.5.2.4),(AC 20-138A §19.c.(1))
3. Verify that the LOS is annunciated on the proper external light or display.
(DO-229D §2.2.1.6.1)
4. Verify that the aircraft properly follows the FMS HDG commands. (DO-
229D §2.2.3.2.1)
5. Verify that the aircraft properly intercepts the final approach course and flys
the approach with both vertical and lateral guidance.(DO-229D §2.2.3.3.1)
6. Upon commencing the missed approach confirm that the scaling remains
at 0.3 NM until the first turn point of the missed procedure.(DO-229D
§2.2.3.7.1.2)
7. Verify that the CDU displays Missed Approach and leg sequences
properly.(DO-229D §2.2.3.2.2)
8. Verify that the LPV annunciation extinguishes (if performing LPV LOS).
9. Verify that the aircraft enters and flys the hold as expected. (DO-229D
§2.2.1.3.11)
Findings:
Time:
System #1:
System #2:
Page 531
34-60-67 8 July 2014
(17) Non SBAS Approach – Additional Approaches
Test: 17
Phase of Flight: Approach
Operation: Non SBAS Approach (as req)
Function: Additional approaches (GPS, NDB, VOR, VOR DME, ILS or LOC BC) as
required for the specific installation.
Remarks: SBAS APPROACH
Note: Verify that flight technical error (FTE) can be maintained at less than 1.0
NM for enroute and approach transition operating modes, and less than 0.25
NM for non-precision approaches, both with and without autopilot and/or flight
director use. (AC 20-138A §23.b.(3)),(AC 20-138A §23.b.(4).(vi).(A))
Test Condition: 1. Load the selected approach into the FMS
2. Continue the approach to the DA.
3. At the DA select TOGA and fly the missed approach procedure to the hold.
Repeat This Test Condition as necessary.
Outcome: Verify that the selected approach is execuited successfully
Findings:
Time:
System #1:
System #2:
Page 532
34-60-67 8 July 2014
3. Operational Checkout
You may make a copy of this section for recording the results of your checkout of the Flight
Management System. Mark the PASS or FAIL spaces and fill in the blanks as appropriate.
The contents of this section constitute the minimum Return to Service Procedures.
You should perform these checks when you install a new or repaired component of the Flight
Management System or related avionics equipment. You must know the aircraft’s
navigational configuration before you103 checkout the Flight Management System.
If the equipment fails any check, refer to the Troubleshooting section for corrective
troubleshooting procedures.
A. CDU / FMS Self-Test
These functional and self-tests should be performed after replacement of the FMS and/or the
4-Inch or 5-Inch FPCDU.
(1) Ensure that all system component connectors are connected and units are seated in
mounting racks where applicable. For GPS tests the aircraft must be located outside
the hangar and the antenna must have an unobstructed view of the sky.
(2) Reset any circuit breakers that may have been opened for replacement.
(3) Ensure 28 VDC primary power is available on the bus supplying power to the FMS.
(4) Ensure 26 VAC power is available to supply reference voltages to the FMS.
(5) Ensure the Air Data Computer system and Air Data Converter (if installed) are
powered up and functioning.
(6) Ensure the Heading source system supplying heading data to the FMS is powered up
and valid.
(7) Select FMS for display on the flight instruments.
(8) Ensure power for the FMS system annunciators is available and tested.
(9) Turn on all sensors having independent power control such as IRS.
(10) Push [ON/OFF DIM] on the CDU keypad. After a five-second warm-up, the self-test
page will be displayed.
Pass Fail
(11) The aircraft type appears on line two.
Pass Fail
(12) Check that all items on the self-test page display “PASS”.
Pass Fail
Record failures:
__________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________
Page 533
34-60-67 8 July 2014
(13) Observe system annunciators during self-test. The following annunciators if
configured should illuminate for about 45 seconds during FMS self-test.
NOTE: This test is not supported on EFI displays.
WPT ALERT (Waypoint Alert) Pass Fail N/A
SXTK (Selected Crosstrack) Pass Fail N/A
APPR (Approach) Pass Fail N/A
HDG (Heading) Pass Fail N/A
MSG (Message) Pass Fail N/A
GPS INTEG (GPS Integrity) Pass Fail N/A
LNAV Pass Fail N/A
LNAV/VNAV Pass Fail N/A
LPV Pass Fail N/A
(14) During the self-tests, with the FMS selected for display on the HSI, verify the
following indications:
NOTE: This test is not supported on the EFI-890 displays.
NAV FLAG – pulls out of view during self-test Pass Fail N/A
TO/FR FLAG – indicates TO condition Pass Fail N/A
COURSE POINTER – slews to 045 degrees Pass Fail N/A
BEARING POINTER – slews to 135 degrees Pass Fail N/A
LATERAL DEVIATION – moves 1 dot right (3.75 NM) Pass Fail N/A
VERTICAL DEVIATION – moves 1 dot up (1600 ft.) Pass Fail N/A
DISTANCE DISPLAY – shows 123.4 NM (or 123) Pass Fail N/A
ROLL COMMAND – 10 degree right bank Pass Fail N/A
NOTE: 1. Indications may differ with some equipment types and EFIS installations.
2. The terms Desired Track and Course Pointer are used interchangeably.
3. The terms Course Deviation Indicator (CDI) and Lateral Deviation
Needle are used interchangeably.
4. The terms Glide Slope Needle and Vertical Deviation Needle are used
interchangeably.
Record any discrepancies:
____________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________
NOTE: After completion of self-tests, the CDU will display the copyright page
followed by the Initialization page [INIT 1/1].
Page 534
34-60-67 8 July 2014
(15) Push [MSG] to display any system messages. Verify that no “FAIL” messages or
“DEMONSTRATION MODE” messages are displayed. “POSITION UNCERTAIN”
is normal until the system has been initialized. If any fail messages are displayed,
refer to the Messages Section in the Operator’s Manual for possible causes. Push
[MSG] again to return to the INIT 1/1 page. Pass Fail
(16) The latitude and longitude of the field should be displayed. Push ACCEPT line select
key (LSK) [5L] or [ENTER] to initialize the position. The cursor will advance to the
date field.
(17) If the date is correct push [ENTER] or enter the date numbers (DDMMYY), then
push [ENTER]. The cursor will advance to the UTC field.
(18) If the time is correct, push [ENTER] or enter the time numbers (HHMM), then push
[ENTER]. The cursor will advance to the ACCEPT line select location. Push
ACCEPT, LSK [5L].
(19) Fill in the following blanks with information from the last two lines of the INIT 1/1
page:
NAV DATABASE EXPIRES
_______________________________________________
FMC VER
_______________________________________________________________
NOTE: You may test the FMS with an expired database.
(20) Push [DATA] four times to display DATA 4/4 page. Verify that the correct aircraft
heading is displayed in the HDG data field. Pass Fail
(21) Manually slew the heading off 10 degrees using the slave switch. Verify that the
heading tracks correctly in both directions. Pass Fail N/A
Page 535
34-60-67 8 July 2014
(22) Push [NEXT] to display DATA 1/4 page and push MAINT, LSK [5R] to display
MAINT 1/1 page. From MAINT 1/1 push S/W VERS, LSK [5L] and observe the
version identification of the various software installed on the system. The FMC
version should match the version approved for the installation in the Airplane Flight
Manual Supplement or other approved documentation. Record the software versions
below.
FMC ____________________
CDU ____________________
AUX ____________________
ANA ____________________
RRS ____________________
BSTRP ____________________
PAS ____________________
ASCB ____________________
RTU ____________________
Pass Fail
(23) Activate the panel lighting system that powers the CDU faceplate lighting for the
FMS and verify proper operation.
Pass Fail
Page 536
34-60-67 8 July 2014
B. CDU Keyboard Dimming and Display Offset
BRIGHT®
DIM®
CANCEL®
DISPLAY®
OFF/STBY®
Dimming Control Window

(1) With any page displayed, push [ON/OFF DIM]. Verify the dimming control window
is displayed on the right side of the active page with the options BRIGHT, LSK [1R],
DIM, LSK [2R], CANCEL, LSK [3R], DISPLAY, LSK [4R] and OFF/STBY, LSK
[5R].
Pass Fail
(2) Push and hold BRIGHT, LSK [1R], push and hold DIM, LSK [2R]. Verify that the
display brightens and dims.
Pass Fail
(3) Press DISPLAY, LSK [4R]. Verify the Display control window is displayed on the
right side of the active page with the UP, DOWN, CANCEL and (optional) VIDEO,
line select keys.
Push and hold UP, LSK [1R], push and hold DOWN, LSK [2R]. Verify that the
display moves up and down and can be adjusted to minimize parallax between the
arrows and line select keys.
Pass Fail
(4) Push [ON/OFF DIM] or any mode key to return to the previous display.
C. FMS Configuration Verification
The FMS’s Configuration Module was programmed to allow the FMS to interface with the
installed sensors, databases, etc. The CDU will display which aircraft hardware the
Configuration Module is programmed.
To verify proper programming, check the Aircraft Configuration Data Sheets against the
CDU configuration displays. Refer to the Configuration Module Programming Procedures
located in the applicable FMS Configuration Manual.
Pass Fail
Page 537
34-60-67 8 July 2014
D. Static Test
Selected analog and discrete static tests are available while the aircraft is on the ground.
NOTE: Static tests may not function correctly with some EFIS installations.
Static tests are selected from the maintenance page and confirm data exchange
synchronization between the aircraft and FMS during operation. Static tests verify two
sources of output: analog and digital.
(1) Analog Tests (P/N 3017-XX-X11)
Analog tests are available only for FMSs equipped with an analog board.
(a) From DATA 1/4 page, press the MAINT line select key and select STATIC
TEST from MAINT 1/1. Then press ANALOG Line Select Key. ANALOG
1/2 page is displayed.
(b) Outputs to the flight guidance system are checked by pressing each line select
key and verifying the proper display on the HSI or ADI.
NOTE: Each option must be turned off by again pressing the line select key before a
new option can be tested.
ANALOG TESTS 1/2
BEARING 90 Pass Fail N/A
DSRTK 90 Pass Fail N/A
XTK LEFT Pass Fail N/A
XTK RIGHT Pass Fail N/A
XTK CENTER Pass Fail N/A
(c) Press [NEXT] for ANALOG TESTS 2/2.

ANALOG TESTS 2/2
VERT UP Pass Fail N/A
VERT DN Pass Fail N/A
VERT CTR Pass Fail N/A
TO Pass Fail N/A
FROM Pass Fail N/A
ROLL 20 DEG R Pass Fail N/A
ROLL 20 DEG L Pass Fail N/A
ROLL 0 DEG Pass Fail N/A
(d) Press RETURN for STATIC TEST 1/1.
Page 538
34-60-67 8 July 2014
(2) Discrete Tests
(a) Press the DISCRETE line select key. DISCRETE 1/2 page is displayed. Each
discrete is labeled as it was configured and can be tested.
DISCRETE TST 1/2
DISC OUT 1 Pass Fail N/A
(b) Press [NEXT] for DISCRETE TESTS 2/2.
DISCRETE TST 2/2

Page 539
34-60-67 8 July 2014
4. Interface Checkout
A. HSI Test
(1) Press the DTO key then the LIST key. The LIST 1/10 page with VOR/PLT waypoints
will be displayed.
(2) Select any one of the waypoints by entering its corresponding number at the cursor
and pressing ENTER twice. NAV 1/3 will be displayed.
(3) Verify the desired track, bearing, distance and crosstrack (XTK) displayed on the HSI
is the same as on the CDU.
Pass Fail
(4) On DATA page 2 press the ADC line select key to display ADC 1/1.
(5) Press the line select key next to the TAS field and enter 100. Press ENTER.
NOTE: You must deselect GPS and INS before entering TAS as 100.
(6) On NAV 1/3 verify that the groundspeed displayed on the CDU matches that on the
HSI (if the HSI supports this option).
Pass Fail N/A
B. Winds Display (EFIS Only)
(1) Display NAV 1/2.
(2) Select Wind Display on the EFIS. Verify that the winds displayed on the HSI
correspond to those on the CDU.
Pass Fail N/A
(3) Turn the FMS off, then on before proceeding with additional tests.
C. DME Interface Test
Valid DME signals must be received by the DME or RRS system when testing the DME
interface. Local DME station signals, if available on the ground, are adequate to verify
operation of the interface. Otherwise a DME signal generator is required. Manual signal
generators capable of providing DME test frequencies of 108.00 and 108.05 can also provide
a lock-on and DME test of the DDC frequency of 108.20. Otherwise, a generator capable of
manually tuning this frequency should be used.
(1) If a local DME station can be received at the aircraft’s location, turn on and initialize
the FMS to the local airport reference point identifier. If a DME signal cannot be
received and a ramp tester is used, initialize the FMS to KDDC.
(2) Select DATA page 2. Press the DME line select key to display DME 1/1 page. Verify
that the STATUS field displays NORMAL (D).
(3) Press the SELECT DME line select key. The (D) will extinguish and the DME
identifiers will change on a four-second interval as the DME scan tunes to stations in
the area.
Page 540
34-60-67 8 July 2014
(4) Press the MAN DME line select key to place the cursor over the data field.
NOTE: Two MAN DME LSKs are displayed, select only one.
(5) Press the LIST key to display a list of DME stations in the area. If local DME is used,
choose the local DME from the list. If a signal generator is used and the FMS was
initialized to KDDC, select DDC from the list and press ENTER.
(6) Verify that the local distance to station or distance provided by the DME generator is
displayed.
❏ Pass ❏ Fail ❏ N/A
(7) If the FMS was initialized to KDDC, turn it off and then on again and initialize to the
local airport reference point to prevent confusion.
NOTE: The following steps apply to TACAN (RRS only).
(8) Display DATA page 2 (if applicable).
(9) Select TACAN Status page.
(10) Check radial displayed on CDU for reasonableness.
(11) Compare distance displayed on CDU with aircraft TACAN distance.
❏ Pass ❏ Fail
D. VOR Test (without RRS)
(1) From DATA page 2 press the VOR line select key.
(3) Verify that the frequency displayed in the FREQ field corresponds to the active
frequency of the appropriate Nav Control Head.
E. DTU-100 Test
NOTE: 1. This test can only be performed on the ground.
2. It is necessary to have the correct UASC Database disk.
(1) From DATA page 1 press the DISK line select key.
(2) Insert the data disk into the DTU-100.
(3) Press DISK CONTENTS line select key.
(4) Verify that the DTU-100 reads the disk and the disk information is displayed on the
CDU.
Page 541
34-60-67 8 July 2014
F. SSDTU Test
NOTE: This test can only be performed on the ground.
NOTE: It is necessary to have a correct Universal Database on a USB or Secure Digital
(SD) data storage device.
(1) From DATA page 1 press the DISK line select key.
(2) Insert a mass storage device into the SSDTU.
(3) Press DISK CONTENTS line select key.
(4) Verify that the SSDTU reads the storage device and that database information is
displayed on the FMS CDU.
(5) Verify indicators are illuminated in accordance with the following table.
Indicator Color and Action
Indicator
Type Blank Green Green Amber Blue Blue
Solid Blinking Solid Solid Blinking
STATUS SSDTU Off Operational N/A CBIT has Self Test N/A
(Front) detected an
error (SSDTU
will reboot)
USB No device Device OK, Device is Bad or Device OK, in Device is
(Front) present not in use being unsupported use (Indicates being
accessed device Primary accessed
Storage
Device)
SD No device Device OK, Device is Bad or Device OK, in Device is
(Front) present not in use being unsupported use (Indicates being
accessed device Primary accessed
Storage
Device)
NET Not yet N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
(Front) operational
Ethernet No device A network link Network N/A N/A N/A
(Rear) present is established activity
on this port
Page 542
34-60-67 8 July 2014
G. Approach Mode Test
NOTE: This test does not operate correctly on some EFIS types.
(1) Turn on and initialize the FMS (position does not matter for this test).
(2) From DATA page 1, press the MAINT line select key.
(3) From MAINT 1/1, press the DYNAMIC TEST line select key.
(4) From DYNAMIC TEST 1/1 press the APPROACH line select key.
(5) As the test begins, select the proper mode of the flight director.
NOTE: The radio altimeter should be disabled for vertical coupling.
(6) As the CDI returns to center, Nav mode will capture.
(7) As the glideslope needle returns to center, the glideslope function will capture.
(8) The V-bars will follow the lateral and vertical commands as specified for the test.
(9) The glideslope flag comes into view during FLAG VERT test.
(10) The lateral mode of the flight director drops during FLAG STEER test (if roll steering
for approach).
(11) Nav flag drops into view during NAV FLAG test.
Page 543
34-60-67 8 July 2014
5. Sensors Checkout
A. IRS
NOTE: Inertial Reference System must be in NAV mode before conducting the following tests.
(1) From DATA page 2 press the line select key for any IRS.
(2) From IRS 1/1 note the following:
Status Hdg
1. _______________________ _______
2. _______________________ _______
3. _______________________ _______
B. GPIRS
(1) From DATA 2/4 press the line select key for IRS/GPS.
(2) From GPIRS1 1/3 note the following:
GPS __________ IRS ___________
EPU __________ HDG ___________
# Sats __________
Integ __________
HIL __________
(3) If additional GPIRS are installed, repeat the above procedure selecting the appropriate
IRS/GPS.
GPIRS2
GPS __________ IRS ___________
EPU __________ HDG ___________
# Sats __________
Integ __________
HIL __________
GPIRS3
GPS __________ IRS ___________
EPU __________ HDG ___________
# Sats __________
Integ __________
HIL __________
Page 544
34-60-67 8 July 2014
C. SBAS1
NOTE: Aircraft must be outside for this test.
(1) From DATA page 2 press the line select key for SBAS1.
(2) From SBAS 1/4 note the following:
MODE (ACQ, SBAS, NAV) ________
#SATS _________________________ INTEG __________
HPL ___________________________ HAL __________
VPL ___________________________ VAL __________
HFOM _________________________ VFOM __________
352 ____________________________ 354 __________
VER ___________________________
D. UASC Radio Reference Sensor (RRS)
NOTE: The following Checkout Procedures may be accomplished in flight and all data can
be compared to aircraft DME, VOR and (if applicable) TACAN.
(1) Display DATA page 2.
(2) Select VOR Status page.
(3) Tune test station by frequency (Test) or by ID (line select key adjacent to IDENT).
Check radial displayed on CDU for reasonableness.
❏ Pass ❏ Fail
E. Air Data
NOTE: This test requires the use of a pitot/static tester and approved procedures.
(1) From DATA page 2 press the ADC line select key.
(2) With pitot static test unit applied to the aircraft, run the airspeed up to approximately
200 knots. Confirm that the TAS displayed on the CDU is correct.
❏ Pass ❏ Fail
(3) Change the baro setting on the appropriate altimeter and confirm that the baro-altitude
reading on the CDU coincides with the altimeter reading.
❏ Pass ❏ Fail
(4) Confirm that the SAT displayed on the CDU is reasonable.
(5) Turn off FMS and turn it back on before proceeding with additional tests.
Page 545
34-60-67 8 July 2014
F. Fuel Flow
(1) Press the FUEL key until FUEL 5/5 is displayed.
(2) With all engines running, ensure that the fuel flow displayed on the CDU matches the
aircraft’s fuel flow gauges. Check this on at least two different power settings.
G. GPIRS Checkout
(1) GPIRS Status
GPIR1 1/3
gps HYB [D] irs NAV [D]
q 01 hdg 101Ø
#sata 06
integ RAIM set hdg ---ø
hil 0.06nm select
velocity irs ®
fms1 s123 e420 select
irs s124 e421 gps ®
gps s123 e422
hyb s125 e423 RETURN®
GPIR1 1/3
This page is accessed from DATA page 2 and provides data on the GPS and IRS
sensors.
NOTE: The page layout may differ in some installations. Status (GPS)
HYB Navigation mode is using hybrid position from IRS and GPS.
NAV GPS position alone is being used without IRS aiding.
ALT Altitude aiding mode (ADC altitude being used to supplement poor
satellite geometry).
INIT GPS/IRS is initializing position.
ACQ GPS is acquiring satellite for navigation.
TEST GPS is in test mode.
FAIL GPS has failed or no 429 data is being received.
Status (IRS)
NAV IRS has correctly aligned and is in NAV.
ALIGN IRS is in alignment mode.
FAIL No ARINC 429 data received from GPIRS or else GPIRS is sending
FAIL status on the 429 bus.
ATT IRS is in ATTITUDE mode. Sensor will not be used for navigation.
Page 546
34-60-67 8 July 2014
This page will also show number of satellites being tracked as well as the North and
East component velocities from the IRS, GPS, FMD and HYBrid IRS/GPS.
SET HDG (2R) the value entered is displayed and transmitted on ARINC 429 label
043 for 12 seconds. Then dashes are displayed in the field again and label stops
transmitting. This is used for setting IRS heading when in ATT mode. The display
will indicate (degree symbol) for magnetic and T for true heading.
The GPS and IRS can be independently selected or deselected from this page.
(2) GPIRS Comparison Page
GPIR1 2/3
fms1 pos irs pos
n 33 54.0 n 33 54.8
w 117 57.3 w 117 57.8
diff n 00 00.8
w 000 00.5
¬GPS 20.2 irs 15.2®
¬HYB 20.7
RETURN®
GPIR1 2/3
This page is similar to DATA 3/4 but only HYB, GPS and IRS positions are shown
for comparison to FMS positions. Pushing the line select key next to GPS, HYB or
IRS will display that position in the upper right hand field and show the difference
from the FMS position.
(3) GPIRS Diagnostics Page
GPIR1 3/3
gpirs diagnostics
270 08DA10
273 056789
274 8745AF
350 604344
352 873243
353 6A7EC2
355 05A5A5
RETURN®
GPIR1 3/3
This page shows contents of ARINC 429 labels from GPIRS as shown in left hand
column. Data is in hexadecimal and is for diagnostic purposes only.
Page 547
34-60-67 8 July 2014
(4) GPIRS Diagnostics
GPIRS BUS 270 – IRS Status
ARINC 429 Hi Speed
Transmission Rate: 500 milliseconds
GPIRS Diagnostic Bit Assignments
32
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
18
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
09
08
07
06
05
04
03
02
01
P MM Status Bits SDI 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 1
Status bit meanings if set to one:

Bit 17: IRS on DC power
Bit 15: IRS attitude is invalid, IRS is failed
Bit 13: IRS in NAV (navigation mode)
Bit 12: IRS in ARR (attitude mode)
Bit 11: IRS in ALIGN mode
Where MM is 0: 0 = valid
else = invalid
Where P is bit which causes sum of 32 bits to be odd.
GPIRS BUS 273 – Autonomous GPS Status
ARINC 429 Hi Speed
Page 548
34-60-67 8 July 2014
GPIRS Autonomous GPS Status Bit Assignments
32
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
18
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
09
08
07
06
05
04
03
02
01
P MM Status Bits 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 1

Bit 29: Reserved
Bit 28:
000 = Self-Test
001 = Initialization
010 = Acquisition
011 = Navigation
100 = Altitude Aiding
101 = Spare
110 = Spare
111 = Fault
Bit 25
Bit 23
Bit 19
Bit 15: Secondary IRS/FMS source used
Bit 14: IRS/FMS not present
Bit 13: Secondary DADS source used
Bit 12: DADS not present
Bit 11
else = invalid
GPIRS BUS 274 – Hybrid GPS Status
ARINC 429 Hi Speed
Page 549
34-60-67 8 July 2014
GPIRS Hybrid GPS Status Bit Assignments
32
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
18
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
09
08
07
06
05
04
03
02
01
P MM Status Bits 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 1

Bit 29: Reserved
Bit 28
000 = Self-Test
001 = Initialization
010 = Acquisition
011 = Navigation
100 = Altitude Aiding
101 = Spare
110 = Spare
111 = Fault
Bit 25
Bit 23
Bit 19: Active GPSSU Source:
0 = GPSSU #1
1 = GPSSU #2
Bit 18
00 = Valid
01 = Inactive
10 = Functional Test
11 = Fail
Bit 16
00 = Valid
01 = Inactive
10 = Functional Test
11 = Fail
Bit 14
else = invalid
Page 550
34-60-67 8 July 2014
6. GPS/SBAS Checkout
NOTE: In a single FMS installation interfaced with an LPV monitor, skip tests that require
using FMS #2.
A. FMS Power On Self-Test - Initialization and LPV Annunciation Test
(1) Apply aircraft power to the FMS and sensor(s) systems.
(2) Power up and initialize both FMSs.
(3) Confirm that the LPV lights are lit momentarily.
(4) Confirm that installed LOS annunciators are lit momentarily.
(5) Verify both FMSs pass all items on the self-test page.
(6) Verify the displayed position matches the aircraft location.
(7) Accept the position on FMS #1 and FMS #2 and verify that the reverse video ‘I’
disappears on both FMSs for SYNC operation.
(8) Verify both FMSs have the current database.
(9) On DATA 3/4 page verify that the FMS positions on each unit correspond to the
aircraft location and is consistent with the sensor positions and with the other FMS
position.
(10) Verify all data on DATA 2/4 page is accurate and reflects the configuration and
sensors installed.
B. GPS/SBAS Sensor Evaluation
NOTE: At times, it may take up to 30 minutes to acquire a valid almanac from the satellites
present.
(1) Display DATA 2/4 page on FMS #1. Verify Onside FMS displays an EPU value,
Offside displays Nav mode.
(2) On FMS #1 deselect SBAS #1. Verify Offside FMS displays an EPU value.
(3) Reselect SBAS #1. On Offside FMS, verify FMS displays Nav mode.
(4) Display DATA 2/4 page on FMS #2. Verify Onside FMS displays an EPU value.
(5) On FMS #2, deselect SBAS #2. Verify Offside FMS #1 displays an EPU value.
(6) Reselect SBAS #2. Verify Onside FMS displays an EPU value.
Page 551
34-60-67 8 July 2014
C. Flight Plan with LPV Approach
NOTE: A list of SBAS Channel IDs may be obtained from the following web site:
http://gps.faa.gov.
(1) With a destination airport in the flight plan, select FPL-MENU-ARRIVE and enter
the data on the page as normal to add the RNAV approach. Make selections as
prompted.
(2) With a destination airport in the flight plan, select FPL-MENU-ARRIVE and enter
the SBAS Channel ID in the Airport ID field.
(3) With the destination airport in the flight plan, select FPL-MENU-ARRIVE and enter
the SBAS Channel ID for another airport.
(4) Verify that the choice selections are correct for the airport and that the flight plan is
properly displayed after approach selection. Verify the SBAS Channel ID is correct
and matches the printed chart. Verify that the Path ID is correct.
NOTE: SBAS Channel ID is not available if there is no FASDB.
(5) Verify that the Flight Plan is modified, adding the approach chosen by the SBAS
Channel ID and that it is correct and reasonable.
(6) Verify that the field blanks until an acceptable SBAS channel or airport line number
is entered.
(7) Verify that the approach navigation source selected for the approach is positively
indicated in the normal field of view at each pilot station.
(8) Verify that the flight plan data is synchronized to the offside.
Page 552
34-60-67 8 July 2014
D. CDU Display of RNP/ANP
(1) Observe the RNP/ANP on CDU NAV 1/1 page.
E. GPS/SBAS Dynamic Test
Whenever any SBAS Critical Configuration Data is changed (FMS Transmit Bus, Analog
Bus (DEVs) or the Crosschannel Monitor), this test verifies that the SBAS subsystem has the
appropriate scale factors, timing and other requirements for the SBAS critical guidance
parameters and that the state of the crosschannel monitoring is as desired.
NOTE: A flight plan must be entered and linked to the navigation legs prior to running
GPS/SBAS Dynamic Test.
NOTE: The FMS will now begin a guidance bus test. It is imperative that the displayed
FMS guidance command as seen on the FMS is reflected accurately on the PFD
instruments and annunciations. This test will include deviations, flags and
annunciations. If any discrepancy occurs, it must be resolved before flight.
It should be noted in EFIS integrations that all EFIS systems may not recognize the
test criteria due to bus label format and structure. If this is the case, the EFIS
manufacture or direct contact with UASC should be exercised.
(1) Open MAINT 1/1 page by selecting MAINT from DATA 1/4 page.
DATA 1/4
¬NAV DATA CABIN DISP®
¬PILOT DATA MFD DISP®
¬DISK MSTR XFILL®
¬HOLD POS MAINT®
MAINT 1/1
¬CONFIG
¬PAS
¬STATIC TEST DIAG®
¬DYNAMIC TEST PERF VER®
¬S/W VERS RETURN®
(2) Select PAS LSK [2L] test.
MAINT/PAS 1/1
¬GUIDANCE BUS
¬ANTENNA CONFIRM
¬RESET GG12W ALMANAC
¬RESET GG12W EPHEMERIS
¬LOS TEST RETURN®
Page 553
34-60-67 8 July 2014
(3) Select GUIDANCE BUS LSK [1L] to display the GUIDANCE BUS STATUS page.
GUIDANCE BUS STATUS
onside offside
UNCONFIRMED UNCONFIRMED
xc-monitor
ENABLED
DYNAMIC TEST®
RETURN®
(4) Select DYNAMIC TEST LSK [4R] to run the Dynamic Test that will confirm any
SBAS critical configuration data changes.
(5) The FMS will indicate to the SBAS subsystem to begin the Dynamic Test and display
the progress of this test on the DYNAMIC TEST page as illustrated in the following:
(6) Observe the aircraft displays and/or indicators verifying that the displays match the
indication from the FMS.
DYNAMIC TESTS
IN PROGRESS
RIGHT UP
¬CANCEL
Test Output Test Duration FMS #1 FMS #2

RIGHT UP 10 seconds
HOLD (5 SEC) 5 Seconds
CTR XTK 10 seconds
CTR VDEV 10 seconds
LEFT-DOWN 10 seconds
HOLD (5 SEC) 5 Seconds
CENTER 10 seconds
FLAG VERT 5 Seconds
FLAG LAT 5 Seconds
LPV LIGHT ON 5 Seconds
LPV LIGHT OFF 5 Seconds
X-C MONITOR 5 Seconds
TEST COMPLETE End of Test
Page 554
34-60-67 8 July 2014
(7) When the SBAS subsystem completes the Dynamic Tests successfully and the FMS
displays a TEST COMPLETED message, a confirmation code and entry field are
displayed:
NOTE: If the Dynamic Test fails, the SBAS subsystem will exit the test and the
FMS will display TEST FAILED. LP and LPV will then be inhibited. The
SBAS configuration and/or aircraft wiring must be re-verified.
DYNAMIC TESTS
TEST COMPLETED
confirm code
1234
enter confirm code
--------------------
¬CONFIRM RETURN®
(8) Enter the alphanumeric equivalent value (i.e. ONETWOTHREEFOUR) for each of
the four numerical values of the displayed CONFIRM CODE (with leading zeros, if
any, no spaces, no decimals), press ENTER. Press the CONFIRM key LSK [5L] to
send data to the SBAS subsystem.
NOTE: This confirmation applies to the Onside FMS only.
DYNAMIC TESTS
TEST COMPLETED
confirm code
1234
enter confirm code
ONETWOTHREEFOUR
¬CONFIRM RETURN®
(9) The SBAS subsystem(s) (both Onside and Offside) verify the result for both the
Onside/Offside configurations and reports the status back to the FMS.
(10) The FMS displays the GUIDANCE BUS STATUS page displaying the status of both
the Onside and Offside systems.
NOTE: If the Offside is still unconfirmed, run the Guidance Bus Test on the other
FMS to enable LPV.
GUIDANCE BUS STATUS
onside offside
CONFIRMED UNCONFIRMED
xc-monitor
ENABLED
DYNAMIC TEST®
RETURN®
Page 555
34-60-67 8 July 2014
F. Antenna Offsets Test
This test must be run whenever the SBAS Antenna Offsets are changed.
(1) Open MAINT 1/1 page by selecting MAINT from DATA 1/4 page.
DATA 1/4
¬NAV DATA CABIN DISP®
¬PILOT DATA MFD DISP®
¬DISK MSTR XFILL®
¬HOLD POS MAINT®
MAINT 1/1
¬CONFIG
¬PAS
¬STATIC TEST DIAG®
¬DYNAMIC TEST PERF VER®
¬S/W VERS RETURN®
(2) Select PAS LSK [2L] test.
MAINT/PAS 1/1
¬GUIDANCE BUS
¬ANTENNA CONFIRM
¬RESET GG12W ALMANAC
¬RESET GG12W EPHEMERIS
¬LOS TEST RETURN®
(3) Select ANTENNA CONFIRM LSK [2L] to display the ANTENNA CONFIRM page.
The FMS displays the Antenna Offsets, confirmed or unconfirmed, for onside as
received from the SBAS subsystem.
ANTENNA 1/1
pas
UNCOMFIRMED confirm
x´+º£.ºm
-----------------
x´+ºº.m
-----------------
x´+º.m
-----------------
RETURN®
Page 556
34-60-67 8 July 2014
(4) Enter the alphanumeric equivalent value (i.e. ONETWOTHREE) for each of the
numerical values of the Onside displayed antenna offsets, including the sign and
leading/trailing zeros (no spaces or decimals). The ‘P’ and ‘M’ keys are used to
represent plus/minus respectively. The ENTER key is used to advance the cursor to
the next field.
ANTENNA 1/1
pas
UNCOMFIRMED CONFIRM®
x´+º£.ºm
PZEROTHREEZERO
x´+ºº.m
PZEROZEROEIGHT
x´-º.m
MZEROTWOFIVE
RETURN®
(5) Press CONFIRM LSK [1R], this sends the antenna data to the SBAS subsystem for
confirmation.
(6) The SBAS subsystem determines that the data is valid, confirms the data and the
FMS displays that the Onside Antenna data page as confirmed.
ANTENNA 1/1
pas
COMFIRMED CONFIRM®
x´+º£.ºm
PZEROTHREEZERO
x´+ºº.m
PZEROZEROEIGHT
x´-º.m
MZEROTWOFIVE
RETURN®
(7) Press RETURN LSK [5R] to return to the MAINT/PAS 1/1 page.
Page 557
34-60-67 8 July 2014
7. Troubleshooting
When an FMS fails any of the tests in the checkout section, troubleshoot it per the procedures
below.
Troubleshooting instructions are provided in the following three-column table, in which the
first column lists equipment symptoms or describes the portion of the checkout procedure
that the unit did not pass. These Malfunction/Symptoms are listed in approximately the same
sequence as the checkout procedures. The second column lists probable causes. The third
column describes the corrective action(s) for the malfunction.
After performing the listed corrective action, repeat the failed test to ensure that the problem
has been corrected. Then complete the checkout procedure from the point where it was
interrupted. Should the corrective action affect tests already passed, perform those tests
again.
Where more than one corrective action is listed, the first action listed is the most probable
repair that will correct the malfunction. However, when replacement of a major component
such as the FMS is recommended, it is permissible to replace individual circuit boards
instead if personnel are authorized by Universal Avionics Systems Corporation to do so. If
there is more than one corrective action listed and performing the first action does not correct
the problem, perform the next action listed.
NOTE: Ensure that you have eliminated all other potential causes of trouble before
returning the FMS, FPCDU or other major component for repair. Verify that the
installation wiring is correct. Determine whether the correct input and output
voltages are present. Verify that the required ARINC labels are present on the data
busses.
Page 558
34-60-67 8 July 2014
A. Self-Test
TROUBLE PROBABLE CAUSE CORRECTION
The Self-Test Page displays a May indicate fault in Self-Test. Push [MSG] to display failure
FAIL next to one or more of the information, troubleshoot indicated
items but after a short time, the fault.
Self-Test Page is replaced by the
Initialization Page.
The Self-Test Page displays a FMS is defective. Replace the FMS.
FAIL but is not replaced by the
Initialization Page.
CDU MSG indicator does not CDU is defective. Replace the CDU.
illuminate.
One or more of the annunciators The annunciator is defective. Troubleshoot annunciator per
does not illuminate during self-test. manufacturer’s instructions.
CRT brightness does not respond CDU is defective. Replace the CDU.
properly to dimming feature.
Keyboard brightness cannot be 1. Fault in radio lighting circuit. 1. Repair radio lighting circuit.
controlled by the radio lighting. 2. CDU is defective. 2. Replace FMS.
Software is not the correct version. FMS has the wrong software Reconfigure or upgrade software.
program.
DEXP is out of date. 1. System date or time is wrong. 1. Enter the correct date and time
2. Wrong database. on Initialization page.
2. Update database per Operator’s
Manual.
Page 559
34-60-67 8 July 2014
B. System Failure Messages
During normal FMS operations, numerous background tests are run continuously to assure
normal operations. Should failures occur, the FMS system will notify the operator with a
flashing message light on the panel or on the associated EFIS display. Pressing the MSG key
will display a message with information about the failure detected. Many failures can be a
result of problems other than the FMS systems components. The following table lists failure
messages that can be displayed by the FMS, their meanings and possible causes / remedies to
assist the maintenance technician with troubleshooting pilot reported failure messages. This
table lists only failure messages, not normal system status messages that are not indicative of
component failures.
Refer to the applicable Operator’s Manual for a complete listing of messages.
System Failure Messages
Failure Message Probable Cause Action/Correction
400 Hz REF FAIL 1. No power to circuit. 1. Check/reset 26 VAC circuit
breaker(s).
2. 400 Hz AC power has failed. 2. 26 VAC voltage/frequency out of
tolerance.
3. Wiring faults. 3. Troubleshoot wiring and repair.
4. Defective FMS. 4. Replace FMS.
ABNORMAL CKLIST DB FAIL The abnormal checklist database Reload checklist database.
has failed. (Only with Collins Pro
Line 4 800 configuration)
A/D CODE # Analog/Digital board failed self- Replace FMS.
test.
A/D HEADING FAIL 1. Present system heading source, 1. Check heading source to FMS,
A/D (synchro analog-to-digital), switch sources/reset system as
has failed. required.
3. Defective FMC. 3. Replace FMS.
ADC INPUT FAIL 1. An Air Data Computer (ADC) 1. Check circuit breakers for Air
failure is detected. Data Computer/ACU if installed.
Select alternate sources if
available.
AD DB BAD/MISSING FILE 1. Air Drop ballistics database file
missing.
2. Aircraft basic profile data file is
missing.
3. Incorrect CRC
4. Invalid data.
AD DB CRC CHECK FAIL 1. Airdrop ballistics database failed
CRC check.
2. Aircraft basic profile data has
failed CRC check.
Page 560
34-60-67 8 July 2014

AD DB ID VER MISMATCH 1. Customer ID, Ballistics
Database Version, Aircraft ID, or
Aircraft Data Version in the Airdrop
ballistics file or aircraft basic file
does not agree with the header
file.
AD PROFILE INVALID 1. The Airdrop profile is missing,
has the wrong CRC or contains
invalid data.
AFIS ARINC FAILURE The FMS has determined that a Troubleshoot bus and AFIS and
failure is present on the AFIS repair.
ARINC bus.
AFIS CONFIG INVALID The AFIS DMU has invalid
configuration data.
AFIS DOWNLINK FAIL The AFIS DMU has determined
that a downlink communication
has failed.
AFIS UPLINK FAIL The AFIS DMU has determined
that an uplink communication has
failed.
AFIS VHF MODEM FAILURE The VHF modem in the AFIS DMU Replace AFIS DMU.
has failed
AHRS # HEADING FAIL AHRS Heading has failed while in Troubleshoot AHRS and repair.
use as the FMS heading source.
AHRS # INPUT FAIL The AHRS input has failed or its Troubleshoot AHRS and repair.
status word indicates failure.
AIRPORT DATABASE FAIL A problem has been found in the Reload Navigation Database
airport section of the standard diskettes.
database.
AIRWAY DATABASE FAIL A problem has been detected in Reload Navigation Database.
the Airways database.
ALERTER ALT INVALID In the Primus 1000 installation,
VNAV is in descent mode and the
Preselector altitude is valid and
greater than or equal to the current
system altitude plus 150 feet.
ALIGN PT DATABASE FAIL A problem has been detected in Reload pilot database diskette.
the Align Points database.
ALT INVALID FOR VNAV VNAV is in Descent mode and
ADC altitude is invalid or
inappropriate for VNAV guidance,
e.g., barometric altitude is
unavailable and pressure altitude
is below 18,000 feet.
Page 561
34-60-67 8 July 2014

ALTITUDE INVALID 1. The altitude portion of the Air 1. Check circuit breakers/status of
Data Computer is unusable. Air Data Computer/ACU if
2. Wiring faults. installed.
3. Defective FMS. 2. Troubleshoot wiring and repair.
3. Replace FMS.
ANALOG ATTITUDE FAIL The ADC altitude input is invalid or
failed.
ANALOG BOARD FAIL Faults on analog data outputs from Replace analog board.
FMS.
ANALOG INST FAIL 1. No power to circuit. 1. Check/reset 26 VAC circuit
breaker(s).
2. 400 Hz (AC) power has failed. 2. 26 VAC voltage/frequency out of
tolerance.
APC INPUT FAIL Aircraft performance computer 1. Check circuit breakers/status of
(APC) is configured, but no signal APC.
has been received for three 2. Troubleshoot wiring and repair.
seconds. (RC-135 Aircraft only) 3. Replace FMS.
APPROACH DATABASE FAIL A failure has been detected in the Reload navigation database.
approach database.
ARPT COMS DATABASE FAIL A failure has been detected in the Reload navigation database.
communications section of the
database.
ARPT NAME DATABASE FAIL A failure has been detected in the Reload navigation database.
geographical airport names
database.
ARINC # FAIL 1. Faults in wiring from/to FMS 1. Troubleshoot wiring and repair.
ARINC inputs/outputs.
Page 562
34-60-67 8 July 2014

ASCB FAIL 1. An ASCB board failure is
detected during the power-up self-
test,
2. An ASCB board failure is
detected after power-up self-test,
3. The Bus Side discrete input pair
is invalid,
4. The ASCB Version discrete
input pair is invalid,
5. Any of the following Radar
Waypoint inputs are configured:
429 Radar, 571 Radar, or Radar
1500,
6. The KFC FGS input is
configured,
7. Any of the Pro Line 4
configuration is configured,
8. Any of the Primus configuration
is configured.
9. CSDB MFD input is configured,
10. Trigger Weight is not
configured.
11. Reset logic: Message will
remain on MSG page until the
condition clears
ASCB TX INOPERATIVE The Listen Only discretes are
detected to be in an invalid state at
power-up or during normal
operation.
ASCB LEFT BUS FAIL The ASCB board detects the loss
of all user response data on the
respective bus for more than 1
second.
ASCB RIGHT BUS FAIL The ASCB board detects the loss
of all user response data on the
respective bus for more than 1
second.
AUXILIARY BOARD FAIL 1. Faults on Roll Steering, CSDB 1. Troubleshoot wiring and repair.
or Fuel Flow wiring.
BACKUP DATABASE FAIL A fault in the Database software. Reload FMS Software.
CKLST DATABASES FAIL All checklist databases have Reload checklist database.
hailed.
CLOCK TIMER FAIL The clock timer on the CPU board Replace CPU board.
has failed self-test.
Page 563
34-60-67 8 July 2014

COMP ARPTS DATABASE FAIL The Company Airport database 1. Reload the Company Airports
has failed error checking. database.
2. Replace FMS.
COMP ROUTE DATABASE FAIL The Company Routes database 1. Reload the Company Routes
has failed error checking. database.
2. Replace FMS.
COMP WPTS DATABASE FAIL The Company Waypoints 1. Reload the Company Waypoints
database has failed error database.
checking. 2. Replace FMS.
CONFIG DATA FAILED 1. Wiring faults on configuration 1. Troubleshoot wiring and repair.
module.
2. Defective configuration module 2. Troubleshoot configuration
module.
CONFIG MODULE FAILED 1. Wiring faults on configuration 1. Troubleshoot wiring and repair.
module.
2. Defective configuration module 2. Troubleshoot configuration
module.
CONFIG UPDATE REQUIRED Configuration module and FMS Reconfigure module to correct
configuration data has failed settings.
requiring the FMS to be configured
for installation.
CREW CKLIST DATABASE FAIL The crew notes database has Reload checklist database.
failed.
CROSSFILL FAIL: BAD DATA 1. Wiring faults in crossfill data 1. Troubleshoot wiring and repair.
(Dual or triple installations only) lines between FMS systems.
CROSSFILL FAIL: BUS 1. Wiring faults in crossfill data 1. Troubleshoot wiring and repair.
(Dual or triple installations only) lines between FMS systems.
CSDB SELFTEST FAIL CSDB serial ports have failed self-
test.
DATABASE EXPIRED The current date is past the Nav Load current Nav Database
Database expiration date. diskettes.
DATABASE FAIL A part or the entire navigation Reload Nav Database diskettes.
database has failed.
DEMONSTRATION MODE The aircraft identification is Reconfigure system to normal
configured as “DEMO” and sensor mode before flight.
data is simulated internally.
DISCRETE I/O FAIL 1. Faults on wiring to FMS discrete 1. Troubleshoot wiring and repair.
input/output wiring.
DME TUNE FAIL This message alerts the user that
an ARINC 709 series DME has not
tuned to the pilot requested
frequency.
Page 564
34-60-67 8 July 2014

DOPPLER FAIL Doppler is selected and has failed. Check status of Doppler sensor
and wiring.
EFIS #n SEL HDG FAIL The FMS has detected that the 1. Verify the MPU/MFD is
CSDB bus from the MPU has gone operational.
inactive or failed. The bus would 2. Troubleshoot and repair wiring.
have had to be active for this 3. Replace FMS.
message to be displayed.
EMERGENCY CKLIST The emergency checklist database Reload checklist database.
DATABASE FAIL has failed.
ENROUTES DATABASE FAIL The Navigation Database Reload Nav Database diskettes.
containing enroute intersections
has failed.
ENRT COMS DATABASE FAIL A failure has been detected in the Reload navigation database.
enroute communications section of
the database.
ERP # FAIL The EFIS radar panel (ERP) Replace the failed ERP.
associated with this FMS has
failed.
FLEXPERF BASE DB FAIL CRC failure on the FlexPerf Base
database.
FLEXPERF OP DB FAIL CRC failure on the FlexPerf
Operational database.
FLEXPERF DB MISMATCH If a FlexPerf Base database exists
in internal memory and the
database identifier resident in the
FlexPerf Base database is not
identical to the corresponding
database identifier specified in the
FMS Configuration.
FMC BATTERY LOW Defective FMS. Replace FMS.
FMS DATALINK QUEUE FULL Datalink messages are not being Troubleshoot and repair Datalink
sent resulting in a full message system.
queue.
FMS NETWORK COMM FAIL The FMS internally programmed Replace FMS.
Ethernet address has failed. There
is no communication with the DTU.
FMS PART NUMBER MISMATCH The FMS installed has a different Verify correct part number FMS is
part number than the configuration installed. Reconfigure as required.
stored.
FUELFLOW FAIL 1. Defective fuel flow input source. 1. Troubleshoot and repair fuel
This will be indicated if engine is flow input source if necessary.
shut down or flow signal is lost for
four minutes.
2. Faults on fuel flow wiring. 2. Troubleshoot and repair wiring.
FUEL FLOW SELF TEST FAIL 1. Faults on fuel flow input ports. 1. Verify configuration is correct.
Page 565
34-60-67 8 July 2014
GLS # CONFIG MODULE FAIL The GLS #n configuration module 1. Troubleshoot configuration
has failed. module wiring.
2. Replace configuration module.
GLS # FAIL The GPS Landing System LRU Troubleshoot and repair the GLS.
has failed
GLS # VDL FAIL The VHF data link board internal to Troubleshoot the GLS.
the GLS LRU has failed.
GNSS # FAIL 1. Defective or inoperative GNSS 1. Check status of GNSS sensor.
sensor.
2. Wiring faults on GNSS input to 2. Troubleshoot and repair wiring.
FMS.
GPIR # FAILED 1. Defective or inoperative GPIRS 1. Check status of GPIRS sensor.
sensor.
2. Wiring faults on GPIRS input to 2. Troubleshoot and repair wiring.
FMS.
GPS # FAILED 1. GPS position data is missing or 1. Check status of GPS sensor on
invalid or the status label indicates DATA pages.
a FAIL status exists.
2. GPS antenna coax is damaged 2. Check condition of GPS
or disconnected. antenna/coax and repair as
required.
3. Wiring faults on GPS 3. Troubleshoot and repair wiring.
input/output wiring.
4. Defective GPS sensor. 4. Replace GPS sensor. If GPS is
internal to the FMS, replace FMS.
HEADING REF FAIL 1. No power to circuit. 1. Check/reset 26 VAC circuit
breaker(s).
2. 400 Hz (AC) power has failed. 2. 26 VAC voltage/frequency out of
tolerance.
3. Wiring faults. 3. Troubleshoot and repair wiring.
IC600L HEADING FAIL The left heading source has failed Troubleshoot and repair the left
(Honeywell Primus 1000 only) heading source.
IC600R HEADING FAIL The right heading source has 1. Troubleshoot and repair the
failed (Honeywell Primus 1000 right heading source.
only). 2. Replace FMS
IC600-L BUS FAIL The left IC600 bus has failed 1. Troubleshoot and repair the
(Honeywell Primus 1000 only). Primus 1000 system.
2. Replace the FMS.
IC600-R BUS FAIL The right IC600 bus has failed 1. Troubleshoot and repair the
(Honeywell Primus 1000 only). Primus 1000 system.
2. Replace the FMS.
IMS BUS FAIL In the Sextant IMS-01 and IMS-02
configuration, designed for the de
Havilland DHC-8 Q400, Label 270
does not have a valid SSM, or is
not detected on the bus.
Page 566
34-60-67 8 July 2014

INVALID ARINC VERSION Two ARINC boards, which do not Replace the FMS.
have the same software version
numbers, are installed in the FMS.
INVALID CONFIGURATION FMS configuration data is Reconfigure module to correct
incorrect. settings.
INVALID FUEL CONFIG The fuel flow sensor configuration Reconfigure to correct settings.
is invalid or incomplete.
IRS # FAIL 1. An inertial reference system 1. Check status of the IRS system.
failure is detected. Repair or replace IRS as required.
2. Faults in input wiring to the
FMS. 2. Troubleshoot and repair wiring.
IRS # HEADING FAIL The system heading source has 1. Check status of the IRS system.
failed. Repair or replace IRS as required.
2. Troubleshoot and repair wiring.

LCS FAIL # 1. The message displayed where # 1. Check status of the LCS sensor.
is the failure code for the type
failure the LCS has detected as
follows:
1 = LCS Program
Checksum fail.
2 = LCS ARINC Self Test
Fail.
3 = LCS Memory Test Fail
9 = LCS not
communicating with the FMS.
2. Wiring faults in input wiring to 2. Troubleshoot and repair wiring.
the FMS.
LEFT IOC -…FAIL The left input/output concentrator Replace the failed IOC.
(onside or offside) has failed.
MAGVAR DB FAIL A problem has been found in the
navigation MagVar database.
Access to this database will not be
permitted. The FMS will instead
use the backup MagVar database.
MEMORY BANK # FAIL The internal memory bank has Replace the FMS.
failed error checking.
MOT WPT MEMORY FAIL The Mark On Target waypoint Replace the FMS.
memory section has failed power
up and self-test.
NAV DATABASES FAILED All of the navigation databases Reload navigation database.
have failed.
NDB DATABASE FAIL A problem has been found in the Reload navigation database.
NDB database.
NDB NAME DATABASE FAIL An error was detected in the NDB Reload navigation database.
plain language name database.
Page 567
34-60-67 8 July 2014

NEW MAINT LOG EXISTS This message is displayed one Download maintenance log to a
minute after landing when any blank DOS formatted diskette and
diagnostic history event has been view with ASCII text editor for
recorded during the previous flight. analysis.
NONVOLATILE MEMORY FAIL 1. The nonvolatile memory has 1. Recycle power to FMS to
failed the power up test due to attempt to clear. Pilot,
voltage transients corrupting performance and checklist
system RAM. databases will likely be lost and
have to be reloaded as required.
NORMAL CKLIST DATABASE The normal checklist database has Reload checklist database as
FAIL failed (only with Collins Pro Line 4 required.
interface).
OFFSIDE FLAP POS FAILED The offside flap position input to Troubleshoot and repair the flap
the Primus 1000 has failed (LR45 position input to the Primus 1000.
only).
ONSIDE FLAP POS FAILED The onside flap position input to Troubleshoot and repair the flap
the Primus 1000 has failed (LR45 position input to the Primus 1000.
only).
OTHER FMS HEADING FAILED The FMS is using heading from Troubleshoot and repair heading
(dual or triple FMS installations the other FMS and that heading input sources to specified FMS.
only) has failed.
PAS/ANALOG FAIL PAS/Analog Board Fails.
PAS/ARINC FAIL PAS/ARINC Board Fails.
PAS CONFIG FAILED Communication with or data in the
PAS configuration data has failed.
PERF DATABASE FAILED The performance database has Reload performance database.
failed.
PERF DB ID MISMATCH The performance database ID Reload correct performance
entered on the configuration pages database or reconfigure ID code in
does not agree with the configuration module to correct
performance database ID on the data.
disk that is loaded.
PILOT APPR DATABASE FAIL A problem has been detected in Reload pilot database.
the pilot defined approach
database.
PILOT ARPT DATABASE FAIL A problem has been detected in Reload pilot database.
the pilot defined airport database.
PILOT DATABASES FAILED The database of all pilot defined Reload pilot database.
locations has failed.
PILOT RNWY DATABASE FAIL A problem has been detected in Reload pilot database.
the pilot defined runway database.
PILOT ROUTE DATABASE The database of pilot defined Reload pilot database.
FAILED routes has failed.
PILOT SID DATABASE FAIL A problem has been detected in Reload pilot database.
the pilot defined SID database.
Page 568
34-60-67 8 July 2014
PILOT STAR DATABASE FAIL A problem has been detected in Reload pilot database.
the pilot defined STAR database.
PILOT WPT DATABASE FAIL A problem has been detected in Reload pilot database.
the pilot defined waypoint
database.
n VOLT PWER SUPPLY # FAIL 1. Wiring faults on configuration 1. Troubleshoot wiring and repair.
(n = 3 VDC, 5 VDC, +8 VDC or module.
–8VDC) 2. DTU wiring faults. 2. Troubleshoot wiring and repair.
PROGRAM CHECK FAIL A fault in the FMS Software. Reload the FMS Software.
PRO LINE 21-L BUS FAIL The left PL-21 bus has failed or is 1. Troubleshoot and repair the Pro
invalid (Collins Pro Line 21 EFIS Line 21 system
only). 2. Replace the FMS.
PRO LINE 21-R BUS FAIL The right PL-21 bus has failed or is 1. Troubleshoot and repair the Pro
invalid (Collins Pro Line 21 EFIS Line 21 system
only). 2. Replace the FMS.
RCU # FAIL 1. Wiring faults in RCU to FMS 1. Troubleshoot wiring and repair.
interface.
2. Defective RCU. 2. Replace RCU.
RIGHT IOC-…FAIL The right input/output concentrator Replace the failed IOC.
(onside or offside) has failed.
RRS DATA BUS FAIL 1. Wiring faults in RRS interface. 1. Troubleshoot wiring and repair.
2. Defective RRS. 2. Replace RRS.
RRS (DME, TACAN, VOR) SELF 1. Wiring faults in RRS interface. 1. Troubleshoot wiring and repair.
TEST FAIL 2. Defective RRS. 2. Replace RRS.
RRS TUNE BUS FAIL 1. Faults in tune data wiring from 1. Troubleshoot wiring and repair.
FMS to RRS.
RRS (DME, TACAN, VOR) TUNE 1. Faults in tune data wiring from 1. Troubleshoot wiring and repair.
FAIL FMS to RRS.
2. Wiring faults between the RRS 2. Troubleshoot wiring and repair.
and DME, TACAN, and/or VOR.
RTU # FAIL 1. Wiring faults in RTU to FMS 1. Troubleshoot wiring and repair.
interface.
2. Defective RTU. 2. Replace RTU.
RUNWAY DATABASE FAIL The runway database has failed. Reload navigation database.
SBAS DATABASE FAIL A problem has been found in the Reload navigation database.
SBAS approach database. The
FMS will limit SBAS Approach to
the LNAV level of service.
SBAS # FAIL FAIL status has been determined
for the indicated SBAS
SID DATABASE FAIL The Navigation SID database has Reload navigation database.
failed.
Page 569
34-60-67 8 July 2014

SOFTWARE CONFIG MISMATCH The loaded version of software 1. Reconfigure FMS.
does not match the Software 2. Replace FMS.
Control Number (SCN) stored in
the configuration module.
SPCL MISSION MEMORY FAIL The special missions memory Replace the FMS.
section has failed power up self
test.
STAR DATABASE FAIL The Navigation STAR database Reload navigation database.
has failed.
STEERING FAIL 1. Loss of TAS input to the FMS 1. Check TAS output and repair as
This failure may be reset by from the ADC. required.
positioning the cursor over the 2. Faulty wiring on roll steering 2. Troubleshoot wiring and repair.
ROLL CMD line on DATA page 5 output from FMS.
(General Data) and then pushing 3. Defective FMS. 3. Replace FMS.
[BACK] and then [ENTER].
SYNC CONFIG MISMATCH FMS detects mismatch in one of Check configuration of all FMSs.
the configuration settings (VNAV,
Fuel, Temp Comp, Lateral
Steering, Approach Types,
Heading Select, TGT FPA)
TACAN FAIL Defective TACAN unit. 1. Troubleshoot wiring and repair
2. Replace TACAN unit.
TAS INVALID 1. Faulty ADC/ACU system. 1. Check ADC/ACU system and
repair as required.
2. Wiring faults in ADC/TAS input 2. Troubleshoot wiring and repair.
to FMS.
TAWS FAIL TAWS FMS fixed-pages is
configured, and Label 123 is not
received as valid.
TERMINALS DATABASE FAIL The terminal intersection database 1. Reload the NAV database.
has failed error checking. Access 2. Replace the FMS.
to data is denied.
UNILINK FAIL 1. Defective UniLink unit. 1. Replace UniLink unit.
VHF NAME DATABASE FAIL The navigation VHF plain Reload navigation database.
language name database has
failed
VHF NAVAID DATABASE FAIL The navigation navaid database Reload navigation database.
has failed.
VOR TUNE FAIL AN ARINC VOR has not tuned the 1. Attempt to tune another VOR
selected frequency. station.
2. Troubleshoot and repair the
ARINC VOR.
3. Replace the FMS.
Page 570
34-60-67 8 July 2014

XFILL CONFIG MISMATCH Crossfill data has been sent to and Verify FMS configuration.
FMS that is not configured to
receive this data. This message
alerts the operator that crossfill
data was sent but not accepted.
Page 571
34-60-67 8 July 2014
C. Database Update Error Messages
The system provides notification of errors that occur during the database update process
which prevent successful completion of the database load procedure.
The system provides notification of errors that occur during the database update process
which prevent successful completion of the database load procedure. The use of the term
“DTU” is used to reference the DTU, DTU-100 or SSDTU and the use of the terms “DISK”
displayed on the FMS and “data storage device” are used to reference floppy disk, Zip disk,
USB or Secure Digital data storage devices.
Database Update Error Messages
Trouble Probable Cause Action/Correction
COMMUNICATION ERROR: 1. DTU power interrupted. 1. Restore power to DTU.
DTU STOPPED RESPONDING 2. DTU wiring faults. 2. Troubleshoot wiring and repair.
3. Defective DTU 3. Replace DTU.
FMS AND DTU ARE OUT OF 2. DTU wiring faults. 2. Troubleshoot wiring and repair.
SYNC 3. Defective DTU 3. Replace DTU.
OPERATION ABORTED BY DTU 2. DTU wiring faults. 2. Troubleshoot wiring and repair.
3. Defective DTU 3. Replace DTU.
UNRECOVERABLE ERRORS IN 2. DTU wiring faults. 2. Troubleshoot wiring and repair.
TRANSFERRED DATA 3. Defective DTU 3. Replace DTU.
COULD NOT LOAD ALL Attempting to load incorrect Obtain and load correct database.
DATABASES – TOO LARGE FOR database.
AVAILABLE MEMORY
DISK FORMAT ERROR 1. Bad data storage device. 1. Replace data storage device.
2. DTU wiring faults. 2. Troubleshoot wiring and repair.
3. Defective DTU. 3. Replace DTU.
DISK IS FULL An attempt is made to write flight Insert a blank formatted data
data to the data storage device and storage device.
there is not enough free space
available.
DISK IS WRITE PROTECTED The DTU detects that the data Reset the write protect device on
storage device is write protected. the data storage device.
DISK MUST BE EMPTY USE An attempt is made to do a Pilot Use blank formatted data storage
ANOTHER DISK OR PUSH Database Save and the data device to perform pilot database
FORMAT DISK ON DISK MENU storage device already contains at save function.
TO DELETE ALL FILES ON THIS least one DOS file.
DISK
DISK READ OR WRITE ERROR 1. Bad data storage device 1. Replace data storage device.
2. Electrical noise on DTU data 2. Troubleshoot wiring and repair.
lines.
DTU NOT DETECTED 1. DTU is not connected. 1. Check DTU connections and
repair as required.
2. DTU is not turned on and 2. Turn on the DTU and wait until it
finished with self-test. has finished self-test.
Page 572
34-60-67 8 July 2014
Database Update Error Messages

EMPTY DISK OR NON-FMS DISK The data storage device does not Use correct data storage device.
contain a header file.
INVALID DATA ON DISK Faulty or incorrect data storage Use correct data storage device.
device.
INVALID DISK VERSION 1. The disk version field in the 1. Verify that FMS configuration
header does not agree with the shows correct SCN.
FMS SCN.
2. Faulty or incorrect data storage 2. Use correct data storage
device. device.
LOAD CANCELLED BY 1. Errors in loading. 1. Cancel and restart load.
ANOTHER FMS 2. Defective FMS. 2. Replace FMS.
LOAD CANCELLED 1. Errors in loading. 1. Cancel and restart load.
MISSING OR UNFORMATTED 1. No data storage device in DTU 1. Use correct data storage
DISK device.
2. Incorrect type data storage 2. If appropriate format the
device or is not DOS formatted to diskette or use correct diskette.
correct data size.
MUST FIRST UPDATE NAV An attempt is made to load a NAV Load the NAV standard database
DATABASE BEFORE THIS extended database before the NAV first and then load the NAV
EXTENDED OR COMPANY standard database of the same extended database.
ROUTE DATABASE CAN BE cycle is loaded.
LOADED
MUST FIRST UPDATE NAV An attempt is made to load a pilot Update the FMS to the same
DATBASE BEFORE THIS PLT database that is more recent than navigation database cycle used to
DATABASE CAN BE LOADED the one currently stored. create the pilot database. Then
load the pilot database.
POWER FAIL A power failure has interrupted the Reset power and restart the load
operation. as required.
D. Configuration Verification
Data value fails to match the 1. Configuration Module is 1. Reprogram per System Data
corresponding data value on the programmed incorrectly. Installation section in this manual.
Aircraft Configuration Data Sheets. 2. Mount rack or FMS connector 2. Determine fault and replace.
pins, insulation or wiring is
defective.
3. FMS is defective. 3. Replace FMS.
Page 573
34-60-67 8 July 2014
E. FMS Self-Test Output Checkout
HSI does not show required 1. Configuration is incorrect. 1. Reprogram.
output. 2. FMS to HSI wiring is incorrect 2. Check and correct wiring (see
Troubleshooting Synchro: Wiring
to Receiver).
3. HSI is defective. 3. Replace HSI.
Flight director does not command 1. FMS to autopilot/flight director is 1. Rewire correctly.
10 degree right bank. incorrect.
2. Flight director is defective. 2. Replace the flight director.
F. FMS Output to HSI Checkout

HSI does not show required 1. Configuration is incorrect. 1. Reprogram.
output. 2. FMS to HSI wiring is incorrect. 2. Check and correct wiring (see
Troubleshooting Synchro: Wiring
to Receiver).
3. HSI is defective 3. Replace HSI.
G. DIST/GS Checkout
DIST is not counting down or GS FMS is defective. Replace the FMS.
(Ground Speed) is not approx. 150
knots.
H. HSI From Checkout

HSI does not show FROM 1. HSI is defective. 1. Replace HSI.
indication. 2. FMS is defective. 2. Replace FMS.
I. DIST/BRG Checkout
CDU does not show correct 1. Fault in wiring. 1. Troubleshoot and repair wiring.
distance or bearing. 2. CDU is defective. 2. Replace CDU.
3. FMS is defective 3. Replace FMS.
HSI does not show above values. 1. Fault in wiring. 1. Troubleshoot and repair wiring.
2. HSI is defective. 2. Replace HSI.
Multifunction display (MFD) does 1. Wiring to MFD is incorrect. 1. Check and correct.
not show correct display. 2. MPU is defective. 2. Replace the MPU.
3. MFD is defective. 3. Replace the MFD.
4. FMS is defective. 4. Replace the FMS.
Page 574
34-60-67 8 July 2014
J. Roll Steering Checkout
Control yoke does not rotate in 1. FMS to autopilot/flight director 1. Rewire.
specified direction. wiring is reversed.
2. Flight guidance equipment is 2. Check out and correct.
defective.
FMS HDG panel annunciator does 1. Annunciator or its wiring is 1. Repair as required.
not illuminate. defective.
K. Input of a Selected Crosstrack Checkout

CDU displays are not as required. FMS is defective. Replace FMS.
MFD display is incorrect. MFD is defective. Take corrective action.
HSI CDI does not deflect as 1. HSI is defective. 1. Replace the HSI.
required. 2. FMS is defective. 2. Replace the FMS.
L. DME Checkout
DME Sensor Status Page does 1. DME sensor or wiring is 1. Determine which and correct.
not show correct distance to DME. defective. 2. Replace FMS.
2. FMS is defective
M. Winds Display Checkout

Winds Display on EHSI does not 1. EHSI drive computer is 1. Replace the EHSI drive
agree with that on CDU. defective. computer.
N. Sensor Checkout
(1) Checkout of Inertial Sensor Status and Heading Displays
CDU does not show FAILED when FMS is defective. Replace FMS.
ISS is off.
CDU does not show ALIGN when 1. IRS or its wiring is defective. 1. Repair as required.
MSU is set to Align. 2. FMS is defective 2. Replace FMS.
CDU does not show NAV when 1. IRS or its wiring is defective. 1. Repair as required.
IRS is in NAV mode. 2. FMS is defective 2. Replace FMS.
CDU HDG IN does not agree with IRS is defective. Replace IRS.
the reference heading.
CDU HDG IN does not agree with 1. IRS or its wiring is defective. 1. Repair as required.
the HSI HDG 2. FMS is defective 2. Replace FMS.
Page 575
34-60-67 8 July 2014
(2) Checkout of LORAN C Sensor
LCS display does not show 1. Required LORAN station(s) is 1. Check station maintenance
expected values. off the air. chart in Navigation Systems
section, Page 601.
2. Sensor system is defective. 2. Repair the sensor system.
(3) Checkout of Sensor Lat/Long Coordinates vs. CDU – Calculated Position

Sensor supplied coordinates do 1. Required VLF station(s) is off 1. Check station maintenance
not agree with CDU calculated the air. chart in Navigation Systems
position. section, Page 601.
2. Sensor system is defective. 2. Repair the sensor system.
Page 576
34-60-67 8 July 2014
Navigation Systems
1. Scheduled Maintenance Periods of Navigation Systems
Maintenance periods are subject to change. Information about DGPS and GPS may be
obtained on the Internet at www.navcen.uscg.gov
Additional information about DGPS and GPS is available from:
703-313-5900
U.S. Coast Guard Navigation Center
7323 Telegraph Road
Alexandria, VA 20598-7310
A. DGPS Maintenance Schedules
Differential GPS maintenance schedules are not available.
B. GPS Maintenance Schedules
The Global Positioning System has no scheduled maintenance that affects the availability of
the system.
Page 601
34-60-67 8 July 2014
Fuel Flow Inputs

1. Fuel Flow Sensors
The FMS accepts up to four fuel flow inputs directly from the engine fuel flowmeter sensors.
Sensor types which may be operated with the FMS include but are not limited to the
following:
I.D.C. fuel flow indicators
Canadian Marconi indicators
Eldec Flowmeter Transmitters
Ragen
X & O Engineering Flowmeter Transmitters
Gull Airborne
Ametek fuel flow indicators
Howell fuel flow indicators
Simmons Precision transmitters
General Electric AC voltage pickoff
Learjet/E.T. Fuel Management Computer (Pulse). All Learjet models require
J.E.T. S.B. #542-1158-7
Learjet DC Fuel Management
Intertechnique Totalizer
NOTE: For information on Aircraft Type vs. Fuel Flowmeter Type Reference Chart and
Fuel Flow Scaling, refer to the SBAS FMS SCN 1001/1101 Configuration Manual,
Report No. 34-61-02.
NOTE: For wiring diagrams, pin assignments and other specific information, refer to the
SBAS FMS SCN 1001/1101 Interface Manual, Report No. 34-60-71.
Page 701
34-60-67 8 July 2014

Uns 1e PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

You might also like

Uns 1e PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Uns 1e PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

UNS-1Ew

Flight Management System

The information contained herein is subject to Export Administration Regulations (“EAR”),

This publication is available at www.uasc.com.

©2014 UNIVERSAL AVIONICS SYSTEMS CORPORATION

3260 East Universal Way

Record of Temporary Changes

List of Effective Pages

Description and Operation

Power/Display Control Page

Parallax Adjustment Page

Confirm Off Page

(2) Flash Memory

(1) ERP Radar Controls

(1) TSO-C109 (09-Dec-1985): Airborne Navigation Data Storage System

B. Applicable Advisory Circulars and Other References

Temporary Change No. 34.60.67-1

Approved By: ___________________

00 Title Initial revision

d. This installation complies with equipage and accuracy requirements of AC 90-100A

RNP AR-APCH Not Supported

Basic UNS-1Ew P/N

The part number of the Configuration Module is 30171.

Basic Part Number

H. 4-Inch FPCDU (P/N 1117-X-XXX)

I. Multifunction Control Display Unit (MCDU)

Future Use Variable = 1

Basic Part Number for Cockpit DTU-100

K. Portable Data Transfer Unit (PDTU-100)

Basic Part Number for Portable DTU-100

L. Solid State Data Transfer Unit

Basic Part Number for Cockpit SSDTU

M. Portable Solid State Data Transfer Unit

Basic Part Number for Portable SSDTU

B. LPV Monitor (P/N 3116–52–1110)

C. 5-Inch FPCDU (P/N 1018-X-XXX)

E. Data Transfer Unit (DTU-100) (P/N 1406-01-X)

F. SSDTU (P/N 1408-00-X)

Temporary Change No. 34.60.67-3

Annunciator Color Company Part Number

Annunciator Color Company Part Number

B. UNS-1lFw/1Lw (LPV Monitor) Installation Kit P/N K12075

D. Data Transfer Unit (DTU-100) Installation Kit P/N K12050

F. SSDTU Installation Kit P/N K12079-1

(“EAR”), 15 C.F.R. Parts 730-774. Diversion contrary to U.S. law is prohibited.

The information contained herein is subject to the Export Administration Regulation

5.381 0.560 8.714 1.728 2.279

1. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES

2. WEIGHT: APPROXIMATELY 8.1 LBS

(“EAR”), 15 C.F.R. Parts 730-774. Diversion contrary to U.S. law is prohibited.

The information contained herein is subject to the Export Administration Regulation

1. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES.

3. MATING CONNECTOR: SEE INSTALLATION KIT K12075.

0.20 DIA 2 PLCS

(“EAR”), 15 C.F.R. Parts 730-774. Diversion contrary to U.S. law is prohibited.

The information contained herein is subject to the Export Administration Regulation

1. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES.

2. WEIGHT: RACK = 11.2 ozs., CONNECTOR = 9.0 ozs.